Top Electrical Design Questions & Answers: 1 Edition

Top Electrical Design
Questions & Answers

1st Edition
Prepared by: Mahmoud Essam Hizzah
Date: January 2010
Country: Cairo - Egypt
Career Title: Electrical Design Engineer

‫ﺑﺴﻢ اﷲ اﻟﺮﺣﻤﻦ اﻟﺮﺣﻴﻢ‬
‫"و ﻗﻞ رب زدﻧﻰ ﻋﻠﻤﺎ"‬
‫اﻟﺤﻤﺪ ﷲ و اﻟﺼﻼة و اﻟﺴﻼم ﻋﻠﻰ رﺳﻮل اﷲ ﺻﻠﻰ اﷲ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ و ﺳﻠﻢ‬
‫اﻣﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ‬
‫ﺗﻌﺘﺒﺮ أﻋﻤﺎل اﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻼت واﻟﺘﺮآﻴﺒﺎت اﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻓﻰ اﻟﻤﺒﺎﻧﻰ ﻣﻦ أهﻢ اﻟﺘﺮآﻴﺒﺎت ﻓﻰ ﻣﻌﻈﻢ اﻟﻤﺸﺮوﻋﺎت اﻟﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬهﺎ ﻓﻰ اﻟﻮﻗﺖ‬
‫ﻼ ﻋﻦ دورهﺎ اﻷﺳﺎﺳﻰ ﻓﻰ اﻟﺤﻔﺎظ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫اﻟﺤﺎﻟﻰ‪ ،‬وﻗﺪ اﺗﺴﻊ ﻣﺠﺎل اﺳﺘﺨﺪاﻣﻬﺎ ﻟﺘﺸﻤﻞ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ اﻟﻤﻨﺸﺂت اﻟﻌﺎدﻳﺔ وآﺬﻟﻚ اﻟﻤﻨﺸﺂت اﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﻓﻀ ً‬
‫ﺳﻼﻣﺔ اﻟﻤﺒﺎﻧﻰ واﻟﻤﻨﺸﺂت ﻣﻦ أﺧﻄﺎر اﻟﺤﺮﻳﻖ اﻟﻨﺎﺟﻢ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺮ ﻋﺪم ﻣﺮاﻋﺎة اﻷﺻﻮل اﻟﻔﻨﻴﺔ ﻓﻰ ﺗﺼﻤﻴﻢ اﻟﺘﺮآﻴﺒﺎت اﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫وﻗﺪ ﺻﺪرت ﻋﺪة اآﻮاد ﻋﺎﻟﻤﻴﺔ و ﻣﺤﻠﻴﺔ و اﻳﻀﺎ اﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ اﻟﻜﺘﺐ و اﻟﻜﺎﺗﻠﻮﺟﺎت اﻟﺘﻰ ﺗﺘﻜﻠﻢ ﻓﻰ ﺷﺄن أﺳﺲ ﺗﺼﻤﻴﻢ وﺷﺮوط ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ‬
‫اﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻼت واﻟﺘﺮآﻴﺒﺎت اﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻓﻰ اﻟﻤﺒﺎﻧﻰ‪.‬‬
‫و ﻗﺪ ﻓﻜﺮت ان اﺟﻤﻊ ﺑﻌﻀًﺎ ﻣﻦ هﺬﻩ اﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت ﻓﻰ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺳﺆال و ﺟﻮاب ﻟﺘﻌﻈﻴﻢ اﻻﺳﺘﻔﺎدة ﻣﻦ هﺬا اﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت و ﻟﺘﻜﻮن ﺑﻤﺜﺎﺑﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻠﺨﺺ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ﻷﺳﺲ اﻟﺘﺼﻤﻴﻢ اﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻰ و ﻳﺴﻬﻞ اﻟﺮﺟﻮع اﻟﻴﻪ‪.‬‬
‫اﻋﺘﻤﺪت ﻓﻰ ﺗﺤﻀﻴﺮى هﺬﻩ اﻷﺳﺌﻠﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ اﻷآﻮاد و اﻟﻤﺮاﺟﻊ و ﺑﻌﺾ اﻟﺨﺒﺮات اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪ .‬وﻟﻜﻦ ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺒﻊ هﺬا ﻟﻴﺲ آﺘﺎب‬
‫ﻋﻠﻤﻰ ﻳﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ وﻟﻜﻨﻪ ﺑﻤﺜﺎﺑﺔ ﺑﺪاﻳﺔ ﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪة اﻟﻤﺒﺘﺪﺋﻴﻦ ﻓﻰ هﺬا اﻟﻤﺠﺎل‪.‬‬
‫هﺬا هﻮ اﻷﺻﺪار اﻷول و ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﻤﻞ اﺻﺪارات ﺟﺪﻳﺪة ﺑﻤﺸﻴﺌﺔ اﷲ ﻋﺰ و ﺟﻞ ﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ اﻳﺔ اﺧﻄﺎء وﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﻌﺾ اﻷﺳﺌﻠﺔ و‬
‫اﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت اﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪة‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻰ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ و ﺟﻮد اى ﺧﻄﺄ او اﺳﺘﻔﺴﺎر ارﺟﻮا ﻣﺮاﺳﻠﺘﻰ ﻋﻠﻰ هﺬا اﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ‪ mhezzah@hotmail.com :‬و ذاﻟﻚ ﻟﺘﻔﺎدى هﺬﻩ‬
‫اﻷﺧﻄﺎء ﻻﺣﻘًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫اﺳﺄل اﷲ ﻋﺰ و ﺟﻞ ان ﺗﻨﻔﻌﻨﻰ و ﺗﻨﻔﻌﻜﻢ هﺬﻩ اﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت ﻓﻰ اﻟﺪﻧﻴﺎ و ﻓﻰ اﻷﺧﺮة‪.‬‬
‫وارﺟﻮا ﻣﻦ اﻟﺠﻤﻴﻊ اﻻ ﻳﺒﺨﻠﻮا ﺑﻨﺸﺮ هﺬﻩ اﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت آﻰ ﺗﻌﻢ اﻟﻔﺎﺋﺪة ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺠﻤﻴﻊ‪ .‬و اﻟﺪال ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺨﻴﺮ آﻔﺎﻋﻠﻪ‪.‬‬
‫و اﻟﺴﻼم ﻋﻠﻴﻜﻢ و رﺣﻤﺔ اﷲ و ﺑﺮآﺎﺗﻪ‪.‬‬

‫اﺧﻮآﻢ‪ /‬ﻣﺤﻤﻮد ﻋﺼﺎم ﺣﺰﻩ‬
Top Electrical Design Prepared by: Mahmoud Essam Hizzah
Questions & Answers Electrical Design Engineer
1) Have you previously done design for electrical work?
o Yes
o No
If yes, the following two items must be answer
a- What facilities or buildings you designed?
o Commercial
o Residential
o Industrial
o Medical/Health Care
o Educational/Schools
o Hotels
o Power Plant/Stations
o Sports
o Exterior Site Work
o Others: Please specify:
b- What Standards or Norm you used in your design?
o French
o American
o British
o IEC
2) Have you previously done shop drawing (execution) for electrical (high current) work?
o Yes
o No
3) Are you familiar and have used the following computer software’s:
o MS Word
o MS Excel
o AutoCAD
o Lighting Calculation Programs: Please specify:
o Voltage Drop Calculation Programs: Please specify:
o Short Circuit Calculation Programs: Please specify:
-1-
st
1 Edition Best Wishes
4) What are the de-rating factors considered in cable installation?
Answer:
- Ground Temperature de-rating factor

- Air Temperature de-rating factor
- Burial Depth de-rating factor
- Soil Thermal Resistivity de-rating factor
- PVC Rated Temperature de-rating factor
- Trefoil or Flat Formation de-rating factor for three & single core cables laid direct in ground
- Trefoil Formation de-rating factors for multi-core cables laid direct in ground
- Reduction factors for groups of more than one multi-core cable in air to be applied to the current
carrying capacity for one multi-core cable in free air
- Reduction factors for groups of more than one circuit of single core cables to be applied to the current
carrying capacity for one circuit of single core cables in free air
5) What are the types of contracts? State the difference between them?
Answer:
- Lump Sum
- Re-measured
- Cost Plus
6) What are the precautions to be taken in mind when selecting an emergency feeder running next to another
feeder fed from normal supply?
Answer:
- Type of the used designed cable should be taken into consideration regarding its properties & to be of
higher fire resistance.
7) What is the national color code of a three phase circuit?
Answer:
- Red for phase (A)

- Yellow for phase (B)
- Blue for phase (C)
- Black for neutral (N)
- Yellow with green strip for protective earth (PE)
-2-
st
8) What is difference between tender drawings, design drawings, shop drawing (Execution) & as built
drawings?
Answer:
¾ Tender:
- Studying the nature of project and the client requirements for the level of work.
- Make Concept Design, Check List for all Systems to be used and Contract Type.
- Make preliminary estimated BOQ and specifications.
¾ Design:
- Study the nature of project and the client requirements for the level of work.
- Put solution for the project with regard to electrical spaces that optimize the distribution of electrical
power and routing taking into account the voltage drop.
- Study lighting for different areas with respect to type of ceiling and illumination levels (Lux)
required for different areas according to their functions. Design should be according to local
regulations and international standards and codes.
- Make drawings to show distribution and number of (lighting fixtures, fire alarm detectors, socket
outlets …….etc.) as well as wiring method and circuits references for each circuit.
- Make specifications & exact BOQ for the contractor and suppliers to follow according to the design.
¾ Shop Drawing (Execution):
- All detailed drawings including ( installation details & sections, exact dimensions, pull & junction
boxes, complete path to the pull box, hatch & sizes of wires & cables, cable Tray sections & levels,
exact routing …etc)
- Make coordination among different systems & different trades, Details showing relation and spacing
between different systems (electrical, hvac, plumbing, fire fighting ….etc.).
- Show detail of routing cables inside cable trays or trenches with manholes or without.
- Mention and show section show cable distribution inside raceways and capacity inside each one as
stated in spare regulations and standards. Make check of all calculations & drawings.
- Make details for every item and specifications for the material and fixation method.
- Final BOQ and Specification.
¾ As Built:
- Correct all shop drawings in order to match the existing installations that already done
- Survey for all existing installations, Collecting data, catalogues, operating manuals & maintenance
guides for all existing installed equipments.
-3-
st
9) What are the types of tests required for electrical equipment? What are the differences?
Answer:
Type of Test Location & Time of Test Reports & Certificates

Done one time at the beginning of manufacturing the Report & certificate must be
Type Tests equipment for one sample in international laboratories given for that.
and must pass all tests according to IEC.
Report & certificate must be
Done each time for all equipments at the factory. Client
Routine Tests given for that.
deputy should be present in these tests
Done in site in order to ensure that the equipment arrived
Site Tests to site in good condition and working well. Site engineer Report must be given for that.
& client deputy should be present in these tests
10) What are the types of circuit breakers? State some applications for each?
Answer:
Type of Circuit
Applications Ratings & Settings Max. S.C. Limits
Breaker
MCB: Miniature Used for small appliances & small
Ratings up to 125A Up to 25 KA
Circuit Breaker branch circuits.
Usually used as main circuit breaker
MCCB: Molded Case where we need more reliability, more Ratings from 100A
Up to 200 KA
Circuit Breaker rated current & short circuit level. up to 3200A
Used to protect people against indirect

RCCB: Residual
contact, to provide protection against
Current Circuit
fire hazards due to a persistent earth Settings from
Breaker (Earth
fault current, without the operation of 30mA to 1A
Leakage Circuit
the over-current protective device.
Breaker)
Usually used for transformer
ACB: Air Circuit protection due to its high capacity Ratings from 400
Breaker ratings & more reliability than molded up to 6300A
case (micro-logic can be installed).
Used from low
SF6 CB: Sulfur
Usually used for medium & high voltage system and
HexaFlouride Circuit
voltage, smaller than ACB up to 1300 kV
Breaker
(rating 45 GVA).
Usually Used for medium & high
voltage Very small damage to contacts
Vacuum CB: Wide Range
(life up to 30 years). Small mechanical
energy required for tripping.
-4-
st
11) What is the difference between thermal setting & magnetic setting of C.B?
Answer:
Type of Trip Type of Protection

Thermal Setting Inverse Time Trip. For Overload Protection.
Magnetic Setting Instantaneous Trip. For Short Circuit Protection.
12) What is the meaning and the difference between (AF) & (AT) of C.B?
Answer:
Stands for Function

AF Ampere Frame, Maximum rated current for the C.B.
AT Ampere Trip. Adjusted rated current for the circuit breaker. (Less than or equal AF).
13) How can you improve the selection of a system earthing arrangement?
Answer:
Six Selection Criteria:
Protection of persons
Protection of equipment
Continuity of the power supply
Effects of disturbances
Easy implementation
Economic analysis
-5-
st
14) What are the types of Discrimination (Selectivity)? State the difference? What is Cascading?
Answer:
Current Discrimination:
- Total Discrimination: if for all fault current values, from

overloads up to the non-resistive short circuit current, circuit
breaker D2 opens and D1 remains closed.
- Partial Discrimination: if the above condition is not respected

up to the full short circuit current, but only to a lesser value
termed the selectivity limit currents.
- No Discrimination: in the event of fault, both circuit breakers D1 and D2 open.
-6-
st
Cascading:
Is the use of the current limiting capacity of circuit breakers at a given point to permit installation of
lower rated and therefore lower cost circuit breakers downstream. Also, the upstream compact C.B acts as a
barrier against short circuit currents. In this way, downstream C.B’s with lower breaking capacities than the
prospective short circuit (at their point of installation) operates under their normal breaking conditions.
For example: if the calculated SC current at a point is 30KA so in case of not using cascading we
should choose C.B with 35KA SC current. While in case of using the main C.B with cascading technology so
we can use C.B of 20KA above this point.
Cascading Advantages:-
- Reduce C.B cost.

- Reduce mechanical effect (Bus bars).
- Reduce thermal effects (Cables).
- Reduce electromagnetic effect (Measuring devices).
Conclusion:
Cascading = Reduction of the installation cost
15) Fill the table below for Demand Load Estimation.
Lighting Sockets A/C Equipments Others

Type of Load
(VA/m2) (VA/m2) (VA/m2) (VA/m2) (VA/m2)
Residential
Commercial/Offices
Health Care/Hospitals
Hotels
Educational/Schools
Answer:
Lighting Sockets A/C Equipments Others

Type of Load
(VA/m2) (VA/m2) (VA/m2) (VA/m2) (VA/m2)
Residential 30 20 100 25 0
Commercial/Offices 40 40 120 20 10
Health Care/Hospitals 30 30 120 30 50
Hotels 25 20 120 30 25
Educational/Schools 30 20 110 20 20
-7-
st
16) What are the types of earthing systems according to IEC? Explain each & where recommended to be used?
Answer:
Types of Earthing Systems According to IEC:
- TT System:
- IT System
- TN System
- TN-C System
- TN-S System
- TN-C-S System
¾ IEC60364-3 Electrical installations in buildings part 3 assessment of general characteristics defines the code used to specify the
earthing of low voltage distribution systems. The code consists of 2 letters and subsequent letter(s) if they are required. The
definitions given hereafter refer to typical industrial applications.
¾ There is no requirement in IEC Standards to implement earth fault protection on the incoming circuit breaker to eliminate resistive
earth faults. According to the above mentioned IEC standard, earth faults can be eliminated by means of phase protection or
sensitive earth fault protection. Should earth fault protection to provide on the incoming circuit breaker and phase protection be used
on outgoing feeders, protection coordination is often not possible. This results in tripping the incoming circuit breaker for earth
faults on outgoing feeders which is normally unacceptable for industrial and commercial applications. If the application requires
that earth fault protection be provided on incoming circuit breakers, sensitive earth fault protection should also be provided on
outgoing feeders to ensure selective tripping.
Neutral & exposed conductive part connections:
First letter – Relationship of the power system to earth:
¾ T: Direct connection of neutral to earth;

¾ I: Neutral isolated from earth, or one connected to earth through impedance.
Second letter – Relationship of the exposed-conductive-parts of the installation to earth:
¾ T: Direct electrical connection of exposed-conductive-parts to earth.

¾ N: Direct electrical connection of the exposed-conductive-parts to neutral.
Arrangement of N & PE conductors:
Subsequent letter(s) (if any) – Arrangement of neutral and protective conductors:
¾ S: Neutral and protective conductor separate (N & PE).

¾ C: Neutral and protective conductor combined (PEN conductor).
¾ C-S: TN-C near the source, TN-S near the loads.
-8-
st
TT system
- A system having one point of the source of energy directly earthed, the exposed conductive parts of the
installation being connected to earth electrodes electrically independent of the earth electrodes of the source.
- In the case of isolation fault, the potential of the exposed conductive parts will suddenly increase causing a
dangerous situation of electric shock. This can be avoided with the use of RCD’s with the proper sensitivity in
function of touch voltage.
- To ensure safety conditions in the installation, the earth values shall comply with:
RA x IΔn ≤ 50V
- RA = Earth resistance value of the installation.
- IΔn = Residual operating current value of the RCD.
IT system
- A system having no direct connection between live parts and earth, the exposed conductive parts of the electrical
installation connected to an earth electrode.
- The source is either connected to earth through deliberately introduced earthing impedance or is isolated from
earth.
- In case of insulation fault the value of the current is not high enough to generate dangerous voltages.
- Nevertheless protection against indirect contact must be provided by means of an insulation monitoring device
which shall provide visual and sonorous alarm when the first fault occurs. The service interruption by means of
breakers must be done in case of a second fault according to the following tripping conditions:
- To ensure safety conditions in the installation, it shall comply with:
RA x Id≤ 50V
- RA = Earth resistance value of the installation.`1`q
- Id = Fault current value of the first fault.
-9-
st
TN system
- A system having one or more points of the source of energy directly earthed, the exposed conductive part of the
installation being connected to that point by protective conductors. In case of an insulation fault a short circuit
(phase – neutral) is caused in the installation.
There are three types of TN systems: TN-C, TN-S and TN-C-S
TN-C
- A system in which neutral and protective functions are combined in a single conductor throughout the system.
TN-S
- A system having separate neutral and protective conductors throughout the system.
- 10 -
st
TN-C-S
- Part of the system uses a combined PEN conductor, which is at some point split up into separate PE and N lines.
Advantages and drawbacks
Earthing system Advantages Drawbacks

The simplest No continuity of service
to study: little or no calculation not very cheap:
to run: easy to spot the faulty part 5 - wires and 4 poles if distributed neutral
TT to modify: no special checking of - extensive use of RCDs
maximum cable lengths difficult in some cases to ensure vertical
to install: RCDs are easy to install and discrimination of RCDs
set
The cheapest No continuity of service

less copper or aluminium: imperative calculations making study more difficult
4 - wires instead of 5, and modifications more delicate
TN 3 - poles instead of 4. high value of fault current: a simple insulation fault is
use of existing protections against a short-circuit: not suited to sensitive load
overcurrent for protection of people necessity to seal the settings of the magnetic unit if
adjustable
The most efficient: More complex

no obligation to trip on first fault imperative need for a reliable and well-trained
low faultcurrent value (less fire risk) maintenance team
sensitivity to voltage surges from the MV side
IT necessity to permanently monitor network insulation
protection of all poles including neutral, equipment
needed for fault tracking
- 11 -
st
17) Compare between earthing systems from the point of:

a- Safety of persons.
b- Safety of persons.
c- Availability of energy.
d- EMC (Electromagnetic Compatibility) behavior.
Answer:
- The system earthing arrangement must be properly selected to ensure the safety of life and property. The
behavior of the different systems with respect to EMC considerations must be taken into account.
- European standards (see EN 50174-2 § 6.4 and EN 50310 § 6.3) recommend the TN-S system which causes
the fewest EMC problems for installations comprising information-technology equipment (including
telecom equipment).
Main Characteristics of System Earthing
TT TN-S IT TN-C
Safety of persons Good Good
RCD mandatory Continuity of the PE conductor must be ensured throughout the installation
Safety of persons Good Poor Good Poor
Medium fault current High fault current Low current for first High fault current
(< a few dozen amperes) (around 1 kA) fault (around 1 kA)
(< a few dozen mA),
but high for second fault
Availability of energy Good Good Excellent Good
EMC (Electromagnetic Good Excellent Poor (to be avoided) Poor (should never be
Compatibility) • Risk of overvoltages • Few equipotential • Risk of overvoltages used)
behavior • Equipotential Problems problems • Common-mode filters • Neutral and PE are the
• Need to manage • Need to manage and surge arrestors same
devices with high devices with high must handle the phase- • Circulation of disturbed
leakage currents leakage currents to-phase voltages currents in exposed
• High fault currents • RCDs subject to conductive parts (high
transient disturbances) nuisance tripping if magnetic-field
common-mode radiation)
capacitors are present • High fault currents
• Equivalent to TN (transient disturbances)
system for second fault
- When an installation includes high-power

equipment (motors, air-conditioning, lifts,
power electronics, etc.), it is advised to install
one or more transformers specifically for these
systems. Electrical distribution must be
organised in a star system and all outgoing
circuits must exit the main low-voltage
switchboard (MLVS).
- Electronic systems (control/monitoring,
regulation, measurement instruments, etc.)
must be supplied by a dedicated transformer
in a TN-S system.
- 12 -
st
18) State some applications for using isolating transformers? What is the advantage of using it?
Answer:
- Swimming pools.
- Surgery operating rooms.
Isolating transformers protect people from electric shock due to its low voltage.
19) What is the Dynamic UPS (No Break Generator)? State some applications? Compare with Static UPS.
Answer:
At normal conditions the fly wheel is fed from the main electric source and continues rotating.
When loss electricity, the flying wheel continue rotates due to inertia helping the generator to feed critical
loads.
Conditioning Mode Independent Mode
Applications
– Satellite communication (Internet data centers (IDC))

– Aviation and Airports (Air traffic control towers, Runway lighting, Reservation centers)
– Hi-tech industry (Semiconductor, TFT-LCD flat screens, Mobile phones)
– Hospitals
– Industry (Process industry, Pharmaceutical industry, Car industry)
– Defence (Radar, Intelligence centers)
– Finance/Banking/Stock Exchange (Data centers)
– Telecom/Internet (Telecom centers)
Advantages of Dynamic UPS
• One system powering critical and non-critical loads.

• Lower initial investment.
• Lower installation and building construction costs.
• Reduced floor space.
• Lower maintenance costs.
• Provides additional protection for the critical loads by means of the choke coil.
- 13 -
st
Disadvantages Chemical Batteries
• Connected in strings; in case one cell fails, one complete string fails.
• Special fire code regulations.
• Increasing installation and insurance costs.
• Air-conditioning requirements.
• Short real life-time.
• Large floor space requirements.
• High maintenance.
• Increasing disposal costs.
• Limited short circuit acceptance.
Static UPS Room Layout Dynamic UPS Room Layout
20) What dose you conclude from:

- IP54
- NEMA 3R
Answer:
- IP54: Protected against dust limited ingress (no harmful deposit).

Protection against water sprayed from all directions, limited ingress permitted.
- NEMA-3R: Rain tight, Sleet Resistant – Outdoor - undamaged by the formation of ice on the enclosure
21) What are codes & standards can be followed in lighting design?
Answer:
- IESNA = Illuminating Engineering Society of North America.

- CIBSE = Chartered Institution of Building Services Engineers Lighting Code UK norms.
- DIN German norms = Deutsches Institut fur Normung
- 14 -
st
22) What are the types of cable trays? State some applications? How can you size a cable tray? What is the
difference between cable tray & cable ladder & which is less expensive? State applications for cable ladders?
Answer:
- Cable Tray hot deep galvanized before perforation

- Cable Tray hot deep galvanized after perforation
- Cable Tray hot deep galvanized after perforation with cover
- Steel Wire Cable Tray.
- Cable Ladders.
¾ Cable Ladder is less expensive than cable tray.

¾ Cable ladders are more reliable to be used for cables with large CSA (ex. Medium voltage
cables).
¾ Cable Tray hot deep galvanized before perforation usually used in dry areas.
¾ Cable Tray hot deep galvanized after perforation usually used in wet areas & technical rooms.
¾ Cable Tray hot deep galvanized after perforation with cover usually used at roof (outdoor).
Steel Wire Cable Tray Cable Ladder
Perforated Cable Tray Perforated Cable Tray with cover
- 15 -
st
- 16 -
st
- 17 -
st
23) What are the common types of conduits? State some applications? How can you size a conduit?
Answer:
- PVC: Poly Venyle Chloride Conduit.

- UPVC: Ultra Venyle Chloride Conduit.
- RGS: Rigid Galvanized Steel Conduit.
- EMT: Electrical Metallic Tubing.
- FMC: Flexible Metal Conduit.
- IMC: Intermediate Metal Conduit.
Sizing of conduits can be done according to NEC – Tables – Chapter 9
24) What characteristics does a luminaire need to be a good one?
Answer:
- To minimize Glare
- Focus lamp’s light onto the working surface
- Ensure that the lamp does not overheat
- 18 -
st
25) What is RGB LED?
Answer:
RGB LED = Red Green Blue Light Emitting Diode.
- It’s the abbreviation of Red, Green, and Blue. The three colours of light
which can be mixed to produce any other colour. In fact it’s an additive
colour model in which red, green and blue light is combined to create
colours, combining full intensities of all three colours makes white.
26) Can we dim Fluorescent or Metal Halide lamps?
Answer:
Fluorescent lamps
¾ Dimming of fluorescent using a simple wall potentiometer.

¾ 0V to 10V Dimming of fluorescent.
Metal Halide lamps
¾ Most HID lamps can be dimmed using Step-level dimming.

¾ Savings of 50% or more might be obtained where available daylight is used with photo sensor and dimming
control system.
¾ HID lamps should be started at full power and the dimming delayed until the lamp is fully warmed up.
¾ HID lamps respond to changes in dimmer settings much more slowly than incandescent or fluorescent
sources: delay between minimum and maximum light output varies 3 to 10 min.
¾ Instantaneous dimming is available over a limited range for some lamps.
¾ Clear metal halide lamps can experience a shift in color temperature of over 1000 K and a drop of 35% in
CRI when dimmed to 50% of rated output. Convenience and simplicity.
27) What are the different types of Lighting System Controls?
Answer:
¾ Manual Control
– Normal on/off switches
– Manual Dimmers
¾ Manual / Automatic control ( On by user/Off Automatic)
– Timer Switches
– Infra Red sensor / Ultrasonic Switches
¾ Automatic Controls
– Time of Day [ Sensor : Timer]
– Dimming [ Sensor : Photocell ]
– Occupancy Detectors
- 19 -
st
28) What is the difference between IP, NEMA & IK?

Answer:
- IP: Ingress Protection (Index of Protection) --- Protection according to IEC.
- NEMA: National Electrical Manufacturers Association Protection ---- Protection according to NEC.
- IK: Mechanical Protection.

NEMA
- 20 -
st
- 21 -
st
29) What is the difference between horizontal, vertical illumination & general, task lighting? How can you make
calculations for each? State some examples for each?
Answer:
Horizontal illuminance: the average luminance

values produced at 90°. For example, the
illumination on floor of a room.
Vertical illuminance: the average

luminance values produced at
0°.For example, the illumination
on the switchgear & breakers must
be vertical.
General lighting: lighting designed to provide a substantially

uniform level of illuminance throughout an area, exclusive of
any provision for special local requirements.
- 22 -
st
Task lighting: lighting directed to a specific surface or area that provides

illumination for visual tasks. For example a typical office, the general lighting often
is designed to provide an illuminance of 75 fc (750 lux) at desk height, the middle
value from category “E.” In partitioned workspaces, it is difficult for general
lighting to deliver this illuminance to the desk surfaces, because shadows from
shelves, cabinets, partitions, and the worker’s own body can block light from the
ceiling mounted luminaires. Therefore, in an office that requires 75fc (750 lux), a
fluorescent under-shelf task light can provide 40 fc (400 lux), which allows the
general lighting to be reduced to 35 fc (350lux). Even greater energy savings can be
achieved if the task lights are switched off when not in use.
Calculations can be done for each using point by point calculation or using lighting program (calculation
surfaces).
30) What is color rendering? State the color renderings for sodium lamps, metal halide lamps, fluorescent
lamps & halogen lamps?
Answer:
Color Rendering Index (CRI): A method for describing the effect of a light source on the color appearance
of objects being illuminated, with a CRI of 100 representing the reference condition (and thus the maximum
CRI possible). In general, a lower CRI indicates that some colors may appear unnatural when illuminated by
the lamp.
Type of Lamp Color Rendering (%) - CRI

Metal Halide 90-93%
Fluorescent 75-85%
Halogen 95-100%
Sodium 20-25%
- 23 -
st
31) What’s illuminance? State the recommended illumination level for:

- Office
- Surgery operating room
- Bed room
- Class room
- Sitting
- Corridors
Answer:
Illuminance: The amount of light that reaches a surface. Illuminance is measured in footcandles
(lumens/square foot) or lux (lumens/square meter). One footcandle equals 10.76 lux, although for
convenience the IESNA uses 10 lux as the equivalent.
Recommended illuminance level for:
Application Illumination level (Lux)

Office From 300 lux (General) to 750 lux (Task)
Surgery operating room From 2000 lux (General) to 20000 lux (Task)
Bed room From 200 lux (General) to 500 lux (Reading)
Class room From 500 lux (General) to 1000 lux (Task)
Sitting 200-300 lux
Corridors 100-200 lux
32) What is Color Temperature? Then choose the color temperature for each color below
Color Appearance Color Temperature (k)

1 Warm White 3500K
2 White 3000K
3 Cool white 4200K
Answer:
Correlated Color Temperature (CCT): A description of the color appearance of a light source in terms of
its warmth or coolness. The CCT relates the color appearance of the light emitted by a lamp to the color
appearance of a reference material heated to a high temperature (measured on the Kelvin scale, abbreviated
K). As the temperature rises, the color appearance shifts from yellow to blue. Thus, lamps with a low CCT
(3000 K or less) have a yellow-white color appearance and are described as “warm”; lamps with a high CCT
(4000 K and higher) have a blue-white color appearance and are described as “cool.”
Color Appearance Color Temperature (k)

1 Warm White 2 3500K
2 White 1 3000K
3 Cool white 3 4200K
- 24 -
st
33) What is the difference between Fluorescent lamps type T2, T5, T8 & T12?
Answer:
Lamp Type Diameter Type of Gas Efficacy Type of Ballast Life Time (hours) Today Usage
T 12 ≡ T38 Work with magnetic Almost
38mm Mercury + Argon Less Efficacy
≡ TL ballast Disappeared
Work with magnetic Magnetic = 8000 hr
T 8 ≡ T26 More Efficacy
26mm Mercury + Krypton ballast, rapid-start & Rapid Start = 11000 hr Most Popular
≡ TL-D than T12
electronic ballast Electronic = 16000 hr
T 5 ≡ T16 ≡ More Efficacy Work with electronic
16mm Mercury + Krypton 20000 hr Fast Growing
TL5 than T8 ballast only
More Efficacy Work with electronic
T2 7mm Mercury + Krypton Rare
than T5 ballast only
T 12 ≡ T38 ≡ TL T 8 ≡ T26 ≡ TL-D T 5 ≡ T16 ≡ TL5 T2

Watt lm mm Watt lm mm Watt lm mm Watt lm mm
6 330 220
8 540 320
10 650 470
11 750 422
13 930 525
14 1200 550
15 950 440
16 1250 720
18 1350 590
20 1200 590
21 1900 850
23 1900 970
24 1950 550
28 2400 1150
30 2400 900
35 3300 1150
36 3350 1200
38 3300 1050
39 3400 850
40 3000 1200
49 4300 1150
54 4600 1150
58 5200 1500
65 4800 1500
80 6450 1150
115 6850 1200
- 25 -
st
T-12 Fluorescent Lamps: Until the National Energy Policy Act of 1992 (EPACT), the most commonly applied
fluorescent lamp was the T-12, 40-W, 4-ft (1.22-m), rapid-start lamp with a cool white or warm white phosphor.
EPACT banned the production of these type lamps after 1995. EPACT also impacted the T-12, 8-ft (2.44 m) lamps.
As with 4-ft lamps, only reduced wattage or improved color rendition lamps are currently produced for U.S.
consumption. For many new installations, the more efficient T-8 lamps are often specified.
T-8 Fluorescent Lamps: T-8 fluorescent lamps are a family of 1-in.-diameter (25.4 mm) straight tube lamps
manufactured in some of the same lengths as T-12 lamps. The 4-ft version of the lamp is designed to consume
approximately 32 W. It is also available in 2-, 3-, 5- and 8-ft. (0.16-, 0.91-, 1.52-, and 2.44-m) lengths. The smaller
diameter makes it economical to use the more efficient and more expensive rare-earth phosphors. Although the T-8
and T-12 lamps are physically interchangeable, they cannot operate on the same ballast. T-8 lamps are designed to
operate on line-frequency rapid-start ballasting systems at approximately 265 mA, or on high-frequency electronic
ballasts at slightly less current. Due to the higher efficacies that can be reached with T-8 systems, they have
replaced the conventional T-12 lamps in many applications.
T-5 Fluorescent Lamps: T-5 fluorescent lamps are a family of smaller diameter straight tube lamps employing
triphosphor technology. Available only in metric lengths and mini bipin bases, the T-5 lamps provide higher source
brightness than T-8 lamps and better optical control. The lamps provide optimum light output at an ambient
temperature of 35°C (95°F) rather than the more typical 25°C (77°F), allowing for the design of more compact
luminaires. Also available are high-output versions providing approximately twice the lumens at the same length as
the standard versions. T-5 lamps are designed to operate solely on electronic ballasts. Their unique lengths, special
lamp holder, and ballast requirements make them unsuitable for most retrofit applications. These lamps are used in
shallower luminaries than the T-8 lamps, which are more efficient over all than luminaries for T-8 lamps
34) Can we make interconnection bonding among these systems:

• Grounding System
• Lightning Protection
• Low current & Communication Grounding System
Answer:
According to NEC Article 250.94:

The Code requires that separate systems be bonded together to reduce the differences of potential between them due
to lightning or accidental contact with power lines. Lightning protection systems, communications, radio and TV,
and CATV systems must be bonded together to minimize the potential differences between the systems.
Lack of interconnection can result in a severe shock and fire hazard.
The lightning protection system ground terminals shall be bonded to the building or structure grounding electrode
system.
A bonding jumper not smaller than 6 AWG copper or equivalent shall be connected between the network-powered
broadband communications system grounding electrode and the power grounding electrode system at the building
or structure served where separate electrodes are used.
- 26 -
st
35) Give some types of different lamps showing: type, manufacturers, wattage, lumen output, peak intensity,
colour temperature, lamp holder (cap), life time and dimensions?
Answer:
- 27 -
st
- 28 -
st
- 29 -
st
- 30 -
st
- 31 -
st
36) Calculate the number of luminaries required for office (5x6m) – height = 3m, consider type fluorescent
lighting fixture each have lamps 2x36W. Luminous flux of each lamp 3200 lm, utilization factor is 0.48 and
maintenance factor is 0.75. Notice that the required maintained illumination level is 500 lux.
Answer:
N = (E x A) / (Ø x n x U.F x M.F)
= 500*30/3200*2*0.48*0.75
= 6.71 ≈ 8 Luminaries
Where:
E= Average maintained illumination level (lux)
A= Room area (m2)
Ø= Lamp luminous flux (lm)
N= number of lighting fixtures (luminaries)
n= number of lamps in each luminaire
U.F= Utilization factor
M.F= Maintenance factor
37) Differentiate between:

- Directional & diffuse lighting.
- Symmetric & asymmetric lighting.
- Direct, indirect lighting & Direct-indirect lighting.
Answer:
Directional lighting: lighting provided on the work plane or on an object that is predominantly from a
preferred direction.
Diffused lighting: lighting provided on the work plane or on an object that is not incident predominantly
from any particular direction
Symmetric & asymmetric lighting:
- 32 -
st
Direct lighting: lighting involving luminaries that distribute 90 to 100% of the emitted light in the general
direction of the surface to be illuminated. The term usually refers to light emitted in a downward direction
Indirect lighting: lighting involving luminaries that distribute 90 to 100% of the emitted light upward.
Direct-indirect lighting: a variant of general diffuse lighting in which the luminaires emit little or no light
at angles near the horizontal.
For example - a room of dimensions:

Length: 4.0 m, Width: 6.2 m, Height: 3.0 m and Reflection factor: 70% / 50% /20%
Direct Lighting Indirect Lighting Direct-indirect Lighting

Luminaries Type used: Luminaries Type used: Luminaries Type used:
Matt louver 2/35, T16 Uplight 3/55, TC-L ID matt louver 2/35, T16
- 33 -
st
38) What is the difference between demand factor & diversity factor?
Answer:
Demand factor: is the ratio of the maximum demand of a system, or part of a system, to the total connected
load on the system, or part of the system, under consideration. This factor is always less than unity.
Diversity factor: is the ratio of the sum of the individual maximum demands of the various subdivisions of
a system, or part of a system, to the maximum demand of the whole system, or part of the system, under
consideration. This factor generally varies between 1.00 and 2.00.
39) What are the different types of starting motor? State the difference among them?
Answer:
Direct Online Star- Delta Auto Transformer Soft Starter

Horse Power <= 20hp > 20hp & <= 80hp > 20hp & <= 100hp > 50hp
Starting Current Istarting = 5 to 6 In Istarting = 2.5 to 6 In Istarting = 2In Istarting = 1.5 In
40) Which one could achieve more lumen output prismatic or opal diffusers considering same lamps? Why?
State application.
Answer:
Prismatic: An optical component of a luminaire that is used to distribute the emitted light. It is usually a sheet
of plastic with a pattern of pyramid-shaped refracting prisms on one side. Most ceiling-mounted luminaires in
commercial buildings use prismatic lenses.
41) What is LEED & how can you improve your design to match the LEED requirements?
Answer:
LEED: Leadership in Energy and Environmental Design
• LEED is the brainchild of the U.S. Green Building Council (USGBC).

The Leasership in Energy and Environmental Design (LEED) Green
Building Rating System is the accepted benchmark for the design,
construction and operation of high performance Green Building.
• Although there is other rating systems available, LEED is the most used worldwide because it is not
too difficult to understand and apply.
• When asked to design a “Sustainable development” the first question is what sustainability is and what
constitutes a Green Building.
• We can use day lighting controls, lighting controls, occupancy sensors, EIB, BMS foe HVAC…. etc.
- 34 -
st
42) You have a project consists of 960 small villas (dwelling units). The connected load for each villa (dwelling
unit) is 60 KVA. Estimate the number of pillars, transformers & distributors required for this project.
Considering that only 400A pillars & 1000KVA Transformers ratings are available. System Voltage is
13..8KV/380-220V. Draw schematic single line diagram to what you obtained.
Answer:
(a) Using SCECO Method:
¾ According to SCECO
D.F. = Demand Factor = 0.5 (For Residential Customers).
Therefore; Demand load for each villa (dwelling unit)

= Connected load of one villa x 0.5
= 60 x 0.5 = 30 KVA.
¾ Consider 4 customers to be fed by one pillar
Therefore; connected load for one pillar

= 4 x 60 = 240 KVA.
For check: 240 x 1000 / (380 x √3) = 365A < 400A (OKAY).
Therefore; Total number of pillars required = 960 / 4 = 240 Pillar.
¾ According to SCECO
Diversity Factor = DvF = 1.25 / (0.67 + (0.33/ (√ N)).
¾ Consider 48 customers in the group on one transformer
Therefore; DvF = 1.25 / (0.67 + (0.33/ (√ 48)) = 1.74
Total Demand load on transformer

= (number of villas x demand load for one villa) / DvF
= (48 x 30) / 1.74 = 825KVA (82.5% of 1000KVA Transformer) (OKAY)
Therefore; Total number of transformers required = 960 / 48 = 20 Transformer.
Therefore; Total number of pillars per transformer required = 240 / 20 = 12 Pillar.
¾ Consider 10 Transformers per loop
Therefore; Total number of loops required = 20 / 10 = 2 Loops.
Therefore; only one-four loop distributor (i.e: with 2 spare loops) is required. Consists of 12 cubicles:
o 2 incoming.
o 8 outgoings (4 C.B’s for the 2 loops & 4 C.B’s for 2 spare loops for other loads).
o 1 bus-riser.
o 1 bus-coupler.
- 35 -
st
(b) Using NEC Method:
¾ According to NEC demand factors for different loads
D.F. = Total Demand Factor = 0.5
Therefore; Demand load for each villa (dwelling unit)

= Connected load of one villa x 0.5
= 60 x 0.5 = 30 KVA.
¾ Consider 4 customers to be fed by one pillar
Therefore; connected load for one pillar

= 4 x 60 = 240 KVA.
For check: 240 x 1000 / (380 x √3) = 365A < 400A (OKAY).
Therefore; Total number of pillars required = 960 / 4 = 240 Pillar.
¾ Consider 48 customers in the group on one transformer

¾ According to NEC Table 220.32
Therefore; Demand factor for 48 dwelling unit is 26%
Total Demand load on transformer

= Total Connected load for 48 villas x DF
= (48 x 60) x 0.26 = 748KVA (74.8% of 1000KVA Transformer) (OKAY)
Therefore; Total number of transformers required = 960 / 48 = 20 Transformer.
Therefore; Total number of pillars per transformer required = 240 / 20 = 12 Pillar.
¾ Consider 10 Transformers per loop
Therefore; Total number of loops required = 20 / 10 = 2 Loops.
Therefore; only one-four loop distributor (i.e: with 2 spare loops) is required. Consists of 12 cubicles:
o 2 incoming.
o 8 outgoings (4 C.B’s for the 2 loops & 4 C.B’s for 2 spare loops for other loads).
o 1 bus-riser.
o 1 bus-coupler.
- 36 -
st
1. Pillars (Typical to 240 nos.):
2. Package Substation – Ring Main Unit (Typical to 20 nos.):
- 37 -
st
3. Distributor Loops:
43) If we have a big room & contain many sockets which will need about 5 branch circuits. Can we feed these
circuits from different phases? Why?
Answer:
- For any room with area 50 m2 or less. All branch circuits for sockets must be fed from the same phase in
order not to obtain 380V between two sockets in case of touching to different phases.
- In case of room more than 50 m2 and it is necessary to use different phases. So we can, but in this case
we should divide the rooms into areas and each phase will feed separate area in order to decrease the
probability of obtaining 380V.
44) In case of presence of 2 sockets back to back in two different rooms. Can we put them directly back to back
or we should leave a distance between them?
Answer:
- There should be a horizontal distance not less than 150 mm between the 2 sockets placed back to back in
2 different rooms in order to ensure that no sound will transfer between the 2 rooms through them.
- 38 -
st
45) What is the IEC Switchboard Forms for Internal Configuration? State the difference?
Answer:
- Separation of functional units within the assembly is provided by forms that are specified for different
types of operation.
- The various forms are numbered from 1 to 4 with variations labeled “a” or “b”. Each step up (from 1 to
4) is cumulative, i.e. a form with a higher number includes the characteristics of forms with lower
numbers. The standard distinguishes:
- Form 1, Form 2a, Form 2b, Form 3a, Form 3b, Form 4a, Form 4b
- Form 1: No separation
- Form 2: Separation of bus-bars from the functional units
- Form 3: Separation of busbars from the functional units and separation of all functional units, one from
another, except at their output terminals
- Form 4: As for Form 3, but including separation of the outgoing terminals of all functional units, one
from another
- 39 -
st
46) Estimate the circuit breaker, disconnecting switch and cable size for:
a. Lighting load 3000VA single phase. Feeder wire length is 40 m.
b. Outdoor A/C load 3000VA single phase. Feeder wire length is 40 m.
c. Panel Board with three single phase loads (3000VA, 4000VA, 2000VA). Feeder cable length is 200 m.
Where; the system voltage is 380/220V.
Suppose that total cable de-rating factors is 0.8.
Suppose cable routing in pipes.
Use the following cable catalogue cuts for sizing cables.
- 40 -
st
- 41 -
st
- 42 -
st
Answer:
a) Lighting load 3000VA single phase
In = 3000 / 220 = 13.6 Amp.
¾ As per NEC Article 210.20: Conductors - Minimum Ampacity & Size
Wire Ampacity = 13.6 x 1.25 = 17 Amp.

Wire Ampacity with de-rating factors = 17 / 0.8 = 21.25Amp.
Therefore,
From cable catalogue. The required wire size is 4 mm2 CU single core cable – PVC insulated.
Check:
VD% = {Load Current (Amp) x Wire Length (Meter) x V.D (mv/Amp/Meter)} /
{Single phase service voltage x1000 /100}
VD% = {13.6 x 40 x 7.83} / {220 x 1000 / 100} = 1.93% (Accepted).
¾ As per NEC Article 215.3: Over-current Protection
Circuit breaker size = 13.6 x 1.25 = 17 Amp.
Therefore,
From C.B catalogue. The Required C.B size is 20A (single phase).
¾ 20A normal single pole switch can be used for this lighting load.
b) Outdoor A/C load 3000VA single phase. Feeder wire length is 40 m.
In = 3000 / 220 = 13.6 Amp.
¾ As per NEC Article 440.32 Single Motor-Compressor
Wire Ampacity = 13.6 x 1.25 = 17 Amp.

Wire Ampacity with de-rating factors = 17 / 0.8 = 21.25Amp.
Therefore,
From cable catalogue. The required wire size is 4 mm2 CU single core cable – PVC insulated.

{Single phase service voltage x1000 /100}
VD% = {13.6 x 40 x 7.83} / {220 x 1000 / 100} = 1.93% (Accepted)
- 43 -
st
¾ As per NEC Article 440.22(A) Rating or Setting for Individual Motor-Compressor
Circuit breaker size = 13.6 x 1.75 = 23.8 Amp.
Therefore,
From C.B catalogue. The required C.B size is 25A (single phase).
¾ As per NEC Article 430.110: Ampere Rating and Interrupting Capacity
Disconnecting switch size = 13.6 x 1.15 = 15.64 Amp.
Therefore,
From D.S catalogue. The required fusible D.S size is 30A, (2 Pole), [NEMA-3R].
(i.e. smallest size for fusible D.S)
c) Panel Board with three single phase loads (3000VA, 4000VA, 2000VA). Feeder cable length is 200 m.
In = (3000 + 4000 + 2000) / √3 x 380 = 13.6 Amp.
¾ As per NEC Article 210.20: Conductors - Minimum Ampacity & Size
Cable Ampacity = 13.6 x 1.25 = 17 Amp.

Cable Ampacity with de-rating factors = 17 / 0.8 = 21.25Amp.
Therefore,
From cable catalogue. The required cable size is 4x4 mm2 CU multi core cable – PVC/PVC insulated.
Check:
{Three phase service voltage x1000 /100}
VD% = {13.6 x 200 x 7.741} / {380 x 1000 / 100} = 5.54% (Not Accepted).
Using 4x6 mm2 CU multi core cable – PVC/PVC insulated.
VD% = {13.6 x 200 x 5.199} / {380 x 1000 / 100} = 3.72% (Not Accepted).
Using 4x10 mm2 CU multi core cable – PVC/PVC insulated.
VD% = {13.6 x 200 x 3.101} / {380 x 1000 / 100} = 2.22% (Accepted).
¾ As per NEC Article 215.3: Over-current Protection
Circuit breaker size = 13.6 x 1.25 = 17 Amp.
Therefore,
From C.B catalogue. The required C.B size is 20A (3phase).
- 44 -
st
47) What is DALI?
Answer:
¾ DALI stands for “Digital Addressable Lighting

Interface”.
¾ DALI is an industrial standard for the digital control of
dimmable electronic ballasts, LV Halogen
transformers and other technical lighting components.
¾ Up to 64 ballasts or luminaires can be individually
controlled via a two-wire line/DALI line.
¾ DALI can provide Flexible Lighting management.
¾ DALI is fully compatible with building management
systems.
¾ DALI is standardised digital interface for dimmable
luminaires.
48) What is distance between down conductors in lightning system design? How can you design the mesh?
a- For building less than 15M height.
b- For building 80 M height.
Answer:
¾ As per BS 6651 (Protection of structures against lightning):

- A mesh of 10m x 20m is considered sufficient, giving a maximum distance from any part of the roof to
the nearest conductor of 5m.
- On high risk structures such as explosive factories, no part of the roof should be more than 2.5m from an
air termination conductor. This is generally achieved by applying a 5m x 10m mesh to the roof.
- There should be one down conductor for every 20m of the building perimeter at roof or ground level.
- If the building is above 20m in height or of an abnormal risk this distance should be reduced to 10m.
- 45 -
st
49) What is EIB?

Answer:
EIBA is the (European Installation Bus Association) merged with two other European organizations to
form the Konnex Association, KNX.
¾ Bus Structure & Topology / Technology: (i-bus® EIB)
- 46 -
st
¾ Applications:
Lighting/Dimming Control - Audio/Video Control - Curtains/Shutters Control - Temperature Control -

Security control - Visualization and display - Door Access.
¾ Utilization Area:
Stadiums / Leisure parks - Hotels / Resorts - Shopping Malls - Public Buildings / Museums - Industrial
Facilities - Banks / Offices - Schools / Universities - Hospitals / Elderly homes - Residential -
Buildings/Towers - Villas / Luxury Condominium.
¾ Energy Savings with EIB:
Longer lamp life - Fewer maintenance costs - Lesser lamp replacements - Lesser heat output to the air-
conditioning load - Marketing advantage as a green-energy conservation building.
¾ Operating Costs per Year:
50) When we should use a remote radiator for a diesel engine generator?
Answer:
When there is no location to put radiator beside generator or no good ventilation. For example: if the
generator is located in a small room at basement floor where no good ventilation exists.
- 47 -
st
51) Calculate capacitor rating required to improve the power factor of a motor P=500KW from P.F1= 0.8 to
P.F2= 0.9?
Answer:
Qc = P (tanØ1- tanØ2) = 500 (tan 36.86◦ - tan 25.84◦) = 133 KVAR
52) What are the basic factors would you take into consideration while making lighting design?
Answer:
- Average illumination
- Uniformity
- Color rendering
- Type of control
- Heat dissipation
53) Calculate the three phase short circuit current at secondary side of a 1 MVA transformer 13.8KV –
480/227V, 60 Hz, impedance is 6 percent and assuming sustained primary voltage during fault?
Answer:
In a simplified approach, the impedance of the MV system is assumed to be negligibly small, so that:
In = P x 103 / √3 Uo = 1000 x 103 / √3 (480) = 1202.8 A

Isc = In / Usc = 1202.8 / 0.06 = 20 KA
Where:
P = kVA rating of the transformer.
Uo = phase-to-phase secondary volts on open circuit.
In = nominal current in amps.
Isc = short-circuit fault current in amps.
Usc = short-circuit impedance voltage of the transformer in %.
54) Calculate the voltage drop of cable with load 32KW – three phase, cu cable C.S.A= 16mm2 , Ra.c= 1.38
ohm/km, X= 0.1068 ohm/km, CosØ = 0.8, cable length =120m, system voltage is 380/220V.
Answer:
V = √3* I*L(R cosØ + X sinØ)

= 1.732*[(32000/0.8)/380/1.732]* [120/1000]* [(1.38)*0.8 + 0.1068)*0.6]
= 14 volt.
V.D% = (14/380) * 100 = 3.68%
- 48 -
st
55) What does GFCI & AFCI stands for? What is the difference? State some applications?
Answer:
¾ GFCI Circuit Breaker
The ground fault circuit interrupter (GFCI) is required on certain residential receptacles, such as
bathroom receptacles, receptacles located within six feet of a kitchen sink, and outdoor receptacles. The
GFCI is designed to interrupt a circuit when a ground fault occurs. Often the GFCI is mounted at the
receptacle.
¾ AFCI Circuit Breaker
GFCI devices are designed to protect a person from getting a shock when touching an ungrounded
appliance. Arc Fault Circuit Interrupters (AFCI), in comparison, protect against a fire being started from an
unintended arc. An arc fault occurs when a current-carrying conductor has an arching condition to ground or
another conductor. An AFCI device is intended to provide protection from the effects of arc faults by
recognizing the characteristics unique to arcing and de-energizing the circuit when an arc fault is detected.
The arc generated will cause the AFCI to trip. Arcs normally generated from electric equipment such as a
light switch or power drill will not cause the AFCI to trip.
Arc-Fault Circuit Interrupter protection was first introduced in the 1999 National Electrical Code®.
NEC® Article 210.12 and has an effective date of 2002. This requirement applies to all branch circuits that
supply 125-volt, single-phase, 15- and 20-amp receptacle outlets installed in dwelling unit bedrooms.
- 49 -
st
56) What is power factor? What are the equipments that create poor power factor? How can you improve power
factor of your system?
Answer:
¾ Definition of Power Factor:
Power factor is the percentage of electricity that is being used to do useful work. It is defined as the ratio
of ‘active or actual power’ used in the circuit measured in watts or kilowatts (W or KW), to the ‘apparent
power’ expressed in volt-amperes or kilo volt-amperes (VA or VA).
The apparent power also referred to as total power delivered by utility company has two components.
1) ‘Productive Power’ that powers the equipment and performs the useful work. It is measured in KW
(kilowatts)
2) ‘Reactive Power’ that generates magnetic fields to produce flux necessary for the operation of
induction devices (AC motors, transformer, inductive furnaces, ovens etc.). It is measured in
KVAR (kilovolt-Ampere-Reactance). Reactive Power produces no productive work.
¾ Equipment Creating Poor Power Factor
Lighting:
9 Incandescent Lamps: The power factor is equal to unity.
9 Fluorescent Lamps: Usually have a low power factor, for example, 50% power factor would not be
unusual. They are sometimes supplied with a compensation device to correct low power factor.
9 Mercury Vapor Lamps: The power factor of the lamp is low; it can vary between 40% to 60%, but
the lamps are often supplied with correction devices.
Distribution Transformer:
The power factor varies considerably as a function of the load and the design of the transformer. A
completely unloaded transformer would be very inductive and have a very low power factor.
Electrical Motors:
9 Induction Motors: The power factor varies in accordance with the load. Unloaded or lightly loaded
motors exhibit a low power factor. The variation can be 30% to 90%.
9 Synchronous Motors: Very good power factor when the excitation is properly adjusted.
Synchronous motors can be over excited to exhibit a leading power factor and can be used to
compensate a low power system.
Industrial Heating:
With resistance, as in ovens or dryers, the power factor is often closed to 100%.
Welding:
Electric arc welders generally have a low power factor, around 60%.
- 50 -
st
Other types of machinery or equipment those are likely to have a low power factor include:
¾ Methods of Power Factor Correction:
Power factor correction can be made in two ways:
1) Reduce the amount of reactive energy

• Eliminate unloaded motors and transformers
• Avoid supplying equipment with voltage in excess of the rated voltage
2) Compensate artificially for the consumption of reactive energy with power factor capacitors. In
practice, two type of equipment are available for power factor correction:
a. Rotary Equipment: Phase advancers, synchronous motors and synchronous condensers.

Where auto-synchronous motors are employed the power factor correction may be a
secondary function.
b. Capacitors: Power factor correction is achieved by the addition of capacitors in parallel

with the connected motor circuits and can be applied at the starter, or applied at the
switchboard or distribution panel.
Capacitors connected at each starter and

controlled by each starter is known as
"Static Power Factor Correction" while
capacitors connected at a distribution
board and controlled independently from
the individual starters is known as "Bulk
Correction".
- 51 -
st
57) In an installation, circuit breaker CB1 is placed upstream from circuit breaker CB2. A short-circuit current
occurs downstream from CB2. CB2 opens and CB1 stays closed. This is a case of:
Answer:
- Discrimination
58) Choose the correct answers if any. What is the purpose of discrimination?
To ensure continuity of service?
To only trip the device just above the faulty feeder?
To increase servicing time for trouble-shooting?
To increase productivity?
Answer:
- To ensure continuity of service?

- To only trip the device just above the faulty feeder?
- To increase productivity?
59) Compare between magnetic ballast & electronic ballast?
Answer:
Magnetic Ballast Electronic Ballast

Flickering ignition Smooth rapid start
Disturbing lamp flicker Flicker free
No light regulation Light regulation
Annoying humming of the coil Silent
Not controlled end of life of lamps Automatic switch-off of lamps at end of life
Energy costs relatively high compared to HF Energy savings compared to conventional
Low initial cost High initial cost
Very high operating cost Low operating cost
- 52 -
st
60) For each of the faults A, B, C in the diagram, say whether or not the protection device opens:
Answer:
61) The fault current downstream from circuit breaker CB5 is 400 A. With total discrimination, which circuit
breakers will open?
Answer:
- CB5
- 53 -
st
62) What is the difference between (Ics) & (Icu) of C.B? Which one is considered in design?
Answer:
• As per IEC 60947-2:
¾ Icu: rated ultimate short circuit breaking capacity.
The rated breaking capacity (Icu) is the maximum fault-current a circuit breaker can successfully
interrupt safely for only one time. After that C.B should be tested. For MCB’s and MCCB’s the C.B
should be replaced. While, for ACB’s only the contacts or damaged parts should be replaced.
The probability of such a current occurring is extremely low, and in normal circumstances the fault-
currents are considerably less than the rated breaking capacity (Icu) of the CB. On the other hand it is
important that high currents (of low probability) be interrupted under good conditions, so that the CB is
immediately available for reclosure, after the faulty circuit has been repaired.
¾ Ics: rated service short circuit breaking capacity.
Ics is expressed as a percentage of Icu, viz: 25, 50, 75, 100% for industrial circuit breakers.
It’s the short circuit value that C.B could with stand for three successive times (disconnect 3 minutes
among each). But, after that C.B should be tested. Whenever, Ics percentage of Icu is increased. The
ability of C.B to withstand more short circuit values is increased.
¾ We consider Ics as short circuit capacity in design.
63) State which statement is true and which is false:
Standard IEC 60364: Section-3-32 & 4-48 on premises with a risk of fire
a- Imposes use of a 500mA RCD device. ( )

b- Recommends use of a TT or IT system for the electrical installation on such premises. ( )
c- Prohibits use of a TN-C system. ( )
d- In TT, IT and TN-S systems, a 300mA RCD eliminates the risk of fire. ( )
Answer:
All statements are true.
64) State the functions of circuit breaker.
Answer:
Protect cables against overloads and short circuits

Let the nominal current flow without problems.
Open and close a circuit under rated current.
Protect against insulation faults (with an integrated earth leakage device).
- 54 -
st
65) Compare between earthing systems from the point of:

a- Protection of people.
b- Protection against fire.
c- Ease of implementation
d- Continuity of service
e- Upgradable installation.
f- Cost saving
Answer:
66) What is more danger on the human body AC current or DC current & why? What is the effect of AC current
on the human body?
Answer:
¾ AC current is more danger than AC current because the human heart is affected more by fluctuation in
frequency (i.e sine wave of AC current) rather than DC current which is constant (frequency is zero).
- 55 -
st
67) In order to select the right circuit breaker. What are the Criteria’s of choice that should be followed?
Answer:
"Basic" Criteria:
Rating I, U, F, ...
Breaking capacity
Number of poles (grounding system).
Standards (IEC, UL, JIS, ...)
Type of loads to be protected (cable, bus-bar, generator, motor, direct current devices).
"Dependability" Criteria:
Earth leakage protection

Isolating function
Positive break indication
Front face double insulation
Locking
Interlocking
Limiting technology
"Continuity of Service" Criteria:
Selectivity
Draw-out possibility
Maintainability
"Performing" Criteria:
Cascading
Reverse feeding without de-rating
Field installable auxiliaries
"Comfort" Criteria:
Simple to install, easy to work with

Evolutive network (modular system)
Network monitoring, communication
68) What are the trade sizes of conduits?
Answer:
Trade Size (inch) ⅜ ½ ¾ 1 1¼ 1½ 2 2½ 3 3½ 4 5 6

Trade size (mm) 10 16 20 25 32 40 50 63 75 90 110 130 150
- 56 -
st
69) What are the Benefits of improving Power Factor?
Answer:
- Reduce Utility Cost.

- Optimize Equipment Utilization.
- Improve Reliability:
- Avoids the overload of the network.
- Decreases Voltage Drops.
- Masters polluted networks level of harmonics and avoids resonance cases.
70) How the penalty on power factor is calculated?
Answer:
- For 0.9 <cos (φ) < 0.92 ------- No penalty No Bonus.

- For cos (φ)> 0.92 ------- Bonus. (For a maximum of 0.95).
- For cos (φ) < 0.9 ------- Penalty (The company will be charged for reactive power.)
71) What’s the difference between SWA & STA, which is more expensive, which one can withstand more
mechanical load, is the 2 types are accepted by BS & IEC?
Answer:
Tag Stands for Cost Mechanical Strength Standards

More Withstand about twice Accepted by BS
SWA Steel Wire Armored.
expensive. mechanical load of STA. & IEC.
Withstand less mechanical Accepted by BS
STA Steel Tape Armored. Less expensive.
load than SWA. only.
72) Cable Insulation Temperature Limits – fill spaces
PVC XLPE
Continuous Operating Temperature (◦C)
Emergency Temperature (◦C)
Short Circuit Temperature (◦C)
Answer:
PVC XLPE
Continuous Operating Temperature (◦C) 70◦C 70◦C
Emergency Temperature (◦C) 105◦C 130◦C
Short Circuit Temperature (◦C) 160◦C 250◦C
- 57 -
st
73) Transformers are classified into various categories, according to their:

(a) Use. (b) Cooling method. (c) Insulating medium.
State & explain each classification. Which is better & why?
Answer:
a) Classification of transformers according to the use
¾ Distribution Transformers:
They are used in the distribution networks in order to transmit energy from the medium voltage (MV)
network to the low voltage (LV) network of the consumers. Their power is usually ranging from 50 to 2000
kVA.
¾ Power Transformers:
They are used in the high-power generating stations or voltage step up and in the transmission substations
for voltage step up or step down. Usually their power is bigger than 2 MVA.
b) Classification of transformers according to the cooling method
¾ ONAN: Oil Natural Air Natural.
¾ ONAF: Oil Natural Air Forced.
¾ OFAN: Oil Forced Air Natural.
¾ OFAF: Oil Forced Air Forced.
¾ OFWF: Oil Forced Water Forced.
¾ Combinations: ONAN/ONAF, ONAN/OFAN or ONAN/OFAF are also applicable.
Where First Letter: Internal Cooling medium in contact with the winding.
Second Letter: Circulation mechanism for internal cooling medium.
Third Letter: External Cooling medium.
Fourth Letter: Circulation mechanism for external cooling medium.
c) Classification of transformers according to the insulating medium:

¾ Oil-Immersed Type Transformers:
The insulating medium is mineral oil.
¾ Silicon Liquid Transformers:
This type is used when the technical requirement of plants need oil immersed type
transformers, and in the mean while for the ambient there is the necessity of fire
proof and security requirements. Synthetic (silicon) oil or Vegta is new technology.
¾ Dry Type Transformers:
The cooling is implemented with natural air circulation and the windings are usually
insulated with materials of H or F class. The materials of H class are designed
in order to operate, in normal conditions, under temperatures up to 180ºC and
the materials of F class under temperatures up to 155ºC.
¾ Cast Resin Type Transformers:
The resin type transformer is a dry type transformer insulated with epoxy resin
cast under vacuum. Their power is usually ranging from 5 to 2500 kVA.
- 58 -
st
74) What are the important factors required for selecting a suitable cable to transport electrical energy from the
power station to the consumer?
Answer:
- Maximum Operating Voltage

- Insulation Level
- Frequency
- Load to be carried
- Magnitude & duration of possible overload
- Magnitude & duration of short circuit current
- Voltage drop
- Length of line
- Type of installation (underground direct or in duct – in air)
- Chemical & physical properties of soil
- Maximum & Minimum ambient air temperatures and soil temperature.
- Specification & requirements to be met
75) What’s tap changer?
Answer:
The applying medium voltage to the primary winding of transformer is not stable and depends upon the
transformer position in the distribution network. Therefore, taken the primary voltage as granted, the tap
changer is used in order to keep the secondary voltage of the transformer as stable as possible.
76) What is the difference between Rapid-Start and Instant-Start of fluorescent lamp?
Answer:
Rapid-Start: A method of starting fluorescent lamps in which the ballast supplies voltage to heat the lamp
electrodes for 1 to 2 seconds prior to starting and, in most cases, during lamp operation. A rapid-start system
starts smoothly, without flashing.
Instant-Start: A method of starting fluorescent lamps in which the voltage that is applied across the
electrodes to strike the electric arc is up to twice as high as it is with other starting methods. The higher
voltage is necessary because the electrodes are not heated prior to starting. This method starts the lamps
without flashing; it is more energy efficient than rapid or preheat starting, but results in greater wear on the
electrodes during starting. The life of instant-start lamps that are switched on and off frequently may be
reduced by as much as 25 percent relative to rapid-start operation. However, for longer burning cycles (such
as 12 hours per start), there may be no difference in lamp life for different starting methods.
- 59 -
st
77) What does mean by day lighting?
Answer:
The luminous flux from sun plus sky at a specific location, time, date, and sky condition.
78) What is the difference between beam angle & cut-off angle of a luminaire? What are the different beam
classifications & State the difference between them?
Answer:
1.Cut- Off Angle “α”:
a. Cut-off angle (lamp)

Angle above which no direct reflection from the light source is visible in the
reflector. In the case of darklight reflectors the cut-off angle of the lamp is
identical to the cut-off angle of the luminaire. In other forms of reflector it
may be less, so that reflected glare occurs in the reflector above the cut-off
angle.
b. Cut-off angle (luminaire)
The angle taken from the horizontal to the line from the inner edge of the luminaire to the edge of the light
source. Together with the cut-off angle (lamp), this angle is used to identify the glare limitation of a
luminaire.
2.Beam Angle “β”:
It is the angle, in a plane which contains the axis of the
beam, on which luminous intensity decreases to reach a
certain percentage (generally 50% or 10%) of its peak
value.
a. Narrow Beam:
Beam that concentrates the light within the cone of a

comparatively large solid angle
Narrow beam: ½ Imax< 20 o
b. Medium Beam:
Beam that concentrates the light within the cone of a comparatively large solid angle
Medium beam: 20 o < ½ Imax< 40 o
c. Wide Beam:
Beam that concentrates the light within the cone of a comparatively large solid angle
Wide beam: ½ Imax> 40 o
- 60 -
st
79) What are the levels of protection (Coordination of protective devices) for the motor starter?
Answer:
A circuit supplying a motor may include one, two, three or four switchgear or control gear devices fulfilling
one or more functions.
When a number of devices are used, they must be coordinated to ensure optimum
operation of the motor. The starter combination should be able to clear the current
fault quickly, without any damage to the installation or risk to personnel.
(UL508E) and an IEC 60947 provide a method to measure the performance of these
devices should a short circuit occur. They define two levels of protection
(coordination) for the motor starter:
Type 1 Coordination
It is acceptable that in the case of short-circuit the contactor and the thermal release
may be damaged. The starter may still not be able to function and must be
inspected; if necessary, the contactor and/or the thermal release must be replaced,
and the breaker release reset.
- Without risk for the operator. It is the most standard solution used.
- Before to restarting, the replacement of parts can be necessary.
- Qualified maintenance service.
- Low cost of switchgear and control gear.
- Continuity of service is not imperative or may be ensured by simply replacing
the faulty motor drawer.
Type 2 Coordination
In the case of short-circuit, the thermal release must not be damaged, while the welding of the contactor
contacts is allowed, as they can easily be separated (with a screwdriver, for example), without any significant
deformation.
- It is the high performance solution. The risk of fusion of contacts is possible. In this case, the contacts
must be easier separated.
- Continuity of service is imperative.
- Limited maintenance service.
- Specifications stipulating type 2.
Without Coordination
- The risks are important for the personnel, the physiques and materials damages can be also important.
Total Coordination (Continuity of service)
- It is the higher performance solution.

- No damage and no risk of fusion. Once the fault has been fixed, the motor starter must be able to restart
immediately.
- 61 -
st
Type 1 Coordination Type 2 Coordination
Without Coordination Total Coordination (Continuity of service)
80) Calculate maintained illumination level for clinic (4x6m) – height = 3m, consider 4 fluorescent lighting
fixture each have lamps 4x36W. Luminous flux of each lamp 3000 lm, utilization factor is 0.50 and
maintenance factor is 0.70.
Answer:
E = (N x n x Ø x U.F x M.F) / A
= (4 x 4 x 3000 x 0.5 x 0.7) / (4 x 6) = 700 lux
Where:
E= Average maintained illumination level (lux)
A= Room area (m2)
Ø= Lamp luminous flux (lm)
N= number of lighting fixtures (luminaries)
n= number of lamps in each luminaire
U.F= Utilization factor
M.F= Maintenance factor
- 62 -
st
81) Wrong positioning of desks relative to luminaries could cause reflected glare.
1.Define glare.
2.Which position is right (A) or (B) and why?
A B
Answer:
1. Glare:
o When excessive brightness as against the general brightness in the interior appears in the visual field
directly or as a reflection, glare is experienced. The direct glare is a result of brightness from
luminaries, windows or bare lamp. The reflection of that brightness or glossy materials, mirrors and
VDU monitors is known as reflected glare.
o Separately or simultaneously, direct glare and reflected glare can impair usual performance or cause
visual discomfort.
o Today, indirect lighting system (floor mounted, wall mounted and pendant mounted) is widely used to
minimize the glare. It has to be, however, properly designed to coordinate with the architecture of the
interior. Selection of light controllers is definitely the responsibility of the designer to ensure that
desirable cut-off light angle is met.
2. Positioning:
A. Right positioning:
B. Wrong positioning:
- 63 -
st
82) What is difference between low smoke halogen free cables & fire resistant cables & fire alarm cables?
Answer:
¾ Low Smoke Halogen Free Cables
In a fire accident some people die because of the fire, other die because of the smoke.
Halogen-free cables are increasingly specified for public buildings and areas where large numbers of
people may be present. Such as; Theaters, hotels, hospitals and closed public places.
Halogen-free cables contain no halogens. The insulation and sheath materials of these cables are
composed of polymers of pure hydrocarbons. Burning these materials, produce no corrosive compounds
or toxic gases, only water vapor and carbon dioxide gas.
¾ Fire Resistant Cables
These cables are used in fire fighting alarm systems in hazardous area where the safety is highly
required during fire condition.
A cable can be described as fire resistant when it complies with the severe test in IEC 60331 in which
the middle portion of a sample of cable 1200 mm long is supported by two metal rings 300 mm apart
and exposed to the flame from a tube type gas burner at 750oC. Simultaneously the rated voltage of the
cable is applied continuously throughout the test period. Furthermore, not less than 12 hours after the
flame has been extinguished, the cable is reenergized. No electrical failure must occur under these
conditions.
Testing of this property is conducted according to IEC 60331 which requies one meter of cable to be
hanged and subjected to flame at 750oC for 90 minutes and also according to BS 6387 which required
one meter cable to be hanged and subjected to flame at 750oC for 180 minutes.
¾ Fire Alarm Cables
These cables are used for communication and signaling in fire alarm systems.
83) What is the distance between sockets that should be followed in design?
Answer:
o The distance between 2 sockets should not exceed 3.65 m and 1.8 m
between sockets & vertical wall taking into consideration the
furniture requirements.
o No point on the floor is more than 1.8m from an outlet.
- 64 -
st
84) What’s the difference between Normal load, Emergency load & Critical load? State an example for each.
Answer:
Normal Loads:
Loads that electricity supplying it could be loosed without big danger.

Example for these loads: normal sockets, normal air conditioning, normal lighting, irrigation pumps …. Etc.
These loads are usually fed from normal electric power utility through transformer.
Emergency Loads:
Loads that electricity supplying it could not be loosed for long time else big danger could occur.
Example for these loads: some lighting, exhaust & ventilation equipments, fire fighting pumps …. Etc.
These loads are fed from normal electric power utility through transformer + Standby generator (in case of
failure of normal power supply from transformer)
Critical Loads:
Loads that electricity supplying it could not be loosed for any else big danger could occur.
Example for these loads: important computers, fire alarm & CCTV systems, security systems, safety &
emergency lighting, Hospitals surgical equipments & rooms, Air traffic control towers, Runway lighting,
Reservation centers …. Etc.
These loads are fed from normal electric power utility through transformer + Standby generator (in case of
failure of normal power supply from transformer) + UPS (in case of failure of normal power supply from
transformer + Standby generator still didn’t work)
Normal power supply ON. Normal power supply FAILURE. Normal power supply FAILURE.
Normal + Emergency + Critical Normal + Emergency Loads are not Normal Loads are not fed from.
Loads are fed from electric utility. fed from electric utility. electric utility.
Standby generator starts to feed Emergency + Critical Loads are fed

emergency & critical loads (but after from standby generator.
some minutes).
Critical Loads are fed instantaneously

from UPS.
- 65 -
st
85) State the Types of static UP
Answer:
1 UPS operating in passive-standby (off-line) mode:
1.1 Operating principle:
The inverter is connected in parallel with the AC input in a

standby.
1.1.1 Normal mode:
The load is supplied by utility power via a filter

which eliminates certain disturbances and provides some
degree of voltage regulation.
1.1.2 Battery backup mode:
When the AC input voltage is outside specified

tolerances for the UPS or the utility power fails, the
inverter and the battery step in to ensure a continuous
supply of power to the load following a very short (<10 ms) transfer time. The UPS continues to
operate on battery power until the end of battery backup time or the utility power returns to
normal.
1.2 Usage:
It can be used only with low power ratings (< 2 kVA).
It operates without a real static switch, so a certain time is required to transfer the load to the inverter.
This time is acceptable for certain individual applications, but incompatible with the performance
required by more sophisticated, sensitive systems (large computer centers, telephone exchanges, etc.)
The frequency is not regulated and there is no bypass.
Note: In normal mode, the power supplying the load does not flow through the inverter, which
explains why this type of UPS is sometimes called “Off-line”. This term is misleading, however,
because it also suggests “not supplied by utility power”, when in fact the load is supplied by the utility
via the AC input during normal operation. That is why standard IEC 62040 recommends the term
“passive standby”.
- 66 -
st
2 UPS operating in line-interactive mode:
2.1 Operating principle:
The inverter is connected in parallel with the AC input in a

standby configuration, but also charges the battery. It thus interacts
(reversible operation) with the AC input source.
2.1.1 Normal mode:
The load is supplied with conditioned power via a

parallel connection of the AC input and the inverter. The
inverter operates to provide output-voltage conditioning
and/or charge the battery. The output frequency depends on
the AC-input frequency.
When the AC input voltage is outside specified tolerances for the UPS or the utility power
fails, the inverter and the battery step in to ensure a continuous supply of power to the load
following a transfer without interruption using a static switch which also disconnects the AC input
to prevent power from the inverter from flowing upstream. The UPS continues to operate on
battery power until the end of battery backup time or the utility power returns to normal, which
provokes transfer of the load back to the AC input (normal mode).
2.1.3 Bypass mode:
This type of UPS may be equipped with a bypass. If one of the UPS functions fails, the load
can be transferred to the bypass AC input (supplied with utility or standby power, depending on
the installation).
2.2 Usage:
This configuration is not well suited to regulation of sensitive loads in the medium to high-power
range because frequency regulation is not possible. For this reason, it is rarely used other than for low
power ratings.
- 67 -
st
3 UPS operating in double-conversion (on-line) mode:
3.1 Operating principle :
The inverter is connected in series between the AC

input and the application.
3.1.1 Normal mode:
During normal operation, all the power

supplied to the load passes through the
rectifier/charger and inverter which together
perform a double conversion (AC-DC-AC),
When the AC input voltage is outside

specified tolerances for the UPS or the utility
power fails, the inverter and the battery step in to ensure a continuous supply of power to the load
following a transfer without interruption using a static switch. The UPS continues to operate on
battery power until the end of battery backup time or utility power returns to normal, which
provokes transfer of the load back to the AC input (normal mode).
3.1.3 Bypass mode:
This type of UPS is generally equipped with a static bypass, sometimes referred to as a static
switch.
The load can be transferred without interruption to the bypass AC input (supplied with utility
or standby power, depending on the installation), in the event of the following:
- UPS failure
- Load-current transients (inrush or fault currents)
- Load peaks
However, the presence of a bypass assumes that the input and output frequencies are
identical and if the voltage levels are not the same, a bypass transformer is required.
For certain loads, the UPS must be synchronized with the bypass power to ensure load-
supply continuity. What is more, when the UPS is in bypass mode, a disturbance on the AC input
source may be transmitted directly to the load because the inverter no longer steps in.
Note: Another bypass line, often called the maintenance bypass, is available for maintenance
purposes. It is closed by a manual switch.
3.2 Usage:
In this configuration, the time required to transfer the load to the inverter is negligible due to the static
switch. Also, the output voltage and frequency do not depend on the input voltage and frequency
conditions. This means that the UPS, when designed for this purpose, can operate as a frequency
converter.
Practically speaking, this is the main configuration used for medium and high power ratings (from 10
kVA upwards).
- 68 -
st
Note: This type of UPS is often called “on-line”, meaning that the load is continuously supplied by the
inverter, regardless of the conditions on the AC input source. This term is misleading, however, because it
also suggests “supplied by utility power”, when in fact the load is supplied by power that has been
reconstituted by the double conversion system. That is why standard IEC 62040 recommends the term
“double conversion”.
86) What are The Main Function of Earthing / Grounding Systems?
Answer:
- Protection for human against any leakage current

- Protection for equipment against any leakage current
87) When many cables are laid on cable tray, what are the factors that determine the final ampacity of each
cable?
Answer:
- Load current depends on load wattage.

- Derating factor - Variation in Air Temperature.
- Grouping factor.
88) What is Voltage Drop? What are the factors that determine the Voltage drop of a cable/wire? Write down the
V.D equation for single phase cable & for 3 phase cable
Answer:
- V.D. is the reduction of voltage from the supply side till load side due to cable’s resistance.
- Factors: - Ampere, length, and conductor size, type of insulation of the cable /wire.
- V.D equation for single phase cable is: V = 2* I*L(R cosØ + X sinØ)
- V.D equation for two phase cable is: V = √2* I*L(R cosØ + X sinØ)
- V.D equation for three phase cable is: V = √3* I*L(R cosØ + X sinØ)
89) If the power factor of a certain electrical installation is low how can the power factor to be improved /
corrected?
Answer:
- By using Capacitor (or Capacitor Bank if several loads are grouped) which should be calculated
according to the value equal to reactive VARS to be neutralized by the capacitor to reach the desired
final power factor.
90) What are the devices to be used for earth leakage protection / ground fault protection?
Answer:
- Earth leakage is protected by using ELCB, RCD, GFCI or E.L. relay.

- Ground fault is protected by using Fault indicator to detect line /ground fault.
- 69 -
st
91) What are the C.T. & P.T? When do we use each one and why?
Answer:
¾ C.T.: is current Transformer to provide current transformation ratio.
- They are used for measuring (instrument) like Voltmeters, Ameters. Because the load current is big or
large that the measuring instrument can not safely pass it.
¾ P.T.: is potential (voltage) transformer to provide voltage transformation ratio.

- Used for any usage requires reduction in voltage. Because instrument coil can not be connected to HV
or MV.
92) Define the followings:

• PVC
• XLPE
• LSF
Answer:
- PVC: Polyvinyl Chloride

- XLPE: Cross Linked Polyethylene
- LSF: Low Smoke Fume
93) Define the Grouping Factor? When it is consider in cable size calculations? Is it applicable for multi core or
single core cables?
Answer:
- Grouping factor is a derating factor for the ampacity of the cable when installed near several
cables/wires within defined distances.
- It is considered when several cables are used on same routing inside the raceway or cable tray.
- It is applicable for three single core cables in tree foil/flat formation and for multi-core cables formation
if they are used in a group.
94) A branch panel board with total connected load 25 KW & P.F. = 0.8. Calculate Main Feeder Cable and Main
C.B?
Answer:
I= (5 *10³) / (√3 * 380 * 0.8) = 47.50 A
- Apply Derating & Correction. Factors I ≈ 56 A

- Applying factor 125% allowable ampacity.
- (C. B. 80Amp. MCB) & Cable (4*35) +16 mm² cu.
- 70 -
st
95) Mention the different types of conduits used in electrical systems routing inside high rise buildings? What is
the common usage for each?
Answer:
- PVC: for embedded.

- R.S.C & I.M.C & EMT: for exposed.
- Flexible: for connection to motors.... etc.
96) What are the consequences of “excess” voltage drop in a circuit?
Answer:
Excess voltage drop can cause the following conditions:

- Low voltage to the equipment being powered, causing improper, erratic, or no operation - and damage to
the equipment.
- Poor efficiency and wasted energy.
97) What is the difference between, molded Case Circuit Breaker and miniature circuit breakers?
Answer:
- The ratings & short circuit of the MCCB is higher and discrimination could be achieved using the
MCCB.
98) Suppose you are buying a transformer. You have two options
TR1: is 11/0.4KV & Z = 4 %
TR2: is 11/0.4KV & Z = 6 %
Which one you choose & why? Taking into consideration, you need 380V on the secondary at full load.
Answer:
The choice is TR1 Because
TR1: at no load →Vn.l = 400V & at full load →Vf.l = 400/1.04 = 384.6 > 380V (Accepted)
While;
TR2: at no load →Vn.l = 400V & at full load →Vf.l = 400/1.06 = 377.3 < 380V (Not Accepted)
- 71 -
st
99) What are the different standards of sockets? Draw them & state the difference?
Answer:
Socket Outlets Different Standards Socket Outlets Different

Shapes Shapes
Standards
European - German Standard

Spanish Standard
“SCHUOKO”
“Without Ground”
“With Ground”
CEE7/4
European - French Standard
Israel Standard
“SCHUOKO”
“With Ground”
“With Ground”
SI 32 (IS 16A–R)
Australian - Argentina -
Chinese Standard South America Standard
“With Ground” “With Ground”
AS-3112
UK - British Standard
“With Ground” Egypt Standard
BS-1363 “Without Ground”
SASO No LIC 203181
North America - UL Standard
Italian Standard
“With Ground”
“With Ground”
NEMA 5-15
CEI 23-16
SASO No LIC 203182
North America - UL Standard Italian Standard

“Without Ground” “With Ground”
Universal
UK - Euro-US Standard Euro - US Standard
BS-5733
Universal
Euro - US Standard
UK - Euro-US Standard
“With Ground”
Chinese - Euro - US Standard Switzerland Standard

SEV-1011
- 72 -
st
South Africa – Indian –

Europe - Russian Standard
British Standard round pin
“With Ground”
CEE7/16
BS-546
Japanese Standard Denmark Standard

JIS C 8303 SRAF 1962/DB
Spanish Standard Spanish Standard

Shaver Socket
Shaver Socket
“With Insulating
BS-4573
Transformer”
100) Compare between the following types of lamps according to there Power Range, Efficacy, Lumens, Life
Time, Color Temp and CRI.
Incandescent and Halogen
Fluorescent
Compact Fluorescent (CFL)
Mercury Vapor
Metal Halide
High Pressure Sodium (HPS)
Low Pressure Sodium (LPS)
Answer:
Power Range Efficacy Lumens Rated Life Color Temp. CRI

Lamps From To From To From To From To From To From To
0
Watt Lm / watt Lm Hrs. K %
Incandescent & Halogen 15 1,500 15 25 225 37,500 750 2,000 2,400 3,100 95 100
Excellent
Fluorescent 15 200 50 100 750 20,000 7,000 24,000 3,000 6,000 50 80
Fair Excellent
Compact Fluorescent 4 40 50 80 200 3,200 10,000 20,000 4,000 6,000 50 80
(CFL) Fair Excellent
Mercury Vapor 40 1,000 50 60 2,000 60,000 16,000 25,000 3,300 5,900 22 52
(HID) Poor Good
Metal Halide 175 1,000 80 100 14,000 60,000 1,500 15,000 3,300 4,700 65 93
(HID) Very Good Excellent
High Pressure Sodium 70 1,000 70 140 4,900 140,000 20,000 24,000 2,100 2,300 20 80 (White HPS)
(HPS) Poor Excellent
Low Pressure Sodium 35 180 140 180 4,900 33,000 up To 18,000 up To 1,750 0 18
(LPS) Poor
- 73 -
st
101) What is the ballast? State its function & types of ballasts.
Answer:
¾ All Discharge lamps requires an external device to regulate power. This device is the Ballast
¾ Ballast Function :
– Provide Proper Voltage to establish an Arc
– Regulate Electric current flowing through the lamp
– Supply proper voltage for lamp operation
¾ Ballasts may be Electromagnetic or Electronic
102) What is the difference between a kW and a kWh? What is measured by electric utility?
Answer:
¾ There is a big difference between a kW and a kWh

– A kW is a measure of power being used
– A kWh is a measure of energy being used
¾ A Good Analogy for kW and kWh is the automobile dash board which provides a nice way to
understand the difference between the kW and kWh
– A kW is like the speed that is measured by the speedometer.
– A kWh is like the distance that is measured by the odometer
¾ The electric utility does not measure instantaneous values of the kW a facility uses. Instead, they always
average the value of the kW over a short period of time- usually 15, 30 or 60 minutes – 900, 1,800 or
3,600 seconds.
- 74 -
st
103) How can you estimate the electrical consumption per month for residential buildings?
Answer:
1. We should divide the residential building area into three areas:

- Living areas. - Sleeping areas. - Service areas.
2. We should classify the residential building loads into four types:
- Home appliances loads. - Lighting loads. - Air conditioning loads. - Hot water loads.
3. We should divide the weak in two categories:
- Weekdays. - Weekends.
4. We should divide the year into four seasons:
- Summer. - Winter. - Autumn. - Spring.
5. We should divide the day into twenty four hours.
6. We should estimate the occupancy as a percentage per day.
Each one of the previous divisions should be taken as a factor or percentage.

Here down is a table for small example for residential building in KSA.
- 75 -
st
- 76 -
st
104) What is star-delta starting? Why is it used? What are the advantages & disadvantages of using this method?
Should we immediately install soft starters on all our existing motors?
Answer:
¾ What is star-delta starting?
• Star Delta starting is when the motor is connected (normally externally from the motor) in STAR during
the starting sequence. When the motor has accelerated to close to the normal running speed, the motor
is connected in DELTA. Pictures 1 and 2 show the two connections for a series connected three phase
motor.
• The change of the external connection of the motor from Star to Delta is normally achieved by what is
commonly referred to a soft starter or a Star Delta starter. This starter is simply a number of contactors
(switches) that connect the different leads together to form the required connection, i.e. Star or Delta.
• These starters are normally set to a specific starting sequence, mostly using a time setting to switch
between Star and Delta. There can be extensive protection on these starters, monitoring the starting
time, current, Voltage, motor speed etc.
• The cost of the soft starter will depend on the number of starts required per hour, run-up time, Voltage,
power rating, and protection devices required.
¾ Why star-delta starting is used?
• Let’s consider an example motor: 120kW, 4 Pole, 380 Volt, Delta connected, 3 Phase, 50 Hz.
• First we will examine the normal running condition, i.e. when the motor is connected in Delta.Then, let’s
have a look what happens when the motor is connected in STAR.
- 77 -
st
• To truly grasp the differences between these two starting methods, we will list the values next to each
other in table 3, and on graphs 5 and 6.
- 78 -
st
• Immediately we notice the primary reasons for using star delta starters on electric motors: The starting
power is reduced from 98 kW to 33 kW (by approximately 67%), the starting current is reduced from
1495 A to 500 A (by approximately 67%). Because the motor is not intended to actually run in this
connection, the reduction in full load speed, power factor and efficiency is not significant for this
discussion.
• One major disadvantage of the star delta starting is the reduction in the starting torque from 1038 Nm to
343 Nm (by approximately 67%). This will be discussed in depth later on.
• The reason for these 67% changes becomes clear when we examine the phase voltage on the motor, we
see that the phase voltage when the motor is connected in Delta is 380 Volt. When the motor is however
connected in Star, the Phase Voltage will be 219.3 Volt. The relations for star and delta connections are
as listed in Table 4:
• Thus, when the motor is started in the star connection, the phase voltage of the motor is reduced by a
factor of √3.
• The reductions in starting current, starting power, and starting torques for a reduced Voltage can each
be calculated by using equation 1 (This ignores other factors like saturation, etc.):
• If we apply this equation for the star delta starting, we see from equation 2 where the 67% reduction
comes from:
¾ What are the advantages of using Star Delta starting?

• The most significant advantage of using Star-Delta starting is the huge reduction in the starting current
of the motor, which will result in a significant cost saving on the size of the circuit breakers, the size of
the fuses, the size cables, as well as the transformers and switch gear.
• Requiring 67% less starting current can have a tremendous cost saving implication!
- 79 -
st
¾ Does that mean that we should immediately install soft starters on all our existing motors?
• Firstly: No! The cost reductions will only result when a new installation is done! If the transformers,
switch gear, cables and protection were initially selected for the high starting currents, there would not
be a significant cost saving by installing a soft starter.
• Secondly: Let us first further explore the 67% reduction in the motor’s starting torque.
¾ What are the disadvantages of using Star Delta starting?
• The most significant disadvantage of using Star-Delta starting is the huge reduction in the starting torque
of the motor, which will result in a significantly increased run-up time, and may even result in a stall
condition. Eventually this may lead to serious damage to the motor.
• The red arrow indicates what is called a “Stall” condition. At this point, the motor cannot accelerate,
because it does not have sufficient torque to overcome the load requirement!
- 80 -
st
105) How the Electricity Bill is computed?
Answer:
1. In KSA “2009”
- 81 -
st
2. In Egypt “2007 - 2008”
- 82 -
st
106) What are the international codes, standards, regulations & specifications? State some of them that can be
followed in electrical design?
Answer:
¾ Standards are guidance documents developed by groups that have (hopefully) studied the area and are
making recommendations. Thus, standards are not legal requirements unless something or someone else
has made them a requirement.
¾ Legislation & regulations is a law and thus the subject matter covered is required legally. Legislation
must be passed by some governmental authority to be a law. Often legislation is somewhat vague and
the manifestation or full explanation of the requirements must be written in "codes“.Laws are passed
leading to regulations
¾ Codes are the manifestation (or written legal requirements) of legislation.
¾ Different International Codes, Standards, Regulations & Specifications
- CSI = Construction Specifications Institute.

- IEC = International Electro-technical Commission.
- BSI + EN = British Standards Institute Electrical Code + European Norm
- IEEE = The Institute of Electrical & Electronics Engineers.
- NFPA-70 (NEC) = National Electerical Code.
- ANSI = American National Standard Institute.
- ICC = International Code Council.
- NFPA-780 = Lightning Protecion Systems.
- NFPA-101 = Life Safety Code.
- NFPA-72 = National Fire Alarm Code.
- NFPA-92 = Recomended Practice for Smoke-Control Systems.
- NFPA-110 = Emergency & Standby Power Systems.
- UL = Underwriters Laboratories Standards.
- NEMA = National Electerical Manufacturers Association.
- IESNA = Illuminating Engineering Society of North America.
- SCECO = Saudi Consolidated Electric Company Distribution Standard.
- SASO = Saudi Arabian Standard Organization
- SBC = Saudi Building Code
- GSBC = General Specifications for Building Construction
- SAES = Saudi Aramco Engineering Standards
- IEE Wiring Regulations = The Institution of Electrical Engineers
- DIN German norms = Deutsches Institut fur Normung
- CIBSE = Chartered Institution of Building Services Engineers Lighting Code UK norms.
- KAHRAMAA Regulations (Doha - Qatar).
- QCS = Qatar Construction Specification
- DEWA Regulations = Dubai Electricity & Water Authority
- SEWA Regulations = Sharjah Electricity & Water Authority
- Egyptian Electrical Codes & Specifications
- Egyptian Lighting Code
- LEED + USGBC = Leadership in Energy and Environmental Design +U.S. Green Building Council.
- ASHRAE = American Socity of Heating, Refrigerating & Air Conditioning Engineers
- Saudi Lighting Code
- OSHA = Ocupational Safety & Health Administration Standard
- 83 -
st
107) What are the different types of local power cables for low & medium voltages?
Answer:
Low Voltage Cables - 450/750 V
Cable Type Description Application Photo

1 9 Single core cables with ¾ Soft annealed solid or stranded copper For indoor fixed installations in dry
solid or stranded copper conductors insulated with PVC locations, laid in conduits, as well as
conductors compound rated 70◦C or 90◦C. in steel support brackets.
¾ Cables are produced According to IEC
9 PVC insulated. 60227 & BS 6004.
2 9 Single core cables with ¾ Soft annealed copper fine wires bunched For indoor fixed installations in dry
flexible copper together in subunits or stranded bunched locations, where particular flexibility
conductors. groups into a main unit, which forms the is required.
flexible conductor. Insulated with soft For electrical panels connection or for
9 PVC insulated. PVC 70◦C or 90◦C compound. electrical apparatus they can laid in
¾ Cables are produced According to IEC groups around steel sheets.
60227 & BS 6004.
Low Voltage Cables - 0.6/1 (1.2) KV

3,4 9 Single core cables with ¾ Soft annealed stranded copper or For outdoor & indoor installations in
stranded circular copper aluminum conductors. Insulated with damp & wet locations. They are
conductors. PVC (or XLPE) compound rated 70◦C and normally used for power distribution
covered & sheathed with PVC in urban networks, industrial plants, as
9 PVC (or XLPE) insulated compound layer to form the overall well as in thermo power and
and PVC sheathed. jacket. hydropower stations.
¾ Cables are produced according to IEC
60502 or BS 6004 (or BS 5467).
5 9 Multi-core cables with ¾ Soft annealed copper fine wires bunched For indoor movable installation in dry
flexible copper together in subunits or stranded bunched location connecting to source power
conductors. groups into a main unit, which forms the portable electrical appliances
flexible conductor. These conductors are operating under unfavorable
9 PVC insulated and PVC insulated with PVC compound rated conditions such as portable lamps,
sheathed. 70◦C and sheathed with PVC compound fans, refrigerators, washing machines,
layer. vacuum cleaners, TV & house hold
¾ Cables are produced According to IEC heating and ventilating apparatus.
60227 & BS 6500.
6,7 9 Multi-core cables with ¾ Multi-core cables with stranded copper For outdoor & indoor installations in
,8, stranded copper (or (or aluminum) conductors are insulated damp & wet locations.
9 aluminum) conductors. with PVC (or XLPE) compound They are normally used for
assembled together, covered with overall power distribution in urban
9 PVC (or XLPE) jacket of PVC compound. networks, industrial plants,
insulated and PVC ¾ Cables are produced According to IEC as well as in thermo power
sheathed. 60502 & BS 6346 (or BS 5467). and hydropower stations.
10, 9 Multi-core cables with ¾ Multi-core cables with stranded copper For outdoor installations in damp &
11, stranded copper (or (or aluminum) conductors are insulated wet locations, where mechanical
12, aluminum) conductors. with PVC (or XLPE) compound damages are expected to occur.
13, assembled together, armoured with steel
14, 9 PVC (or XLPE) tape (or Wire) and covered with overall
15, insulated, Steel Tape
16, jacket of PVC compound.
(or Wire) Armoured ¾ Cables are produced According to IEC
17
and PVC sheathed. 60502 & BS 6346 (or BS 5467).
- 84 -
st
Medium Voltage Cables - 6 /10 (12) KV,

8.7/15 (17.5) KV,
12/20 (24) KV &
18/30 (36) KV

1 9 Single & three cores ¾ Stranded circular compacted copper (or These cables are generally sutibale
copper (or aluminum) aluminum) conductor, semi conductor layer for direct burial or for installation on
conductors as conductor screen, XLPE insulated, semi trays or in ducts.
conducting layer as nonmetallic insulation
9 XLPE insulated and screen copper tape or wire as metallic
PVC sheathed. insulation screen, three cores assembled
together with non hygroscopic
polypropylene fillers, wrapped with binder
tape & PVC sheathed.
60502 & BS 6622.
2 9 three cores copper (or ¾ Stranded circular compacted copper (or For outdoor installations in damp &
aluminum) conductors aluminum) conductor, semi conductor layer wet locations, where mechanical
as conductor screen, XLPE insulated, semi damages are expected to occur.
9 XLPE insulated, Steel conducting layer as nonmetallic insulation
Tape (or Wire) screen copper tape or wire as metallic
insulation screen, three cores assembled
Armoured and PVC
together with non hygroscopic
sheathed.
polypropylene fillers, wrapped with binder
tape covered with a layer of PVC
compound as bedding, steel tape (or Wire)
armoured & PVC sheathed.
60502 & BS 6622.
108) When can we use neutral with C.S.A equal to the C.S.A of the phase & when can we use reduced neutral
and with C.S.A less than the C.S.A of the phase? How can we choose the reduced neutral in 3 phase-
systems?
Answer:
¾ We use neutral with C.S.A equal to the C.S.A of the phase in case of single phase loads or in case of three
phase loads that have a great probability of occur of big unbalance on the three phase wires due to different
P.F’s or due to harmonics. For example: the neutral wire of the main cable of 3 phase panel board, the 3
phase lighting circuit with discharge lamps.
¾ We use neutral with C.S.A less than the C.S.A of the phase in case of three phase loads that have very small
probability of occur of big unbalance on the three phase wires.
¾ Choice of the reduced neutral in 3 phase-systems is according to followed:
• For cables with 3 phases of CSA 16mm2 or less, the neutral should have CSA as phases.
• For cables with 3 phases of CSA 25mm2 or 35mm2, the neutral should have the next lesser CSA than CSA
of phases.
• For cables with 3 phases of CSA 50mm2 or more, the neutral should have CSA of not less than half CSA
of phases.
- 85 -
st
109) How can you calculate the full load current for different sizes of motors (1-ph, 2-ph & 3-ph)?
Answer:
• The full-load current Ia supplied to the motor is given by the following formulae:
o 3-phase motor: Ia = Pn x 1,000 / (√3 x U x η x cos φ)
o 1-phase motor: Ia = Pn x 1,000 / (U x η x cos φ)
Where:
Ia: current demand (in amps)
Pn: nominal power (in kW)
U: voltage between phases for 3-phase motors and voltage between the terminals for
single-phase motors (in volts). A single-phase motor may be connected phase-toneutralor
phase-to-phase.
η: per-unit efficiency, i.e. output kW / input kW
cos φ: power factor, i.e. kW input / kVA input
• The current supplied to the motor, after power-factor correction, is given by:
o I = Ia (cos φ / cos φ’)
Where:
cos φ: is the power factor before compensation
cos φ’: is the power factor after compensation, Ia being the original current.
Rated operational power and currents (concluded):
• According to NEC:
Table 430.248 Full-Load Currents in Amperes, Single-Phase Table 430.249 Full-Load Current, Two-Phase Alternating-
Alternating-Current Motors Current Motors (4-Wire)
- 86 -
st
Table 430.250 Full-Load Current, Three-Phase Alternating-Current Motors
- 87 -
st
• According to IEC:
- 88 -
st
110) Do we can put two branch circuits in one conduit?
Answer:
We can put two branch circuits in one conduit in case they are of the same phase.
111) State way of short circuit calculation at any point within a LV installation according to Egyptian Code for
electrical installation
Answer:
¾ 3-phase short-circuit current (Isc) at any point within a LV installation according to Egyptian Code
for electrical installation:
U S 1.05U n
Is.c = =
Zt Zt
Where
• Is.c: Short Circuit Current at any point (in KA).
• Zt: Total impedance per phase of the installation from upstream supply to the fault location (in Ω).
• Us: Phase voltage at power supply terminals in case of no load (in volts).
• Un: Phase voltage at power supply terminals in case of load (in volts).
Step (1): Upstream Network Power Supply “For Medium Voltage”
o Upstream S.C. (kVA) is the short circuit of the protection devices at the medium voltage side and is
specified by the electric utility.
o Zs.c is calculated using down formula.
o Xs.c = 0.98 Zs.c.
o Rs.c = 0.15 Xs.c (Rs.c is almost negligible value, so it’s neglected)
3(1.05 × 220 )
2
3U s2
Z s .c = =
S .C.(kVA) S .C.(kVA)
Where
• Zs.c = Impedance of the medium voltage network (in mΩ).
• S.C. (KVA) = 3-phase short circuits fault level of the protection
devices at the medium voltage side and is specified by the electric
utility (in KVA).
• Us = Phase voltage at power supply terminals in case of no load (in
volts).
For Example:
S.C Us Rs.c Xs.c Zs.c

(K.VA) (Volts) (m Ω) (m Ω) (m Ω)
250,000 231 0.095 0.633 0.64
350,000 231 0.0675 0.4515 0.4574
500,000 231 0.047 0.316 0.319
- 89 -
st
Step (2): Transformers “For One Transformer or n Transformers in Parallel”
o The impedance, resistance & reactance of transformer are usually given by manufacturer.
o If not known, we can calculate the impedance Ztr of a transformer, viewed from the LV terminals,
is given by the formula:
3(1.05 × 220)
2
3U s2
Z T .R = U s .c = U s .c
kVA kVA
Q Pcu = 3I n2 × RT . R
Pcu × 10 3
∴ RT . R =
3I n2
∴ X T .R = Z T2. R − X T2. R
Where
• KVA = Transformer rating (in KVA).
• Pcu = Transformer Total losses (in watts).
• Us = Phase voltage at power supply terminals in case of no load (in volts).
• Us.c = Short-circuit impedance voltage of the transformer (in %). Its value is (0.04, 0.05 or 0.06).
• In = Nominal full-load current (in amps).
• Rtr = Resistance of one phase of the transformer (in milli-ohms). (Rtr can be ignored, Rtr≈ 0).
• Xtr = Reactance of one phase of the transformer (in milli-ohms). (Xtr ≈ Ztr).
• Zt.r = Transformer equivalent impedance viewed from the LV terminals (in mΩ).
Resistance, reactance and impedance values for typical distribution 400 V transformers with HV
windings ≤ 20 kV
Notice that in case of using (n) typical transformers in parallel, so the values of given reactance’s,
resistance’s & impedance’s should be divided by (n) to obtain the total equivalent values.
- 90 -
st
Step (3): Bus Ducts “Between Transformer and MDB or in High Rise Buildings”
o For prefabricated bus trunking and similar pre-wired ducting systems, the manufacturer should be
consulted.
o If not known, so the resistance of bus ducts is generally negligible, so that the impedance is
practically all reactive, and amounts to approximately 0.15 mΩ/metre length per phase for LV bus
ducts (doubling the spacing between the bars increases the reactance by about 10% only).
ρl
RB . D = ≈0
Α
Z B. D ≈ X B.D ≈ [0.15 (mΩ meter )]× [length (meter )]
Where
• ρ = Resistivity constant of the bus duct material at 70◦C (in mΩ.mm2/m).
⇒ For copper: ρ = 21 mΩ.mm2/m.
⇒ For aluminum: ρ = 33 mΩ.mm2/m.
• ℓ = Length of the bus duct (in m).
• A = c.s.a. of bus duct (in mm2).
Step (4): Circuit Breakers “For Main C.B & Branch Circuits C.B”
o In LV circuits, the impedance of circuit breakers upstream of the fault location must be taken into
account.
o Values of resistance & reactance of C.B can be found in catalogues.
o If not known, the reactance value conventionally assumed is 0.15 mΩ per CB, while the resistance
is neglected.
RC . B ≈ 0
Z C .B ≈ X C . B ≈ 0.15mΩ
Step (5): Bus Bars “For Final Distribution Boards”
o The resistance of bus bars is generally negligible, so that the impedance is practically all reactive,
and amounts to approximately 0.15 mΩ/metre length per phase for LV bus bars (doubling the
spacing between the bars increases the reactance by about 10% only).
ρl
RB.B = ≈0
Α
Z B. B ≈ X B. B ≈ [0.15 (mΩ meter )]× [length(meter )]
Where
• ρ = Resistivity constant of the bus bar material at 70◦C (in mΩ.mm2/m).
• ℓ = Length of the bus bar (in m).
• A = c.s.a. of bus bar (in mm2).
- 91 -
st
Step (6): Cables
o Cable reactance values can be obtained from the manufacturers. For c.s.a. of less than 50 mm2
reactance may be ignored.
o In the absence of other information,
For 50 Hz systems
⇒ For Single Core: Xs.c = (0.07 mΩ/metre) x ℓ
⇒ For Multi Core: Xs.c = (0.15 mΩ/metre) x ℓ
For 60 Hz systems
⇒ For Single Core: Xs.c = (0.09 mΩ/metre) x ℓ
⇒ For Multi Core: Xs.c = (0.17 mΩ/metre) x ℓ
o The resistance of Cable is given by the formula

ρl
RL =
Α
X L ≈ [0.07 ( mΩ meter )]× [length ( meter )]
Where
• ρ = Resistivity constant of the conductor material at 70◦C (in mΩ.mm2/m).
• ℓ = Length of the conductor (in m).
• A = c.s.a. of conductor (in mm2).
o In case of using n typical cables in parallel, the equivalent resistance will be the resistance of one
cable divided by n.
At Resistances Reactances Impedances Short Circuit

Point (mΩ) (mΩ) (mΩ) Current (KA)
a Ra=RSC+RTR Xa=XSC+XTR 2 2 ISC(a) = Us/Zt(a)
Zt(a)=√(Ra +Xa )
b Rb=RSC+RTR+RBD+RMCB Xb=XSC+XTR+XBD+XMCB 2 2 ISC(b) = Us/Zt(b)
Zt(b)=√(Rb +Xb )
c Rc=RSC+RTR+RBD+RMCB+RBB1+RCB1 Xc=XSC+XTR+XBD+XMCB+XBB1+XCB1 2 2 ISC(c) = Us/Zt(c)
Zt(c)=√(Rc +Xd )
d Rd=RSC+RTR+RBD+RMCB+RBB1+RCB1+RL1+RCB4 Xd=XSC+XTR+XBD+XMCB+XBB1+XCB1+XL1+XCB4 2 2 ISC(d) = Us/Zt(d)
Zt(d)=√(Rc +Xd )
Notice That: S.C. @ (a) > S.C. @ (b) > S.C. @ (c) > S.C. @ (d)
112) Complete
– Illuminance is measured in footcandles (lumens/square foot) or lux (lumens/square meter).
One footcandle equals -------- lux.
– Luminous intensity is measured in Candela or Lumen (Lu).
One Candela equals -------- Lumen (Lu).
Answer:
- 1 footcandle = 10.76 lux
- 1 Candela = 12.6 Lumen (Lu)
- 92 -
st
113) How can you size the earthing conductor according to size of phase cable size or according to C.B. size using
NEC & IEC?
Answer:
¾ According to NEC :
o Table 250.66 Size of Alternating-Current Grounding Electrode Conductor
Size of Largest Ungrounded Service-Entrance Conductor or Size of Grounding Electrode Conductor

Equivalent Area for Parallel Conductors
Aluminum or Copper-Clad Aluminum or Copper-
Copper Copper
Aluminum Clad Aluminum
(AWG/kcmil) mm ² (AWG/kcmil) mm ² (AWG/kcmil) mm ² (AWG/kcmil) mm ²
2 or smaller 35 or smaller 1/0 or smaller 70 or smaller 8 10 6 16
1 or 1/0 50 or 70 2/0 or 3/0 70 or 95 6 16 4 25
4/0 or 250
2/0 or 3/0 70 or 95 120 or 150 4 25 2 35
Over 250
Over 3/0 Over 95 Over 150 through
through 500 2 35 1/0 50-70
through 350 through 185 (240- 300)
Over 350 Over 185 Over 500 Over (240- 300)
1/0 50-70 3/0 95
through 600 through 300 through 900 through (400-500)
Over 600 Over 300 Over 900 Over (4003500)
2/0 70 4/0 120
through 1100 through 500 through 1750 through (800-1000)
Over 1100 Over 500 Over 1750 Over (800-1000) 3/0 95 250 150
o Table 250.122 Minimum Size Equipment Grounding Conductors for Grounding Raceway and
Equipment
Rating or Setting of Automatic Overcurrent Copper Aluminum or Copper-Clad
Device in Circuit Ahead of Equipment, Aluminum
Conduit, etc., Not Exceeding (Amperes) (AWG/kcmil) mm ² (AWG/kcmil) mm ²
15 14 2.5 12 4
20 12 4 10 6
30 10 6 8 10
40 10 6 8 10
60 10 6 8 10
100 8 10 6 16
200 6 16 4 25
300 4 25 2 35
400 3 25-35 1 50
500 2 35 1/0 50-70
600 1 50 2/0 70
800 1/0 50-70 3/0 95
1000 2/0 70 4/0 120
1200 3/0 95 250 120-150
1600 4/0 120 350 185
2000 250 120-150 400 185-240
2500 350 185 600 300
3000 400 185-240 600 300
4000 500 240-300 800 400
5000 700 300-400 1200 630
6000 800 400 1200 630
- 93 -
st
¾ According to IEC:
o Figure below is based on IEC 60364-5-54. This table provides two methods of determining the
appropriate c.s.a. for both PE or PEN conductors
(1) Data valid if the prospective conductor is of the same material as the line conductor. Otherwise, a correction factor must be applied.
(2) When the PE conductor is separated from the circuit phase conductors, the following minimum values must be respected:
o 2.5 mm2 if the PE is mechanically protected
o 4 mm2 if the PE is not mechanically protected
(3) For mechanical reasons, a PEN conductor, shall have a cross-sectional area not less than 10 mm2 in copper or 16 mm2 in aluminium.
The two methods are:

◊ Adiabatic (which corresponds with that described in IEC 60724)
This method, while being economical and assuring protection of the conductor against
overheating, leads to small c.s.a.’s compared to those of the corresponding circuit phase
conductors. The result is sometimes incompatible with the ecessity in IT and TN schemes to
minimize the impedance of the circuit earth-fault loop, to ensure positive operation by
instantaneous overcurrent tripping devices. This method is used in practice, therefore, for TT
installations, and for dimensioning an earthing conductor.
◊ Simplified
This method is based on PE conductor sizes being related to those of the corresponding
circuit phase conductors, assuming that the same conductor material is used in each case.
Note:
◊ When, in a TT scheme, the installation earth electrode is beyond the zone of influence of the
source earthing electrode, the c.s.a. of the PE conductor can be limited to 25 mm2 (for copper) or
35 mm2 (for aluminium).
◊ The neutral cannot be used as a PEN conductor unless its c.s.a. is equal to or larger than 10 mm2
(copper) or 16 mm2 (aluminium).
◊ Moreover, a PEN conductor is not allowed in a flexible cable. Since a PEN conductor functions
also as a neutral conductor, its c.s.a. cannot, in any case, be less than that necessary for the
neutral.
◊ This c.s.a. cannot be less than that of the phase conductors unless:
• The kVA rating of single-phase loads is less than 10% of the total kVA load, and
• Imax likely to pass through the neutral in normal circumstances, is less than the current
permitted for the selected cable size.
◊ Furthermore, protection of the neutral conductor must be assured by the protective devices
provided for phase-conductor protection.
- 94 -
st
114) For the following factors. Explain the effect of increasing or decreasing these factors on short circuit.
• Cable length
• Cable CSA
• Conductor Type
• Transformer per unit impedance
• Transformer load.
• System Voltage
• Bus Bars
• Circuit Breakers
Answer:
Equations required:
ρl 3U s2
U
Is.c = S Zt = R + X
t
2
t
2
RL = Z T .R = U s .c
kVA
Zt Α
1. Cable length
If ℓ ↑ → RL ↑ → Zt ↑ → ISC ↓ While If ℓ ↓ → RL ↓ → Zt ↓ → ISC ↑
2. Cable CSA
If A ↑ → RL ↓ → Zt ↓ → ISC ↑ While If A ↓ → RL ↑ → Zt ↑ → ISC ↓
3. Conductor Type
If ρ ↑ → RL ↑ → Zt ↑ → ISC ↓ While If ρ ↓ → RL ↓ → Zt ↓ → ISC ↑

Since ρAL > ρCU Therefore ISC(AL) < ISC(CU)
4. Transformer per unit impedance
If USC ↑ → ZT.R ↑ → Zt ↑ → ISC ↓ While If USC ↓ → ZT.R ↓ → Zt ↓ → ISC ↑
5. Transformer load.
If kVA ↑ → ZT.R ↓ → Zt ↓ → ISC ↑ While If kVA ↓ → ZT.R ↑ → Zt ↑ → ISC ↓
6. System Voltage
If US ↑ → ISC ↑ While If USC ↓ → ISC ↓
7. Bus Bars
Increasing or decreasing the rating of B.B’s has neglected effect on short circuit current.
8. Circuit Breakers
Increasing or decreasing the rating of C.B’s has neglected effect on short circuit current.
- 95 -
st
115) What are the different types of cables?

Answer:
A. POWER CABLES. “For Lighting, Sockets, Motors, Distribution Boards, Distribution
Networks, Transmission Networks … Etc”
a. Indoor Wiring: 300/500V & 450/750V.

b. Low Voltage Cables: Up to 1KV.
c. Medium Voltage Cables: > 1KV ≤ 36KV.
d. High Voltage Cables: > 36KV ≤ 170KV.
e. Extra High Voltage Cables: ≥170KV.
B. TELECOMMUNICATION CABLES. “For Telephones & Communications”
C. SPECIAL CABLES. “For Data & Signals”
a. LAN and Telephone Cables.
i. Data Cable – Cat 5e. “The cable is used for Local Area Computer Networks
mainly in office or business environments”
ii. Data Cable – Cat 6. “The cable is used for Local Area Computer Networks where
performance greater than that available from category 5 specification is required”
iii. Instrumentation Cables. “These cables are used in the chemical and etrochemical
industries for the transmission of analogue and digital signals for measurements
and process control purposes”
b. Coaxial Cables.
i. MATV Cables. ” TV patented coaxial cables for satellite and digital installations”
ii. RG Cables.” Cables used for transmitting and receiving high frequency signals in
radio frequency devices and connections”
iii. PVC Insulated Multipairs. “The cable is used for Indoor installation and
interconnection of Transmission, Telephone, Telegraph and Electronic
equipment”
c. Fire Resistant Cables. “These cables are used in fire fighting alarm systems in
hazardous area where the safety is highly required during fire condition”
d. Fire Alarm Cables. “These cables are used for communication and signaling in fire
alarm systems”
e. Control Cables.” For outdoor and indoor installations in damp and wet locations,
connecting signaling and control units in industry, in railways, in traffic signals, in
thermopower and hydropower stations. They are laid in air, in ducts, in trenches, in steel
support brackets or direct in ground, when well protected”
f. Automotive Wires.” This wire is used in the manufacture of electrical harnesses for cars
and other automotive products”
g. Appliance Cables and Cords.” These cables can be used for domestic premises,
kitchens, cooking, offices and heating appliances or light duties for light portable
appliances provided that the cable does not come into contact with the heating elements”
- 96 -
st
h. Fiber Optic Cables. “Cables are particularly suitable for placing and pulling into cable
conduits and shafts inside buildings and in the building riser between floor distributors”
i. Optical Ground Wire. “These cables suitable for installation as optical ground wire in
powerline installations. The cable acts as a normal ground wire protecting phase wires
from lightning strikes and carries earth fault currents. The cable provides also an optic
path in powerline installations for telecommunication need”
j. Low Smoke Halogen.” Power Cable but Halogen-free cables are increasingly specified
for public buildings and areas where large numbers of people may be present. Such as;
Theaters, hotels, hospitals and closed public places”
k. Submarine Cables. “Power Cable but water blocked can carry power & data”
116) What is the difference between circular & sectoral sections in cables?
Answer:
Circular Sections Sectoral Sections
Shape
Usage LV & MV LV only because of Electrical

sharp edge in MV which causes
high electrical strengths.
Electrical sharp edge Not present. “Good” Present.
Diameter Larger for same C.S.A. “Bad” Smaller for same C.S.A. “Good”
Space of installation More “Bad” Less. “Good”
Cost More “Bad” Less. “Good”
117) Why CU wires are preferable in indoor distribution while Al cables are preferred in electrical transmission?
Answer:
¾ CU wires are preferable in indoor distribution because it is more flexible in bending & branching &
smaller c.s.a for the same current.
¾ Al cables are preferred in electrical transmission because it’s cheaper, straight distances (no large
bending) & causes no problem in its large c.s.a
- 97 -
st
118) What are the standards C.S.A’s for power cables for low, medium & high voltage?
Answer:
Low Voltage Cables Medium Voltage Cables High Voltage Cables

Single Core - mm2 Multi Core - mm2 Single Core - mm2 Multi Core - mm2 Only Single Core - mm2
1.5 1.5
2.5 2.5
4 4
6 6
10 10
16 16
25 25 25 25
35 35 35 35
50 50 50 50
70 70 70 70
95 95 95 95
120 120 120 120
150 150 150 150 150
185 185 185 185 185
240 240 240 240 240
300 300 300 300 300
400 400 400 400
500 500 500 500
630 630 630
800 800 800
1000 1000 1000
1200
1600
2000
2500
119) What is the difference between armoured & unarmoured cables?
Answer:
¾ Armoured Cables are used for outdoor installations in damp & wet locations, where mechanical
damages are expected to occur.
¾ Armoured Cables costs about (10-15%) more than unarmoured cables.
- 98 -
st
120) How can you Convert American Wire Gauge (AWG) to square mm cross sectional area?
Answer:
¾ American Wire Gauge (AWG) is a U.S. standard set of wire conductor sizes. The "gauge" is related to
the diameter of the wire.
¾ The higher the gauge number, the smaller the diameter and the thinner the wire.
¾ Conductors larger than 4/0 AWG are sized in circular mils, beginning with 250,000 circular mils.
¾ Prior to the NEC 1990 edition, a 250,000-circular-mil conductor was labeled 250 MCM. The term
MCM was defined as 1000 circular mils (the first M being the Roman numeral designation for 1000).
Beginning in the 1990 edition, the notation was changed to 250 kcmil to recognize the accepted
convention that k indicates 1000. UL standards and IEEE standards also use the notation kcmil rather
than MCM.
American Wire Gauge Size Equivalent Metric Conductor Size

“AWG” “mm2 ”
# Kcmil Actual Size Equivalent Size
20 - 0.519 0.5-0.75
18 - 0.823 1
16 - 1.31 1.5
14 - 2.08 2.5
12 - 3.31 4
10 - 5.26 6
8 - 8.37 10
6 - 13.3 16
4 - 21.15 25
3 - 26.67 25-35
2 - 33.62 35
1 - 44.21 50
1/0 - 53.49 50-70
2/0 - 67.43 70
3/0 - 85.01 95
4/0 - 107.2 120
- 250 127 120-150
- 300 152 150
- 350 177 185
- 400 203 185-240
- 450 228 240
- 500 253 240-300
- 600 304 300
- 700 354 300-400
- 750 380 400
- 1000 507 500
1250 633 630
1500 760 800
1750 886 800-1000
2000 1013 1000
121) Screening of MV cables is used in earthing. Right or wrong?
Answer:
¾ Right
- 99 -
st
122) How can you convert from NEMA to IEC Enclosure?

Answer:
¾ Converting from NEMA enclosure classifications to IEC enclosure classifications
– NEMA enclosure classifications: are developed by NEMA and used in the U.S./American market.
– Ingress Protection (or Index of Protection) - IP - ratings: are developed by the European
Committee for Electro Technical Standardization (CENELEC) (described IEC/EN 60529), and
specifies the environmental protection and enclosure provided.
– The table below can be used to convert from NEMA Enclosure Types to IEC Enclosure Types:
– Note! NEMA standards meet or exceed IEC standards. The conversion does not work in the
opposite direction.
NEMA Enclosure Types IEC Enclosure Classification Designation
Protected against solid objects up to 50mm, e.g. accidental touch
1 Indoor - General Purpose IP10
by hands.
2 Indoor -Drip proof (limited amounts of falling water ) IP11 by hands. Protection against vertically falling drops of water e.g.
condensation.
Outdoor - Rain tight, Sleet Resistant- (undamaged by
3R IP14 by hands. Protection against water sprayed from all directions,
the formation of ice on the enclosure )
limited ingress permitted.
Protected against dust limited ingress (no harmful deposit).
Outdoor - Dust tight, Rain tight, Sleet tight (Same as
3 IP54 Protection against water sprayed from all directions, limited
3R plus windblown dust)
ingress permitted.
Outdoor - Dust tight, Rain tight, Sleet tight (Same as Protected against dust limited ingress (no harmful deposit).
3S 3R plus windblown dust; external mechanisms remain IP54 Protection against water sprayed from all directions, limited
operable while ice laden) ingress permitted.
Indoor & Outdoor - Watertight, Dust tight, Sleet
Resistant (splashing water, windblown dust, hose-
4 IP56 Protected against dust limited ingress (no harmful deposit).
directed water, undamaged by the formation of ice on
the enclosure)
Indoor & Outdoor - Watertight, Dust tight, Corrosion-
4X IP56 Protected against dust limited ingress (no harmful deposit).
Resistant (Same as 4 plus resists corrosion)
Indoor - Dust tight, Drip-Proof (provide a degree of Protected against dust limited ingress (no harmful deposit).
o
5 protection against settling airborne dust, falling dirt, IP52 Protection against direct sprays of water up to 15 from the
and dripping noncorrosive liquids) vertical.
Indoor & Outdoor - Occasionally Submersible,
Totally protected against dust. Protected against the effect of
6 Watertight, Sleet Resistant (Same as 3R plus entry of IP67
immersion between 15cm and 1m.
water during temporary submersion at a limited depth)
Indoor & Outdoor - Watertight, Sleet Resistant-
Totally protected against dust.
6P Prolonged Submersion (Same as 3R plus entry of water IP67
Protected against the effect of immersion between 15cm and 1m.
during prolonged submersion at a limited depth)
o
12 Indoor - Dust tight and Drip tight- Indoor IP52 Protection against direct sprays of water up to 15 from the
vertical.
o
12K Indoor - Dust tight and Drip tight, with Knockouts IP52 Protection against direct sprays of water up to 15 from the
vertical.
13 Indoor - Oil tight and Dust tight IP54 Protection against water sprayed from all directions, limited
ingress permitted.
- 100 -
st
123) What are the different risks on human that caused by electricity? Explain.
Answer:
¾ All electrical installations produce earth leakage currents. Even small values of these leakage currents
present man risks which can cause serious injuries and damages to the human life and property
¾ A few milliamps suffice to seriously harm the human body. The risk of the person not letting go,
breathing arrest or cardiac fibrillation increases proportionally to the time the person is exposed to the
electric current.
¾ Different Risks that caused by electricity:
1. Direct contact: with a live conductor.
2. Indirect contact: if the person touches a conductive parts that are normally
not live, but may become live by accident due to failure of insulation of a
device or conductor.
3. Fire hazard: 40 % of fire accidents in industrial & domestic buildings are the result of an electrical fault, which
happens due to one of two main causes.
3.1. Deterioration of cable insulation due to ageing or overloading and the presence of
dust and humidity create electrical arcs & arc tracking. Very little energy is
sufficient to ignite a fire; an insulation fault current ≥ 300 mA represents a real risk
of fire.
3.2. Incorrectly set protective devices or incorrectly calculated fault loop impedances
lead to excessive temperature rise with overloads or short circuits.
4. Destruction of loads: Electrical devices deteriorate over time and may present insulation
faults. A minor insulation fault can rapidly develop and turn into a short circuit causing
major damage and even the total destruction of the load.
- 101 -
st
124) What are the different tripping characteristics and rated currents for MCB’s?
Answer:
Tripping characteristics and rated currents
¾ B-, C- and D-Characteristic:

The new characteristics acc. EN 60 898 are for line protection. They all have the same thermal
settings and differ only in their magnetic tripping values.
The higher magnetic settings of the C- or D-characteristics are for applications with start or high
inrush-currents.
Thermal Tripping Electromagnetic Tripping
B-Characteristic 1.13…..1.45 x In 3…...5 x In
C-Characteristic 1.13…..1.45 x In 5…..10 x In
D-Characteristic 1.13…..1.45 x In 10…..20 x In
¾ K-Characteristic:
For cable and appliance protection.
Rated currents 0.5 to 63 A. Motor protection can be achieved by the selection of the M.C.B. with the
correct rated current corresponding to the motor data. The electro-magnetic trip is set in such a way
that the motor starting current does not lead to tripping.
Due to the higher magnetic non tripping current, in circuits with incandescent lamp groups, mains
parallel operated fluorescent lamps or other discharge lamps, the conductor cross-section to be
protected can be more economically utilized as compared to a M.C.B. of the same rated current in
tripping characteristic B.
¾ Z-Characteristic:
For protection of semiconductor devices and voltage transformer circuits.
- 102 -
st
125) Determine how many 6mm2 cu single stranded conductors are permitted in a trade size 1¼ rigid metal
conduit (RMC)?
Answer:
◊ As per NEC Code
◊ Table 1 permits 40 percent fill for over two conductors.
◊ From Table 4, 40 percent fill for trade size 11⁄4 RMC is 394mm2, and from cables catalogue the
diameter of a 6mm2 cu single stranded conductor is 4.7 mm. therefore cross-sectional area is πr2 =
3.14(4.7/2) 2 = 17.36 mm2 the number of conductors permitted is calculated as follows:
394mm 2
= 22.7conductors
17.36mm 2 per − conductor
◊ Based on the maximum allowable fill of 40 percent from Table 1, the number of 6mm2 cu single
stranded conductors in trade size 1¼ RMC cannot exceed 22.
Table 4
- 103 -
st
126) Determine the minimum size rigid metal conduit (RMC) allowed for the 9 mixed conductor sizes and types
described as followed:
• 3 single stranded wires cu of 4mm2 each
• 3 single stranded wires cu of 10mm2 each
• 3 single stranded wires al of 16mm2 each
Answer:
Wire Size Diameter of each wire c.s.a. of Each Wire Total c.s.a of each
Quantity
and Type from catalogue (mm) (mm2) type (mm2)
3 CU - 10mm2 7 38.5 115.5
2
3 CU - 10mm 8.9 62.2 186.6
2
3 AL - 10mm 9.9 77 231
Total c.s.a for all types (mm2) 533.1
◊ As per NEC Code
◊ The ‘‘Over 2 Wires’’ column in Table 4 indicates that 40 percent of a trade size 1½ RMC is 533
mm2. Therefore, trade size 1½is the minimum size RMC allowed for this combination of 9
conductors.
Table 4
- 104 -
st
127) A 200-ampere feeder is routed in various wiring methods (EMT) conduit |& (RMC) conduit from the main
switchboard in one building to a distribution panel board in another building. The circuit consists of muli-
core cable 4x70 + 25 mm2 CU - XLPE/PVC unarmoured. Select the proper trade size for the various types
of conduit and tubing to be used for the feeder.
Answer:
◊ All the raceways for this example require conduit fill to be calculated according to Table 1 in
Chapter 9 in NEC Code which permits conduit fill to a maximum of 40 percent where more than two
conductors are installed in the conduit or tubing.
Diameter of each wire from

Wire Size and Type C.S.A. of Each Wire (mm2)
catalogue (mm)
2
4x70 mm CU - XLPE/PVC 31.4 774
2
25 mm CU - XLPE/PVC 11 95
Total c.s.a for all types (mm2) 869
◊ The ‘‘Over 2 Wires’’ column in Table 4 indicates that 40 percent of a trade size 2½ EMT is 1513
mm2. Therefore, trade size 2½is the minimum size EMT allowed for this feeder.
◊ The ‘‘Over 2 Wires’’ column in Table 4 indicates that 40 percent of a trade size 2 RMC is 879 mm2.
Therefore, trade size 2 is the minimum size RMC allowed for this feeder.
- 105 -
st
128) Insulation systems are rated by standard NEMA classifications according to maximum allowable operating
temperatures. Explain.
Answer:
◊ Insulation systems are rated by standard NEMA (National Electrical Manufacturers Association)
classifications according to maximum allowable operating temperatures as follows:
Allowable
Allowable
Temperature Rise at
Maximum Operation Temperature Temperature Rise
full load
Temperature Allowed 1.15 service factor
1.0 service factor
Tolerance Class 1) motor 1)
motor
o o o o
C F C C
A 105 221 60 70
B 130 266 80 90
F 155 311 105 115
H 180 356 125 -
◊ T(oF) = [T(oC)](9/5) + 32
1)
◊ Allowable temperature rises are based upon a reference ambient temperature of 40oC. Operation
temperature is reference temperature + allowable temperature rise + allowance for "hot spot"
winding. Example Temperature Tolerance Class F: 40oC + 105oC + 10oC = 155oC.
◊ In general a motor should not operate on temperatures above the maximums. Each 10oC rise above
the ratings may reduce the motor's lifetime by one half.
◊ Temperature Tolerance Class B is the most common insulation class used on most 60 cycle US
motors. Temperature Tolerance Class F is the most common for international and 50 cycle motors.
129) Does the voltage supply fluctuation affects the lamps? How?
Answer:
The required voltage supply of a lamp must be maintained in order to achieve the rated lumen output and
lamp life. When fluctuation occurs, say 1 volt, the luminous flux of a light source decreases by about 5
lumens. Likewise, the lamp life is shortened when this is not prevented.
- 106 -
st
130) What are the capacities of PVC conduits for different cable sizes (single & multi-core)?
Answer:
CAPACITY OF PVC CONDUITS SINGLE CORE CABLES(1C PVC)

CONDUIT SIZE (MM)
CABLE SIZE(mm2)
20 25 32 40 50 63 75 90 110
1.5 10 16 28
2.5 6 10 18
4 4 6 12 22
6 3 5 8 16
10 2 3 6 10 15
16 1 2 4 8 12
25 1 1 3 5 8
35 1 1 2 3 6
50 1 1 2 4 6
70 1 1 2 3 5
95 1 1 3 4
120 1 1 2 3 4
150 1 1 3 3
185 1 1 2 3
240 1 1 1 2 4
300 1 1 2 3 5
400 1 1 1 2 4
CAPACITY OF PVC CONDUITS MULTI CORE CABLES(4C-XLPE/PVC)

CONDUIT SIZE (MM)
CABLE SIZE(mm2)
20 25 32 40 50 63 75 90 110
2.5 1 1 2 4 6
4 1 1 3 5
6 1 1 2 4
10 1 1 1 3
16 1 1 2
25 1 1 1
35 1 1 1 3
50 1 1 2
70 1 1 1 2
95 1 1 1
120 1 1 1 2
150 1 1 1
185 1 1 1
240 1 1
- 107 -
st
131) What are the C.B. ratings & short circuit capacities in American & European standard?
Answer:
C.B Ratings “Ampere” C.B Short Circuit Capacities “KA”

American (NEC) European (IEC) American (NEC) European (IEC)
AT AF AT AF 5
6 63 6
10 60 10 63 8
15 60 10
16 63 14
20 60 20 63
15
25 60 25 63
30 60 16
32 63 22
35 60 25
40 60 40 63 30
45 60 35
50 60 50 63 40
60 60
50
63 63
70 100
65 65
80 100 80 100 70
90 100 85
100 100 100 100 100 100
110 250 120
125 250 125 125 200
150 250
160 250 160 160
175 250
200 250
225 250
250 250 250 250
300 400
400 400 400 400
600 600
630 630
800 800 800 800
1000 1200 1000 1000
1200 1200
1250 1250
1600 1600 1600 1600
2000 2000 2000 2000
2500 2500 2500 2500
3200 3200
4000 4000 4000 4000
5000 6300 5000 6300
6000 6000
6300 6300
- 108 -
st
132) What are the most available sizes for disconnecting switches?
Answer:
Disconnecting Switches
Safety Switches “Ampere” Fuse Size “Ampere”
30 15, 20, 25, 30
60 35, 40, 45, 50, 60
100 70, 80, 90, 100
200 110, 125, 150, 175, 200
400 225, 250, 300, 350, 400
600 450, 500, 600
800 700, 800
1200 1000, 1200
1600 1600
2000 2000
2500 2500
3000 3000
4000 4000
5000 5000
6000 6000
133) Does the way of mounting, positioning and orientation of a lamp (Burning Position) affect the burning?
Answer:
There are light sources which can be operated in any position (Universal Burning). There are those
which have specific limlts. This characterisitic must be given proper attention to avoid system failure and
costly maintenance. The tolerances provided by the manufacturers must not be exceeded. In determining
lumiaires mounting position and orientation, this information is taken into accounrt.
134) What is the control gear of a luminaire?

Answer:
It is essential to provide suitable to operate discharge lamps. These lamps have electrical requirements to ensure
efficient operation, as designed, which are provided by these control gears.
I. Ballast:
• A major component of a luminare which control and limit electrical energy necessary to operate discharge
lamps is a series impedance, known as ballast. Its major function is to:
a. Pre-heat the electrodes of a discharge lamp.
b. Supply controlled surge of high voltage and current necessary to initiate an arc between lamp
electrodes and sustain it.
• Fluorescent lamps requiring a starter are operated by a normal power factor ballast or choke. To improve
the power factor, a capacitor is connected across the AC Supply. Ballast manufacturers specify the P.F. of
the ballast to determine the capacitor’s value enough to attain a 0.85 lagging circuit.
- 109 -
st
• Other fluorescent lamps are designed to be used with a rapid start ballast whish have a heater winding
unit. Thus, eliminating the use of a starter and ensure continuous current to the lamps. The lamp starts
immediately reducing flickers. Rapid start ballasts are of High Power Factor (P.F = 0.95) and reliable in
starting lamps in cold weather operation (-20◦F)
• A more efficient, lightweight and wider voltage range Electronic Ballast is widely used today. These
ballasts are favored by many because of the advantages which are:
a. Immediate start.
b. No stroboscopic effects (flicker free).
c. Reduced electricity consumption.
d. High power factor.
e. No humming sound.
f. No magnetic fields.
g. Automatically shuts-off defective lamps.
h. Suitable for energy saving lamps.
i. Reduced temperature generation.
j. AC and DC operation.
• To control light output of fluorescent lamps from say 100% down to 30% dimming ballast is used with
dimmer switch.
• For HID lamps, the ballast (core and coil) may be of open type or encased and potted depending on the
luminaire construction and intended application.
II. Starters:
• The basic function of a starter is the necessary pre-heating of the electrodes of a fluorescent lamp with a
limited current flow from the fluorescent lamp ballast. The starting switch will open automatically once
the electrodes reach the required temperature to emit electrons. With the application of starting high
voltage from the ballast, the starting is completed resulting to a fully lighted lamp.
• Today, these starters may be equipped with reset buttons which automatically cut-off failing lamps. Other
starters have cold weather operation advantage. Electronic starters are widely used as well.
III. Ignitors:
• Voltage pulses which are higher than the mains supply are necessary to start discharge lamps. Ignitors
provide required high voltage pulser until the lamp is ignited. Some high pressure sodium lamps have
built-in ignitors which may be operated with high pressure mercury ballast.
• A high pressure mercury lamp need not be assisted by these devices during ignition.
IV. Emergency Back:
• Luminaires may be equipped with an emergency pack comprising of converter/charger and NICD
batteries. The system can be maintained, non- maintained or sustained depending on the requirement.
During power failure of the mains supply the system is automatically switch-on to keep the lamp lighted
for 1.5 or 3.0 hours. Charging starts once the mains supply is restored.
V. Capacitor:
• To improve the power factor of the circuit, a P.F capacitor is connected across the AC supply. The value
of which is dependent on the wattage and voltage rating from 8 µF to 25 µF
• Another type of capacitor is used to suppress radio interference which is connected across the AC supply
and usually of low capacitance value 0.1 µF to 0.5 µF
- 110 -
st
135) What are the methods of cooling of transformers? What does ONAN refers to?
Answer:
• Methods of cooling are symbol with 4 letters. The first 2 letters refers to the type of fluid used & way of
flow in cooling the transformer internal winding. The other 2 letters refers to the type of fluid used & way of
flow in cooling the transformer outer case.
Type of Fluid Way of Flow of the Fluid

Letter Description Letter Description
O Oil
N Natural
A Air
L Lubricant B Air Blast
G Gas
F Forced (using pumps)
W Water
Example:
ONAN: Oil Forced Air Natural (transformer internal wiring is cooled using forced oil by pump &
the transformer outer case is naturally cooled by air.
136) What is the accepted percentage of loading a transformer? Can we increase the percentage of loading the
transformer more than 100%? Explain.
Answer:
The accepted percentage of loading a transformer is 80% for the 24 hours.
We can increase the percentage of loading the transformer more than 100% but not all the time (24 hours). This
percentage loading increase depends on:
• The type of transformer (dry type can be loaded more than oil type for the same conditions).
• Time of loading (if the time of loading increase the ability of transformer to withstand more load
will decrease & vice versa).
• Percentage of loading (if the percentage of loading increase the withstand time of transformer will
decrease & vice versa).
• Ambient temperature (if the ambient temperature in the site is less than the ambient temperature that
transformer is designed for its rated power so we can increase percentage load for
more time & vice versa)
The transformer manufacturer gives data on the percentage of loading increase & time of loading & temperature.
137) What is the problem of unloading the transformer?

Answer:
• The transformer must not be unloaded for large duration, since the transformer will be exposed to humidity.
Under such conditions the transformer must be loaded, to remove the humidity formed inside the insulating
materials.
• In highly polluted area, the turns and core are completely enclosed inside a sealed tank to protect the
transformer.
- 111 -
st
138) State the advantages of using dry type transformers over oil immersed type?
Answer:
¾ Advantages of dry type transformers over oil immersed type:-
1. The cheapest fire proof transformers.
2. Can be easily installed in buildings with complete security.
3. Need less maintenance and cyclic testing other than fluid immersed transformers.
4. Need no accessories, such as valves, breather and measuring devices of fluid immersed transformers.
5. Light, so can be easily installed on the roof of the building.
6. Completely secure from the view of fire, environment pollution.
7. Can with stand an acceptable amount of overload.
8. High efficiency with good voltage regulation and noiseless.
9. Large Reliability index, and nowadays used in the form of complete substation inside a metallic
enclosure having cable-connecting box in both the H.V. & L.V. sides.
139) What is the information necessary while selecting the transformer protection system?
Answer:
¾ The following information is necessary while selecting the protection system.
1. Particulars of Transformer
a. KVA.
b. Voltage ratio.
c. Connections of windings.
d. Percentage reactance.
e. Neutral point earthing.
f. Value of system earthing resistance.
g. Whether indoor or outdoor, dry or oil filled.
h. With or without conservator.
2. Fault level at Power Transformer Terminals.
3. Network Diagram-Showing Position of Transformer.
140) What are the advantages of selecting outdoor distribution transformers kiosks?
Answer:
¾ Advantages of outdoor transformer kiosks selection:-
1. Compact dimensions and low installation space (i.e. it can be easily located close to load centers.).
2. Trouble free operations with energy supply to the customers without interruption.
3. Personal safety.
4. Minimum maintenance.
5. Simple installation.
6. Reliability.
¾ So, the location of the kiosk should be selected such that the transportation & installation and maintenance
are easily done.
- 112 -
st
141) What are the main parts of transformer compartment (Kiosk)?
Answer:
¾ Outdoor Distribution Transformers Kiosk

¾ General Description:-
1. Roof mounted lifting eyes.
2. Double roof with neutral ventilation.
3. Ventilation louvers.
4. MV compartment door.
5. Heavy-duty door hinges.
6. Earth fault indicator.
7. Transformer compartment door.
8. LV compartment door.
9. Opening handle.
10. Base for Kiosk.
⇒ The housing is assembled as an integrated

unit from sheet steel built on heavy channel
steel skid frame to withstand the weight of
the kiosk with its components.
⇒ To reduce the equipments ambient temperature and

prevent heating through the roof due to sun radiation,
the roof is made of double layers with foam
installation in between, the upper layer is made of a solid Alu-Zinc alloy to give the advantage of corrosion resisting in
different climates.
⇒ The MV and LV compartments are arranged at both sides of the substations with the transformer
compartment in between.
⇒ The MV and LV compartments are provided with double doors. All doors are equipped with stainless
steel rigid hinges and rigid locking devices. Also all doors are equipped with rubber gaskets to keep a
high degree of protection.
¾ Dimensions in (mm):
Kiosk Height Width Length Weight without

Description (mm) (mm) (mm) Transformer
Rating up to 500 KVA
2050 1680 3200 = 2.4 ton
Voltage 12 KV
Rating up to 1000 KVA
2370 2000 4110 = 3 ton
Voltage 12 KV
- 113 -
st
¾ Medium Voltage Compartment

⇒ It comprises a Ring Main Unit (RMU) including up to three
cable load break switches and one automatic fused load break
switch for transformer. All circuit arrangement may be
provided with earth fault indicators.
¾ Transformer Compartment (Kiosk)

⇒ The transformer compartment is designed for a 3- phase oil
immersed power transformer with power up to 2000 KVA at
rated MV 12KV and up to 1000KVA at rated MV 24KV.
⇒ The transformer is connected to the LV distribution board via copper

busbars or cables based on the transformer capacity, and to the MV
equipment via XLPE screened cables, each of the XLPE cables is
equipped with two cable end box for three single phase connection.
⇒ For service purposes, sufficient space is provided to the personnel to

go in and work freely, necessary opening are provided for air entry
and exhaust, so that the temp. Rise is kept to a minimum.
⇒ In substations up to 500 KVA / 12 KV the transformer could be

placed into its compartment either from dismarrtable or from the
longitudinal side door. For above rating it is preferable to place
the trans. from the roof side.
⇒ Dust-rejecting ventilating louvers, are situated at both ends of the

transformer compartment and dimensioned for self - cooling.
⇒ The lower part of this compartment functions as an oil collection pit

with a sufficient volume to contain all the transformer oil.
⇒ Two doors in both longitudinal sides of the transformer compartment

provide maximum flexibility to inspect and maintain the transformer.
¾ Low Voltage Compartment
⇒ The LV compartment contains the LV distribution board. It is built on

a steel frame mounted on the compartment floor and fixed to the back
wall of the compartment.
⇒ The main incoming apparatus is usually moulded case automatic

air circuit breaker (open frame type is also available) complete
with overload and short circuit protection with rating up to
3200A. The incoming unit is equipped with voltmeter and
selector switch, 3 ammeters, 3 signal lamps and space for
optional K.W.H meter.
- 114 -
st
⇒ There are 3 basic types available for providing the outgoing feeders of the LV distribution
board:
1. Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
As an example for the capacity of the 500 KVA/12KV substations, the number of the
outgoing feeders with moulded case circuit breakers (MCCB) may be one of the following:
9 Nine frame size 250A MCCB.

9 Six frame size 400A MCCB.
9 Four frame size 630A MCCB.
2. Fused Load Break Switches
For the same example of the 500KVA/12KV substation, the number of the outgoing
feeders using fused load break switches (SF – Switch Fuse) may be one of the following:
9 Six (SF) up to 400A.

9 Four (SF) up to 630A.
3. 3PH HRC Fuses
For the same example of the 500KVA substation, the number of the outgoing feeders
with high rupturing capacity fuses may be one of the following:
9 Four with H.R.C. fuses up to 630A.

9 Five with H.R.C. fuses up to 250A.
As an example for a substation 1000KVA with MV side 24KV or 2000KVA with

MV side 12KV, the outgoing feeders with moulded case circuit breakers may be one of the
following:
9 Six frame size MCCB1250A.

9 Eight frame size MCCB 400A.
9 Twelve frame size MCCB 250A.
⇒ It is available to provide the LV compartment optionally with:
a) K.W.H. & K.V.A.R.H. for incoming feeder.

b) Control equipment for street lighting line.
c) Other specifications for the L.V compartment could be supplied but with special dimensions.
- 115 -
st
142) Using given legend. Draw the wiring diagram for:

• 1 Way – 1 Gang Switch.
• 1 Way – 2 Gang Switch.
• Way (3Way) – 1 Gang Switch.
• Way (3Way) – 2 Gang Switch.
• Intermediate (4Way) – 1 Gang Switch.
Answer:
- 116 -
st
143) Discuss the power cable construction?
Answer:
¾ The general construction of the cable is:
1. Core
All cables have one central core or a number of strand copper or aluminum conductors having
highest conductivity.
2. Insulation
The different types of insulators used to insulate the conductors are paper, varnished cambric
for low voltages. But mostly impregnated paper is used which is an excellent insulating material.
3. Metallic Sheath
A metallic sheath is provided over the insulation so as to prevent the entry of moisture into the
insulating material. The metallic sheath is usually of lead and in case of cables having a copper
conductor sometimes aluminum is used for providing metallic sheath. The metallic layer provided
must be electrically continuous, thus, the sheath used not only provide water proof protection, but
also provides an electrical earth shield the potential of the conductor is referred to this.
4. Bedding
Over the metallic sheath comes a layer of bedding that consists of paper tape, the function of
providing the bedding is to protect the metallic sheath form mechanical injury from the armouring.
5. Armoring
Armoring is provided to avoid mechanical injury to the cable and it consists of one or two
layers of galvanized steel wires
6. Serving
Over armoring, a layer of fibrous material is again provided which is similar to that of the
bedding but is called serving
- 117 -
st
144) What are the different distribution losses in industrial facilities?
Answer:
There is a dramatic difference in an AC power distribution system between the simple DC resistance
values of the various conducting elements, and the actual apparent AC resistance, under heavy current load, of
these same elements. Motors, lighting systems, wiring, mechanical terminations, distribution panels, protective
devices, transformers, switchgear, and all end of circuit equipment experience a variety of resistance increasing
inefficiencies that combine to create an average wattage loss in a typical industrial facility of from 10% to 25%
of total demanded power. Identifying and calculating the sum of the individual contributing loss components is
a challenging engineering specialty, requiring extensive experience and knowledge of all the factors impacting
the operating efficiencies of each of these components.
The following list is a simplified overview of several of the more important loss factors in an industrial
facility, including a broad range estimate of reasonable loss values attributable to each stated effect. Note that
all of these are current dependent, and can be readily mitigated by any technique that reduces facility current
load.
1. Hysteresis Losses:
9 Hysteresis loss is a heat loss caused by the magnetic properties of the armature in an AC motor.
When an armature core is in a magnetic field, the magnetic particles of the core tend to line up with
the magnetic field. When the armature core is rotating, its magnetic field keeps changing direction.
The continuous movement of the magnetic particles, as they try to align themselves with the
magnetic field, produces molecular friction. This, in turn, produces heat. This heat is transmitted to
the armature windings. The heat causes armature resistances to increase.
9 Typical hysteresis losses as a percentage of building demand: 2% to 5%.
2. Skin Effect Losses:

9 The apparent resistance of a conductor is always higher for AC than for DC. The alternating
magnetic flux created by an alternating current interacts with the conductor, generating a back EMF
which tends to reduce the current in the conductor. The center portions of the conductor are affected
by the greatest number of lines of force, the number of line linkages decreasing as the edges are
approached. The electromotive force produced in this way by self-inductance varies both in
magnitude and phase through the. Cross-section of the conductor, being larger in the center and
smaller towards the outside. The current therefore tends to crowd into those parts of the conductor in
which the opposing EMF is a minimum; that is, into the skin of a circular conductor or the edges of a
flat strip, producing what is known as 'skin' or 'edge' effect. The resulting non uniform current
density has the effect of increasing the apparent resistance of the conductor and gives rise to
increased losses.
9 Harmonic loading increases skin effect losses by the square of the increase in frequency above
nominal line frequency, and so is responsible for a substantial lost wattage in any facility with large
populations of nonlinear equipment loads, such as DC drives, rectifiers, induction heating or other
arcing or switching power supply devices.
9 Typical skin effect losses as a percentage of building demand: 2% to 8%.
- 118 -
st
3. Proximity Effect Losses:
9 Proximity effect is a property existing when conductors are close together, particularly in low
voltage equipment, where a further distortion of current density results from the interaction of the
magnetic fields of other conductors.
9 In the same way as an EMF may be induced in a conductor by its own magnetic flux, so may the
magnetic flux of one conductor produce an EMF in any other conductor sufficiently near for the
effect to be significant.
9 If two such conductors carry currents in opposite directions, their electromagnetic fields are opposed
to one another and tend to force one another apart. This results in a decrease of flux linkages around
the adjacent parts of the conductors and an increase in the more remote parts, which leads to a
concentration of current in the adjacent parts where the opposing EMF is a minimum. If the currents
in the conductors are in the same direction the action is reversed and they tend to crowd into the
more remote parts of the conductors.
9 This effect, known as the 'proximity effect' (or 'shape effect'), increases the apparent AC resistance.
If the conductors are arranged edgewise to one another proximity effect increases. In most cases the
proximity effect also tends to increase the stresses set up under short-circuit conditions and this may
therefore have to be taken into account.
9 Typical proximity effect losses as a percentage of building demand: 1.5% to 3%.
4. Line Losses:
9 In addition to I2R losses and dielectric losses, cables have other losses such as skin-affect and
proximity-effect developed by magnetic induction. For single conductor cables, however, where
conductors are not operating close to each other, proximity effect is negligible. Skin-effect loss is
caused by the reversing magnetic field, about the cable, which tends to concentrate the current
toward the periphery of the conductor. This affect then reduces the effective carrying capacity of a
conductor in its central portions. Proximity-effect loss is caused by the opposing force of magnetic
fields set up by neighboring conductors. This displaces the points of maximum reactance to a
maximum distance from each other, resulting in maximum current density at the nearest surfaces of
the two conductors. Operating together in a typical industrial conduit enclosed distribution system;
these various loss factors can sufficiently increase the building wiring's apparent AC resistance to
more than an order of magnitude above nominal DC resistance values. Thus, typical I2R wiring
losses are often far greater than simple chart-based values.
9 With the above, recall that I2R losses occur in ALL distribution system conducting components, not
only the wire.
9 Typical line losses as a percentage of building demand: 1 % to 3.
- 119 -
st
5. Eddy-Current Losses:
9 With any electrical system component comprising an iron or steel frame and an electrical coil, flux
will flow in the steel as a result of the alternating current in the coil. The flux in the steel will itself
induce an EMF in the material following the basic laws of induction. Since the material is essentially
an electrical circuit closed on itself, the induced EMF will cause a circulating electrical current
called an eddy-current. Its value is dependent on the value of EMF and on the resistivity of the path
of current. As in any other electrical circuit the power loss is the product of the square of the current
times the resistance. In a similar manner to hysteresis losses, the eddy-current loss manifests itself as
heat, contributing to the maximum operating temperature limit of the device.
9 Eddy current losses occur in protective circuit breakers, lighting ballasts, power supply transformers,
magnetic motor starters, voltage reducing or isolation transformers, current overload relays, control
contactors and relays, all motor windings, and even building wiring, when the wiring is in circular
proximity to steel or iron structures, such as electrical enclosures, distribution panels, or terminal or
distribution blocks.
9 Typical eddy current losses as a percentage of building demand: 1.5% to 4%.
145) When shall we use circuit breaker + back-up fuse as switchgear combinations?
Answer:
9 The prospective short circuit current level may exceed the rated
breaking capacity of the circuit breaker installed, if a back up
fuse is connected on the line side of the breaker. To ensure that
the fuses and the circuit breaker will operate together in such a
way, that the breaker and its contacts are not damaged during the
interruption of large short circuit currents.
9 The fuses assist the C.B in the interruption of currents which
marginally exceeds its breaking capacity. For higher short-circuit
currents, the fuse performs the interruption alone, and the
breaker opens under no-load.
9 A careful matching of the properties of the protective elements is
required. Figure shows the time current characteristics curve of
the fuses lies a sufficient distance “X” above the tripping curve
of thermally delayed overload release. The breaker alone is
responsible for overload protection.
- 120 -
st
146) What are the different types of luminaries? Give brief discussion for each type.
Answer:
1. Decorative:
A general lighting or accent lighting, decorative luminaries are designed to satisfy the aesthetic need
of an interior. In most cases the luminaire from as an integral part of the architecture.
The finishing of this type of luminaries usually matches or blends well with the furnitures or
finishing of an interior. The shape of the luminaire is irregular, linear or curved.
Light sources employed vary from the incandescent candle lamp to linear HID lamp. With the
availability of energy saving compact flourcsent lamps, compact HID lamps and efficient optical
system decorative luminaries construction are compact and aesthetically pleasing.
2. Commercial:
These are the most common type of luminaries used in offices, shops, supermarkets, etc., from a
simple batten to a modular, multi-lamp, equipped with reflector and light controller.
The light sources employed are usually tubular fluorescent lamps and energy saving compact
fluorescent lamps. The size of the housing depends on the number of light source to be employed
and control the gears.
The light from a bare lamp need to be re-directed and shielded in order to reduce the luminance of
the luminaire in directions where glares probable. A reflector is used to direct the light where needed
most. The control of light with a highly polished (mirror) reflector is more effective than a white
enameled shell sheet.
This control of light is further improved by using diffusers and louvers of various kinds. The
shielding of the lamps from a direct view reduces the glare to be experienced. With these light
controllers a wide range of light distribution will help the lighting designers to select the effect that
will satisfy the objective. For example, a mirror double- parabolic louver is preferred in a working
interior where VDU screens are present to avoid reflected glare. The light distribution it provides is
within the desirable cut-off angle.
Commercial luminaries may be mounted in so many different ways. Except for he type intended to
be recessed on the suspended ceiling system, most of the types can be suspended (rod, wire or
chain), surface mounted and bracket mounted.
Protection class (IP) of these luminaries is usually, IP20. Some types intended for washrooms,
stairways and other areas where dust and water may present, IP23 or IP44.
3. Industrial:
In industrial lighting applications, the use of fluorescent fixture is still preferred. However, due to
the environmental conditions of the working space, other materials and construction of a lumiaire is
needed.
Industrial fluorescent luminaries are usually made of materials that could withstand an environment
where dust, corrosion and fumes may be present. Reflectors are widely used, but in some
applications bowl diffusers (gasketed) are proffered. Luminaires protection class varies from IP23 to
IP67 depending on area of use.
Mounting may be on surface, suspended (rod, wire or chain) and brackets.
Applications where fluorescent lamps are no longer practical to use, low and high bay luminaries
employing HID lamps will provide the lighting. For the same illumination level, fewer lighting
points will be needed; therefore, cost of installation and maintenance will be less.
- 121 -
st
The reflectors and refractors used for these luminaries are designed for specific mounting limits.
Most low bay luminaries are recommended for a mounting height up to 6 meters while high bays are
used for above 6 meters.
Where flammable gasses and vapors are present, occasionally or for a long period, the area is
classified “hazardous”. Thus, luminaries to be provided must be safe to operate. Similarly, a room
with presence of easily ignitable fiber area. In addition to the usual classification requirements of an
industrial luminaire, this type designed for hazardous areas has to be tested and certified by testing
laboratories.
Luminaries for hazardous areas as in petrochemical plants, chemical laboratories, oil platforms, etc.
are of higher degree of protection compared to other types, usually IP57 or IP67.
Aside from the high IP class, the luminaire is labeled according to the explosion category,
temperature class and area of use (Zone or Class and Division). The electrical components are tested
and certified confirming the protection from excessive heat, areas and sparks. The luminaries
maximum surface temperature (T class) as marked must be less than the ignition temperature of the
gases present where it will be installed.
Some luminaries are robust and made of cast iron aluminum alloy or heavy gauge steel sheets
materials and designed to withstand and suppress internal explosion. The maximum surface
temperature of these luminaries is also used as basis of applicability. The cover is usually hard,
shock resistant tempered glass and tightly sealed to the corrosion resistant body.
A wide range of lamp types are used in these luminaries except for low pressure sodium.
4. Exit an Emergency:
Safety is the primary objective in providing egress lighting especially in public buildings. The
occupants will find it difficult to reach a door or stairway in total darkness. In the absence of normal
power supply, temporarily or for a long period, an alternative source must be available. The supply
from a control battery or stand by generator is common. Today, however, self contained emergency
system is becoming more practical (for short periods).
In practice, there are three systems which are employed as part of the lighting system, namely;
o Maintained: “A lamp is operating during normal supply and will be lighted,
instantly, in case of power failure”.
o Non Maintained: “A lamp is lighted when the normal supply fails”.
o Sustained: “Two lamps are employed: one is operating during normal supply, the
other during power failure”.
A self contained emergency luminaire has its battery pack (NICD) and charger/inverter units in the
luminaire housing. Usually, the duration of the emergency pack is 1.5 hours or 3 hours. There are
requirements, however, for a longer duration.
Exit and other directional luminaries oftentimes are equipped with these emergency units. These
luminaries are installed on the wall or ceiling leading to the exit points or stairways. The texts and
symbols are usually bold and in red or green color.
- 122 -
st
5. Flood lights:
The materials and construction of floodlights depend on the light source to be employed. A PAR
amp, for example, will require a lamp holder which is protected from penetration of water. The unit
can be installed on the surface or with built-in spike. In some applications, buried floodlights made
of stainless steel with heat toughened glass are preferred.
Floodlights intended for area lighting, security lighting, sports and the like to be equipped with HID
lamps are constructed with the housing, usually, die-cast aluminum with the lamp holder, optical
assembly covered wit tempered glass and mounting unit. Most types are designed to have an
integrated control gear box made of the same materials; others are intended to have separately
mounted control gear.
There are floodlights which are equipped with graduated scale for orientation and aiming purposes
especially in sports lighting application. Internal or external glare control assembly is standard
accessories for some floodlight.
The mounting unit is usually, a bracket with mounting holes and slip filter, on some. The windage
area and weight of these luminaries are vital data to design the mounting structure. Example: pole
and mast.
6. Road and Tunnel Lighting Luminaires:
The optical assembly and control gears of these road lighting luminaries may be together in one or in
separate housing made of aluminum pressed, die-cast or extruded. A tunnel luminaire is usually in
one piece housing. The light sources which are widely used in these luminaries are mercury vapor,
metal halide, low pressure sodium and high pressure sodium lamps. For tunnel luminaries,
fluorescent lamps are also employed.
The reflectors are of high purity anodized aluminum to provide a high degree of light control. The
materials of commonly used diffusers are borosilicate glass wit prismatic pattern, clear
polycarbonate and high thermal and impact resistant lens. Tunnel luminaries equipped with
asymmetrical reflector and frosted glass are common as well.
The mounting on lighting poles of these luminaries could either be top mount or side entry (poles
with arm). Relamping and minor trouble shooting can be done on these luminaries mounted on the
pole since the covers and diffusers are hinged and secured to the housing.
A tunnel luminaire may be installed directly on a surface using galvanized bracket or on the
mounting rails. There are installations where the luminaries are flush mounted on the concrete.
7. Bollards, Post Top Mounted and Wall Mounted Luminaires.
The design of these luminaries varies in shape, color and mounting system. The most widely used
housing material is aluminum. As other types, efficient optical system is a major concern in the
selection of these luminaries. Reflector and refractor designs vary in shape and finish to achieve the
desired light distribution. Intended mounting method is also a factor in the final design of these
luminaries.
Most of these luminaries, today are designed to satisfy architectural considerations. For example, the
shape and finish of a bollard head matches the type intended for wall and ceiling mounted
luminaries.
Light sources employed are incandescent, compact fluorescent and HID.
- 123 -
st
147) What specifications must be applied in cable insulation?
Answer:
¾ The following specifications must be applied in cable insulation:
1. High specific resistance.

2. High dielectric strength.
3. It should be tough and flexible.
4. Capable of standing high temperatures without failure.
5. It should be non-flammable.
6. It should not be exposed to acids or alkalis.
7. It should be capable of withstanding high rupturing voltages.
148) What are the types of insulations that can be used for cables?
Answer:
¾ The following are the chief types of insulation groups that can be used:
1. Rubber.
2. Cross Linked Polyethylene (XLPE).
3. Polyvinyl chloride (PVC).
4. Fibrous material.
5. Silk, cotton, enamel.
149) What are the main functions of luminaire?
Answer:
¾ The functions to which the design of a luminaire are based are as follows:
• To efficiently control and re-direct the light emitted by a light source.
• To protect and provide support for the light source, necessary control gears and other components.
• To adequately absorb and dissipate heat emitted from the light source and control gears.
¾ Other requirements considered vital in luminaire design imcludes:
• Ease in maintenance
• Appearance and finishings.
• Cost effectiveness.
¾ A luminaire may have optional features to suit the need of a lighting system. It may be equipped
with universal mounting accessories, photocell, through-wiring and other electrical or optical
systems.
- 124 -
st
150) What is the ATS & What are main different parts of ATS?
Answer:
1. SUMMARY:-
ATS systems stands for the phrase automatic transfer switch system. The specified system shall be a dual-
position transfer switch designed to automatically and manually switch between two synchronized AC power
sources without an interruption of power to the load longer than 6 milliseconds. The input power shall be
supplied from two different AC power sources, which are nominally of the same voltage level, phase sequence,
and frequency. The primary purpose of the ATS shall be to allow virtually uninterrupted transfer from one
source to the other in case of failure of one source or by manual initiation for test or maintenance. The
switching action shall switch all phases and neutral conductors of the sources and shall not connect together the
two sources of power which would allow back-feeding one source to the other. The ATS shall allow for either
source to be designated as the "preferred source" to which the switch will automatically transfer to and remain
transferred to until manually initiated to transfer or until the selected source fails, at which time, the ATS shall
transfer without interruption greater than 6 milliseconds to the other source. The ATS shall be furnished with
an integral isolation and bypass switch which allows uninterrupted manual transfer to and from either source for
maintenance or replacement of the ATS electronics module without de-energizing the load equipment.
2. SYSTEM DESCRIPTION:-
- 125 -
st
3. Modes of Operation:-
The specified system shall be a two, three, or four-pole, double-throw, automatic transfer switch that switches
all branch circuit conductors, including phase and neutral conductors, that are supplied from the two AC power
sources. One source shall be designated as the preferred source while the other is the alternate source.
Selection of which input source is preferred shall be user selectable without de-energizing the load equipment
or reconnecting the input power sources. All transfers shall be a fast break-before-make with no overlap in
conduction from one source to the other. All transfers, including sense and transfer times, shall have less than a
6 millisecond interruption in power to the load.
3.1. Normal Mode: “In normal operation, the load shall be connected to the preferred source as long as all
phases of the preferred source are within the acceptable limits. Upon failure of the preferred source, the
load shall be transferred to the alternate source until such time as the preferred source returns to within the
acceptable limits. Transfer voltage limits shall be +/- 10% of the nominal input voltage for steady state
conditions, with low voltage transfer limits having an inverse time relationship that is within the IEEE Std.
446 computer voltage tolerance envelope. After the preferred source returns to within the acceptable
voltage limits for at least the user-adjustable retransfer time delay (1 to 60 seconds, 3 seconds typical) and
is in phase with the alternate source within the adjustable phase synchronization window (1 to 15 or 20
degrees, 10 degrees typical), the load shall be retransferred automatically to the preferred source. The
automatic retransfer to the preferred source can be disabled if so selected by the user from the service port.
When the automatic retransfer is disabled, emergency transfers from the alternate source to the preferred
source shall not be disabled upon alternate source failure”.
3.2. Load Current Inhibit: “The system shall sense the load current and, if the load current exceeds an
adjustable preset level deemed to represent a load inrush or fault condition, the system shall disable the
automatic transfer even if the voltage on the selected source exceeds the transfer limits to keep from
transferring the load inrush or fault current between the two input sources. The load current transfer
inhibits reset shall be user-selectable from the service port for manual or automatic reset. In the automatic
reset mode, the transfer inhibit shall be automatically reset after the current returns to normal to allow for
continued protection against a source failure. In the manual reset mode, the transfer inhibit shall require
that the unit be transferred to maintenance bypass or the unit powered off to reset the transfer inhibit and
restore normal operation”.
3.3. Manual Transfer: “The system shall allow manually initiated transfers between the two sources, provided
that the alternate source is within acceptable voltage limits and phase tolerances with the preferred source.
Allowable phase differences between the sources for manually initiated transfers shall be user-adjustable
from the service port. The user-adjustable phase synchronization window shall be limited to +/- 15 or 20
degrees. If the transfer is manually initiated, the system shall transfer between the two sources without
interruption of power to the load greater than 2.5 milliseconds provided that both sources are available and
synchronized within the user-adjustable phase synchronization window. For sources where the two
frequencies are not exactly the same (as would be the case between a utility and standby generator source),
manually initiated transfers shall be delayed by the system until the two sources are within the user-
adjustable phase synchronization window”.
3.4. Maintenance Bypass: “The system shall be furnished with key-locked maintenance bypass switch, which
allows the system electronics to be bypassed to either input source for maintenance without interruption of
power to the load greater than 2.5 milliseconds. The packaging of the system shall have all electronics
isolated from the input, output, and bypass connections to allow the electronics module to be removed and
replaced while the unit is in maintenance bypass without interruption of power to the load”.
- 126 -
st
151) Specify different ratings of ATS?
Answer:
UL – Listed (American Standards) IEC (European Standards)

30
63
70
80
100
125 125
160
200
250
260
320
400 400
600
630
800 800
1000 1000
1200
1250
1600 1600
1800
2000 2000
2500
2600
3000
3200
4000
- 127 -
st
152) What are the different types of ATS Devices?
Answer:
• A commonly available transfer switching device on the market is called Automatic Transfer Switch (ATS).
An ATS is a device, which automatically transfers one or more load conductors from the “Normal” power
source to an “Emergency” power source and back.
• All ATS consist of a Power Switching Assembly (PSA), Control Unit Assembly (CUA) and the enclosure.
• Three most common types of ATS by the type of the Power Switching Assembly used are: contactor based,
circuit breaker based and solid state.
1) Contactor Based ATS
⇒ Contactor based ATS is the most common type by the number

of units installed. Some of the advantages of the contactor
based ATS are low cost and availability. The contactors are
known as the devices designed for frequent switching of the
load current and commonly used as a part of the motor starters.
However many contactor based ATS manufacturers do not use
traditional contactors in their PSA. Therefore most contactor
based ATS are not rated for the number of switching
operations (with or without load) as traditional contactors.
⇒ Majority of the contactor based ATS manufacturers design

their PSA to meet the requirements of the UL 1008 standard.
⇒ Traditional contactor base ATS is neither capable nor intended to interrupt a fault current. Therefore
UL 1008 standard specifies the minimum fault currents the switch should be able to withstand without
damage for a time period of at least 3 cycles. (50 ms).
⇒ Power systems with the contactor based ATS must have a circuit breaker or a fuse upstream from the
ATS (for each power source: normal and emergency) for the purpose of short circuit protection.
⇒ If the ATS is rated to be able to withstand the available fault current for only 3 cycles, the upstream
protective device shall interrupt the fault in less than 3 cycles. This means that there is no practical
way of coordinating the upstream short circuit protective device with any of the short circuit
protective devices downstream from the ATS. As a result, a short circuit anywhere in the critical
circuit fed by the ATS will cause operation of the upstream short circuit protective device with the
consequent loss of power all the critical circuits fed by the ATS.
⇒ At the same time, if the fault is in one of the critical circuits protected by a feeder circuit breaker with
the instantaneous protection, the feeder circuit breaker may clear the fault.
⇒ Operation of the short circuit protective device upstream from the ATS will look to the ATS as a loss
of the present source and will cause the ATS to transfer the critical load to the alternative power
source. If the fault in the critical load circuit was cleared by the down stream feeder circuit breaker,
than the remaining critical load circuits will be energized by the alternate power source. . If the fault
in the critical load circuit was not cleared by the downstream feeder circuit breaker due to the fault
location, tripping time, uncoordinated tripping setpoints or feeder circuit breaker malfunction,
transferring of the faulted critical load circuit to the alternate power source will cause further damage
to the faulted circuit as well as tripping of the alternate power source upstream from the ATS.
- 128 -
st
2) Circuit Breaker Based ATS
⇒ Circuit breaker based ATS typically uses two interlocked,

electrically operated circuit breakers as the heart of its
PSA. The circuit breaker types, typically used in the ATS
PSA are designed to comply with the UL 489. There are
two major types of the circuit breakers, which fall in this
category. The industry calls them molded case circuit
breakers and insulated case circuit breakers. Molded case
circuit breakers are the most basic type of circuit breakers,
commonly found in low voltage power systems. The trip
units typically include overload protection and short circuit
protection (instantaneous setting of approximately 5 to 10
times frame rating). Insulated case circuit breakers are
designed with stored energy mechanism and spring
charging motor for remote closing, and are commonly
available in draw-out construction.
⇒ The circuit breakers used in the PSA assembly may be with or without the trip unit. Even when used
without the trip unit, most circuit breakers will trip and interrupt the fault, when the level of fault
current exceeds the withstand rating of the circuit breaker. This self-protecting feature is one of the
advantages of a circuit breaker based PSA over a contactor based PSA.
⇒ Generally, a circuit breaker based ATS acts the same as a contactor based ATS. Circuit breaker based
ATS can integrate the functions of an ATS and normal and alternate sources short circuit protective
devices when supplied with the trip units.
⇒ If the time delays to transfer setpoints are short, and under certain power system conditions it is
possible that the ATS will try to transfer during a fault. In that case a circuit breaker type ATS will be
able to successfully disconnect the faulted load and complete the transfer, since the circuit breakers
are rated to interrupt fault current. A contactor based ATS is likely to fail under the same scenario,
since the PSA contactors are not rated to interrupt fault.
3) Solid State ATS

⇒ Solid state ATS PSA is based on the use of the heavy duty
Silicon-Controlled Rectifiers (SCR). Use of SCRs in
conjunction with the microprocessor based control unit
allows the solid state ATS manufacturers to sense the
failure of the normal source and transfer to the alternate
source in less than ¼ of a cycle. This transfer time is fast
enough to not affect the operation of the common
computer equipment.
⇒ Due to the solid state nature of the SCR based PSA it is

common to see an isolation and bypass circuit breakers on
each source side and load side of the ATS. The isolation
circuit breakers allow for visible disconnection of the SCR
units from each source and load in case of the SCR units
failure or need for maintenance. After the SCR unit has
been fully disconnected by the isolation circuit breakers,
one of the bypass circuit breakers can be closed to directly
energize the load by the selected power source.
- 129 -
st
153) State the application & operation of the contactor and circuit breaker based transfer switches (ATS)?
Answer:
A. Transfer from normal source to emergency source (Transfer between live & dead sources):
¾ The most common application of the contactor and circuit breaker based transfer switches is when they are
used in conjunction with the emergency generator. In this case the utility is connected to the normal side of
the ATS; the generator is connected to the alternate (emergency) side of the ATS.
¾ Upon utility failure, the ATS will issue a start signal to the emergency generator set after a typical time delay
of 1 to 5 seconds. This time delay is intended to avoid starting of the generator set during very short
interruptions of the normal power supply. These short interruptions are typically corrected by the upstream
utility source reclosing, within 2 seconds.
¾ Once the generator set receives a start signal from the ATS, it takes approximately 10 seconds for the
generator to build up voltage and frequency to become available to energize the load. At this time the transfer
from the normal to the emergency source will occur. The load is now energized by the emergency source.
¾ Upon utility return, the ATS will activate the time delay return to normal source. This time delay is typically
set anywhere between 5 minutes and 30 minutes. This allows ensuring that the utility source has returned to
stay as well as gives the generator set some minimum time to run under load as well as allows some minimum
time to recharge the generator set engine cranking batteries in case the utility was to fail again, shortly after
the transfer to the normal source. Upon expiration of this time delay the transfer from the emergency source to
the normal source will occur.
- 130 -
st
B. Transfer from emergency source back to normal source (Transfer between two live sources):
¾ Upon utility return, the ATS will activate the time delay return to normal source. This time delay is typically
set anywhere between 5 minutes and 30 minutes. This allows to ensure that the utility source has returned to
stay as well as gives the generator set some minimum time to run under load as well as allows some minimum
time to recharge the generator set engine cranking batteries in case the utility was to fail again, shortly after
the transfer to the normal source. Upon expiration of this time delay the transfer from the emergency source to
the normal source will occur.
¾ Most of the time the transfer between the two live sources will occur when transferring from the emergency
source back to the returned normal source, therefore all our discussion bellow will be based on this transition.
However the phenomena’s described below apply to any load transfer between the two live sources.
¾ There are two ways to transfer load between the two live sources:
1. Open Transition
• During the open transition transfer from the emergency source back to the returned normal source, the
emergency source will be disconnected before the normal source will be connected. This will cause a
brief outage to the load.
• We know that when the voltage to the running electric motor suddenly decays, the electric motor
begins to act as the generator for a short period of time. The duration of the generator action depends
on the type of the motor, inertia of the driven equipment as well as the amount of the passive load on
the same circuit. This phenomena causes the engineers to consider motor contribution when they
calculate the available fault current. During the open transition load transfer, the independent sources
are likely not to be synchronized. Fast open transition motor load transfer, can cause connection of the
generating motor to the power source out of synchronism. The consequences of this connection are
similar to the closing the generator out of synchronism: high line currents (with possible operation of
the overcurrent devices) and mechanical stress to the equipment shafts and gears (with possible
mechanical damage). Transformers are also known to cause high line currents during fast open
transition load transfers, due to the stored magnetic field.
- 131 -
st
• There are three most common ways to accomplish open transition transfer:
1.1. Non-Delayed Transition.
o In case of non-delayed transition, the normal source will be connected to the load as soon as
the emergency source is disconnected from the load, without any intentional time delay.
Advantages:
The duration of the outage is minimized; lowest cost.
Disadvantages:
(Motors, transformers….etc.) Problems.
1.2. In-Phase Transition.
o In case of in-phase transition, the normal source will be connected to the load as soon as the
emergency source is disconnected from the load, but the transfer will only take place when
the two sources are in synchronism.
Advantages:
The duration of the outage is minimized.
Disadvantages:
Relies on the generator to passively fall into synch with the utility, which is not
always possible. In this case the transfer may not occur until the generator runs out
of fuel. If the substantial passive load is connected to the motor during the transfer,
the motor my fall out of synch faster than the transfer time of the ATS. The time of
transfer is not predictable. Does not eliminating inrush during transfer of the heavy
transformer loads.
1.3. Time Delayed Transition.

o In case of time delayed transition, the normal source will be connected to the load after the
emergency source is disconnected from the load, and after an adjustable time delay.
Advantages:
The most reliable and flexible operation suitable for reliable transfer of any loads.
Disadvantages:
The duration of the outage during transfer is increased.
- 132 -
st
2. Closed Transition
• During the closed transition

transfer from the emergency
source back to the returned normal
source, the emergency source will
be disconnected after the normal
source is connected. This will not
cause an outage to the load during
the transfer. Typically the duration
of the connection of the two
sources is less than 100 ms. since
the incoming and the running
power sources connect while in
synchronism, any type of load can
be reliably transferred in this
manner.
• The synchronizing of the sources for the

closed transition transfer can be
accomplished via active synchronizing
and passive synchronizing. In both cases
the paralleling of the two sources is
supervised by a synchronizing check
relay.
• In case of passive synchronizing, the

system control relies on the generator to
randomly fall in to synchronism with the
utility source. In case of passive
synchronizing there is no way to be sure
that the transfer will occur.
• In case of active synchronizing, the

system control monitors the voltage and
frequency of both sources and provides a
speed correction signal to the prime
movers (engine, turbine, etc.) governing
system to bring it in to synchronism with
the running source (utility).
- 133 -
st
154) State the application & operation of the solid state transfer switches (ATS)?
Answer:
¾ The main advantage of the solid state ATS over the contactor or circuit breaker based transfer switch is its
ability to detect the failure of the normal source and transfer to the available alternate source within ¼ of a
cycle. At the same time the solid state ATS are much more expensive and generally less reliable as compared
to the contactor or circuit breaker based ATS. Since the emergency generator set is, typically not available for
the first 10 seconds of the normal source outage, the advantages of the solid state ATS would not be utilized
when used with the emergency generator set.
¾ Solid state ATS are typically used in the systems with two constantly available separately derived and
synchronized power sources, and where the nature of the load is such that brief power outage is not
acceptable.
155) State the difference in wiring between:

¾ 2-Way Switch & 3-Way Switch.
¾ 4-Way Switch & Intermediate Switch.
Answer:
◊ The 3 way & 4 way switches (as per American standards) is same as 2 way & intermediate
switches respectively (as per British standards).
• On the three way switch, there are three screws. So it is called like this.
• On the 2 way switch, also there are three screws. But, it’s called 2 way because you can switch on
or off from 2 positions.
o On the four way switch, four are three screws. So it is called like this.
o On the intermediate switch, also there are four screws. But, it’s called intermediate because you
can switch on or off from many positions.
◊ Always the first & the last switch should be (2way/3way switches) … while all the intermediate
switches should be (intermediate/4way switches).
- 134 -
st
156) What is the minimum requirement for transfer switch (ATS) arrangement that should be followed for
essential & critical loads of health care facilities?
Answer:
As per NEC . Article 517
¾ Essential electrical systems for hospitals shall be comprised of two separate systems capable of supplying a
limited amount of lighting and power service, which is considered essential for life safety and effective
hospital operation during the time the normal electrical service is interrupted for any reason. These two
systems shall be:
1. Emergency Systems
¾ The emergency system shall be limited to circuits essential to life safety and critical patient care.
These are designated the life safety branch and the critical branch.
2. Equipment System
¾ The equipment system shall supply major electrical equipment necessary for patient care and basic
hospital operation.
¾ The number of transfer switches to be used shall be based on reliability, design, and load considerations. Each
branch of the emergency system and each equipment system shall have one or more transfer switches.
¾ One transfer switch shall be permitted to serve one or more branches or systems in a facility with a maximum
demand on the essential electrical system of 150 kVA.
- 135 -
st
157) How can you classify lighting according to applications?

Answer:
1. Indoor lighting
1.1. Office lighting
1.2. Conference halls lighting
1.3. Industrial lighting
1.4. Hazardous areas lighting
1.5. Indoor sports lighting
1.6. Hospitals lighting
1.7. Merchandise lighting
1.8. Hotels lighting
2. Outdoor lighting
2.1. Area Flood lighting
2.2. Façade lighting
2.3. Landscape and Amenity lighting
2.4. Outdoor sport lighting
2.5. Road lighting
2.6. Tunnel lighting
158) What is the acceptable percentage voltage drop that can be reached in L.V. calculations?
Answer:
¾ Conductors for feeders as defined in Article 100, sized to prevent a voltage drop exceeding 3 percent at the
farthest outlet of power, heating, and lighting loads, or combinations of such loads, and where the maximum
total voltage drop on both feeders and branch circuits to the farthest outlet does not exceed 5 percent, will
provide reasonable efficiency of operation.
¾ Reasonable operating efficiency is achieved if the voltage drop of a feeder or the voltage drop of a branch
circuit is limited to 3 percent. However, the total voltage drop of a branch circuit plus a feeder can reach 5
percent and still achieve reasonable operating efficiency
According to Saudi Electricity Company - SEC (Distribution Planning Standard - DPS) - Table-1.3:
¾ For LV Customers. The Utility voltage

drop allocations listed in Table-1.3 shall
be used as guideline voltage drops over
the power system components supplying
a low voltage customer. The additional
voltage drop in the customer's wiring
shall not exceed the value indicated.
¾ Distribution Transformers have a built-
in voltage boost of 5% by virtue of the
transformation ratio. Note that this does
not extend the voltage drop to the
service point beyond 10% however.
- 136 -
st
159) When should we use Busbar Trunking System (Bus Duct)?
Answer:
• Busbar trunking systems are used to advantage wherever higher currents need to be transmitted.
They can be used as transmission lines between transformers and main switch boxes or as a connection between
main switch boxes and subsidiary switch boxes of heavy consumers. They can also be used in factory buildings,
electric power stations, power plants, water treatment, airports, commercial installations, hospitals, office
Buildings, sewage stations, clinics, food processing industries etc., or as riser in multi-store high-rise buildings.
160) What are the advantages of using Busbar Trunking System?
Answer:
¾ Busbar Trunking System has several advantages ensured
1. Higher short-circuit rating (up to 100 kA for 1sec).

2. The sandwich type assembly makes it possible to obtain
lower reactance therefore lower voltage drops.
3. Excellent heat dissipation by a direct conduction of the
bars to the housing.
4. Feeder and plug-in types are available and
interchangable without any adapter or special parts.
5. Thermal expansion of the Busbar system is accomodated
within the joint system.
6. Integral aluminum housing offers standard earth busbar
of full cross section.
7. Integral design enable flames, gases, smokes,vapour or
warm air to pass unobstructive.
8. Easy and quick to install.
161) When should we use tap-off boxes Busbar Trunking System?
Answer:
• When a line has to be fed by cables, feed-in boxes can be installed.
162) Which is better in power distribution AC system or DC system? Why?
¾ AC has at least three advantages over DC in a power distribution grid:
1. Large electrical generators happen to generate AC naturally, so conversion to DC would involve an

extra step.
2. Transformers must have alternating current to operate, and we will see that the power distribution
grid depends on transformers.
3. It is easy to convert AC to DC but expensive to convert DC to AC, so if you were going to pick one
or the other AC would be the better choice.
- 137 -
st
163) What are the different battery type’s technologies? State the difference?
Answer:
- 138 -
st
164) Consider a pillar with a 3 phase load 200A. The cable length feeding the pillar from a transformer is 140
meters. This cable is laid directly in ground and is grouped with another 5 cables in the same trench.
Which size of cable below you prefer to use in order not to exceed 2% voltage drop, p.f = 0.8 & why?
Multi-core Cable CU/SWA-XLPE/PVC (0.6/1) kV

1. 1 x ( 4 x 300 mm2).
2. 2 x ( 4 x 120 mm2).
Where:
Group De-rating Factor (Spacing = 150mm) for 6 cables direct laid in ground is 0.68.
Temperature De-rating Factor (@ 40 Degree) 0.95.
Depth De-rating Factor (up to 0.6m) 0.96.
Cable Resistance Reactance Current Capacity Unit Overall

Size R XL Direct Laid in Ground Price Diameter
(mm2) (Ohm/Km) (Ohm/Km) (A) (S.R/Km) (mm)
4 x 120 0.197 0.0948 310 188000 48.4
4 x 300 0.0812 0.0935 494 415000 69.7
Answer:
• Pillar Cable Ampacity @ 125% = 200 x 1.25 = 250 A
For 1 x ( 4 x 300 mm2 ):
• Cable De-rated Ampacity = 494 x 0.68 x 0.95 x 0.96 = 306.4 A ≥ 250 A (OK).
• %V.D. = {√3 x 250 x 140 / 380} x {[(0.0812/1000) x 0.8] + [(0.0965/1000) x 0.6]} x {100}
= 1.93 % ≤ 2 % (OK).
• C.B. Size = 300 A ≤ 306.4 A (OK).
• Cost = 140 x (415000/1000) = 58,100 S.R.
• Overall Diameter = 69.7 mm
For 2 x ( 4 x 120 mm2 ):
• Cable De-rated Ampacity = (310 x 2) x (0.68 x 0.95 x 0.96) = 384.5 A ≥ 250 A (OK).
• %V.D. = {√3 x (250/2) x 140 / 380} x {[(0.197/1000) x 0.8] + [(0.0948/1000) x 0.6]} x {100}
= 1.71 % ≤ 2 % (OK).
• C.B. Size = 300 A ≤ 384.5 A (OK).
• Cost = (140 x 2) x (188000/1000) = 52,280 S.R.
• Overall Diameter = 2 x 48.4 = 96.8 mm
Comparison:
Cable Voltage Cable De-rated Cost Overall Total

Options Drop Ampacity Diameter Evaluation
( mm2) (%) (A) (S.R) (mm)
1 x ( 4 x 300 mm2) 1.93 ↑ (Worst) 306.4 ↓ (Worst) 58,100 ↑ (Worst) 69.7 ↓ (Better) Worst
2 x ( 4 x 120 mm2) 1.71 ↓ (Better) 384.5 ↑ (Better) 52,800 ↓ (Better) 96.8 ↑ (Worst) Better
- 139 -
st
165) What are the expected room sizes (dimensions) for standby generators with these sizes:
80, 100, 125, 175, 200, 350, 400, 500, 600, 750, 900, 1000, 1500KW
Answer:
Generator Size Generator Dimensions Generator Room Size

Length Width Height Length Width Height
KW KVA
(mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm)
80 - 100 100 - 125 2420 840 1230 5000 3500 3000
125 – 175 160 - 220 2600 890 1410 5250 3500 3000
200 – 350 250 - 440 3610 1270 1630 6250 3750 3400
400 – 500 500 – 625 4070 1530 1970 6750 4300 3750
600 750 4310 1830 2280 7000 5250 4250
750 940 4830 1830 2410 7500 5250 4250
900 1125 4830 1900 2510 7500 5250 4750
1000 - 1500 1250 - 1875 5660 1900 2510 8500 5250 5750
- 140 -
st
‫‪Top Electrical Design‬‬ ‫‪Prepared by: Mahmoud Essam Hizzah‬‬
‫‪Questions & Answers‬‬ ‫‪Electrical Design Engineer‬‬
‫)‪166‬‬ ‫‪State some diversity factors of different purposes (ex: lighting, sockets, air conditioning …. etc) for‬‬
‫?‪different type of premises (ex: residential, offices, hotels ….. etc) according to Egyptian Code‬‬
‫‪Answer:‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻻت اﻟﺴﻤﺎح ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪام ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻼت اﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ اﻟﺘﻴﺎراﻟﺘﺼﻤﻴﻤﻰ ﻟﻠﺪواﺋﺮ ﻓﻰ اﻟﻤﺒﺎﻧﻰ ﻃﺒﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﻜﻮد اﻟﻤﺼﺮى ﻟﻠﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎء‬
‫ﻣﻜﺎﺗﺐ وﻣﺘﺎﺟﺮ وﻣﺒﺎن ﻋﺎﻣﺔ ﺧﻼف‬ ‫ﻓﻨﺎدق ﺻﻐﻴﺮة أو ﻣﺒﺎﻧﻲ ﻋﺎﻣﺔ ﻟﻠﻨﻮم‬ ‫وﺣﺪة ﺳﻜﻨﻴﺔ أو وﺣﺪات‬ ‫ﻋﻤﺎرات ﺗﺘﻜﻮن ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪة‬
‫ﻧﻮع اﻟﺤﻤﻞ‬
‫اﻟﻮرش واﻟﻤﺼﺎﻧﻊ‬ ‫واﻟﻤﻌﻴﺸﺔ‬ ‫ﺳﻜﻨﻴﺔ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ‬ ‫وﺣﺪات ﺳﻜﻨﻴﺔ‬
‫‪ ٪90‬ﻣﻦ اﻟﺤﻤﻞ اﻟﻜﻠﻲ‬ ‫‪ ٪75‬ﻣﻦ اﻟﺤﻤﻞ اﻟﻜﻠﻲ‬ ‫‪ ٪66‬ﻣﻦ اﻟﺤﻤﻞ اﻟﻜﻠﻲ‬ ‫‪ ٪50‬ﻣﻦ اﻟﺤﻤﻞ اﻟﻜﻠﻲ‬ ‫اﻹﻧﺎرة‬
‫‪ ٪100‬ﻣﻦ اﻟﺘﻴﺎر اﻟﺘﺼﻤﻴﻤﻲ ﻷآﺒﺮ ﻣﺂﺧﺬ‬ ‫‪ ٪100‬ﻣﻦ اﻟﺘﻴﺎر اﻟﺘﺼﻤﻴﻤﻲ ﻷآﺒﺮ‬ ‫‪ ٪100‬ﻣﻦ اﻟﺘﻴﺎر اﻟﺘﺼﻤﻴﻤﻲ‬ ‫‪ ٪100‬ﻣﻦ اﻟﺘﻴﺎر اﻟﺘﺼﻤﻴﻤﻲ‬ ‫اﻟﻤﺂﺧﺬ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺪاﺋﺮة‬ ‫ﻣﺂﺧﺬ ﺑﺎﻟﺪاﺋﺮة‪.‬‬ ‫ﻷآﺒﺮ ﻣﺂﺧﺬ ﺑﺎﻟﺪاﺋﺮة‪.‬‬ ‫ﻷآﺒﺮ ﻣﺂﺧﺬ ﺑﺎﻟﺪاﺋﺮة‪.‬‬ ‫اﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ‬
‫‪ ٪75+‬ﻣﻦ ﻣﺠﻤﻮع اﻟﺘﻴﺎرات اﻟﺘﺼﻤﻴﻤﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪ ٪40+‬ﻣﻦ اﻟﺘﻴﺎر اﻟﺘﺼﻤﻴﻤﻲ ﻟﺒﺎﻗﻲ‬ ‫‪ ٪40+‬ﻣﻦ ﻣﺠﻤﻮع اﻟﺘﻴﺎرات‬ ‫‪ ٪40 +‬ﻣﻦ ﻣﺠﻤﻮع اﻟﺘﻴﺎرات‬ ‫)اﻟﺒﺮاﻳﺰ(‬
‫ﻟﺒﺎﻗﻲ ﻣﺂﺧﺬ اﻟﺪاﺋﺮة‬ ‫ﻣﺂﺧﺬ اﻟﺪاﺋﺮة‪.‬‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺼﻤﻴﻤﻴﺔ ﻟﺒﺎﻗﻲ ﻣﺂﺧﺬ اﻟﺪاﺋﺮة‪.‬‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺼﻤﻴﻤﻴﺔ ﻟﺒﺎﻗﻲ ﻣﺂﺧﺬ اﻟﺪاﺋﺮة‬
‫‪ ٪75+‬ﻣﻦ اﻟﺘﻴﺎر اﻟﺘﺼﻤﻴﻤﻲ ﻟﺒﺎﻗﻲ‬
‫اﻟﻤﺂﺧﺬ ﻓﻲ دواﺋﺮ اﻷﻣﺎآﻦ اﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺒﻨﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٪100‬ﻣﻦ اﻟﺤﻤﻞ اﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻷآﺒﺮ ﺟﻬﺎز‬ ‫‪ ٪100‬ﻣﻦ اﻟﺤﻤﻞ اﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻷآﺒﺮ ﺟﻬﺎز‬ ‫‪ ٪100‬ﻣﻦ إﺟﻤﺎﻟﻲ اﻟﺤﻤﻞ‬ ‫‪ ٪100‬ﻣﻦ اﻟﺤﻤﻞ اﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻷآﺒﺮ‬ ‫اﻷﺟﻬﺰة‬
‫‪ ٪75+‬ﻣﻦ اﻟﺤﻤﻞ اﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻟﺒﺎﻗﻲ اﻷﺟﻬﺰة‪.‬‬ ‫‪ ٪80+‬ﻣﻦ اﻟﺤﻤﻞ اﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻟﻠﺠﻬﺎز‬ ‫اﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮع اﻷﺟﻬﺰة ﺣﺘﻰ‬ ‫ﺟﻬﺎز‪.‬‬ ‫اﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ‬
‫اﻷول اﻟﺬي ﻳﻠﻲ أآﺒﺮ ﺟﻬﺎز‬ ‫ﺳﻌﺔ ‪ 10‬أﻣﺒﻴﺮ‬ ‫‪ ٪50+‬ﻣﻦ اﻟﺤﻤﻞ اﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‬ ‫اﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﺧﻼف‬
‫‪ ٪60+‬ﻣﻦ اﻟﺤﻤﻞ اﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻟﺒﺎﻗﻲ‬ ‫‪ ٪50+‬ﻣﻦ اﻟﺤﻤﻞ ﻟﻸﺟﻬﺰة‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺠﻬﺎز اﻷول اﻟﺬي ﻳﻠﻲ أآﺒﺮ‬ ‫اﻟﻤﺤﺮآﺎت‬
‫اﻷﺟﻬﺰة‬ ‫اﻟﺘﻰ ﺣﻤﻠﻬﺎ ﻳﺰﻳﺪ ﻋﻦ ‪ 10‬أﻣﺒﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﺟﻬﺎز‬ ‫واﻟﺴﺨﺎﻧﺎت‬
‫‪ ٪33+‬ﻣﻦ اﻟﺤﻤﻞ اﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‬ ‫وأﺟﻬﺰة اﻟﻄﻬﻲ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺠﻬﺎز اﻟﺜﺎﻧﻲ اﻟﺬي ﻳﻠﻲ أآﺒﺮ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎز‬
‫‪ ٪20+‬ﻣﻦ اﻟﺤﻤﻞ اﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻟﺒﺎﻗﻲ‬
‫اﻷﺟﻬﺰة‬
‫‪ ٪100‬ﻣﻦ اﻟﺤﻤﻞ اﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻷآﺒﺮ ﺟﻬﺎز‪.‬‬ ‫‪ ٪100‬ﻣﻦ اﻟﺤﻤﻞ اﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻷآﺒﺮ‬ ‫‪ ٪100‬ﻣﻦ اﻟﺤﻤﻞ اﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‬ ‫‪ ٪100‬ﻣﻦ اﻟﺤﻤﻞ اﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻷآﺒﺮ‬ ‫أﺟﻬﺰة اﻟﻄﻬﻲ‬
‫‪ ٪80+‬ﻣﻦ اﻟﺤﻤﻞ اﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻟﻠﺠﻬﺎز اﻷول‬ ‫ﺟﻬﺎز‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻸﺟﻬﺰة ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ 10‬أﻣﺒﻴﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺟﻬﺎز‬ ‫اﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫اﻟﺬي ﻳﻠﻲ أآﺒﺮ ﺟﻬﺎز‪.‬‬ ‫‪ ٪80+‬ﻣﻦ اﻟﺤﻤﻞ اﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻟﻠﺠﻬﺎز‬ ‫‪ ٪30+‬ﻣﻦ اﻟﺤﻤﻞ اﻟﻤﻘﻨﻦ‬ ‫‪ ٪50+‬ﻣﻦ اﻟﺤﻤﻞ اﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‬
‫‪ ٪60+‬ﻣﻦ اﻟﺤﻤﻞ اﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻟﺒﺎﻗﻲ اﻷﺟﻬﺰة‬ ‫اﻷول اﻟﺬي ﻳﻠﻲ أآﺒﺮ ﺟﻬﺎز‪.‬‬ ‫اﻟﺰاﺋﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ 10‬أﻣﺒﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺠﻬﺎز اﻷول اﻟﺬي ﻳﻠﻲ أآﺒﺮ‬
‫‪ ٪60+‬ﻣﻦ اﻟﺤﻤﻞ اﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻟﺒﺎﻗﻲ‬ ‫‪ 5+‬أﻣﺒﻴﺮ إذا آﺎن ﻳﻮﺟﺪ‬ ‫ﺟﻬﺎز‬
‫اﻷﺟﻬﺰة‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﺠﻬﺎز ﻣﺨﺮج إﺿﺎﻓﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ ٪33‬ﻣﻦ اﻟﺤﻤﻞ اﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻟﻠﺠﻬﺎز‬
‫اﻟﺜﺎﻧﻲ اﻟﺬي ﻳﻠﻲ أآﺒﺮ ﺟﻬﺎز‬
‫‪ ٪20+‬ﻣﻦ اﻟﺤﻤﻞ اﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻟﺒﺎﻗﻲ‬
‫اﻷﺟﻬﺰة‬
‫‪ ٪100‬ﻣﻦ اﻟﺤﻤﻞ اﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻷآﺒﺮ ﻣﺤﺮك‬ ‫اﻟﻤﺤﺮآﺎت‬
‫‪ ٪80+‬ﻣﻦ اﻟﺤﻤﻞ اﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻟﻠﻤﺤﺮك اﻟﺬي‬ ‫اﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ‬
‫‪ ٪100‬ﻣﻦ اﻟﺤﻤﻞ اﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻷآﺒﺮ‬ ‫‪ ٪100‬ﻣﻦ اﻟﺤﻤﻞ اﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‬ ‫‪ ٪100‬ﻣﻦ اﻟﺤﻤﻞ اﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻷآﺒﺮ‬
‫ﻳﻠﻲ أآﺒﺮ ﻣﺤﺮك‪.‬‬ ‫"ﺧﻼف‬
‫ﻣﺤﺮك‬ ‫ﻷآﺒﺮ ﻣﺤﺮك‬ ‫ﻣﺤﺮك‬
‫‪ ٪60+‬ﻣﻦ اﻟﺤﻤﻞ اﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻟﺒﺎﻗﻲ‬ ‫ﻣﺤﺮآﺎت‬
‫‪ ٪50+‬ﻣﻦ اﻟﺤﻤﻞ اﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻟﺒﺎﻗﻲ‬ ‫‪ ٪50 +‬ﻣﻦ اﻟﺤﻤﻞ ﻟﺒﺎﻗﻲ‬ ‫‪ ٪50 +‬ﻣﻦ اﻟﺤﻤﻞ ﻟﺒﺎﻗﻲ‬
‫اﻟﻤﺤﺮآﺎت‪.‬‬ ‫اﻟﻤﺼﺎﻋﺪ اﻟﺘﻲ‬
‫اﻟﻤﺤﺮآﺎت‪.‬‬ ‫اﻟﻤﺤﺮآﺎت‬ ‫اﻟﻤﺤﺮآﺎت‬
‫ﻟﻬﺎ اﻋﺘﺒﺎرات‬
‫ﺧﺎﺻﺔ"‬
‫ﺗﻘﺪر ﺑﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ اﻟﻤﺨﺘﺼﻴﻦ ﺗﺒﻌًﺎ ﻟﻈﺮوف‬ ‫‪ ٪100‬ﻣﻦ اﻟﺤﻤﻞ ﻷآﺒﺮ ﺳﺨﺎن‬ ‫اﻟﺴﺨﺎﻧﺎت‬
‫اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻟﻔﻌﻠﻴﺔ اﻟﻤﺤﺘﻤﻠﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ ٪100+‬ﻣﻦ اﻟﺤﻤﻞ اﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻟﻠﺴﺨﺎن اﻟﺬي ﻳﻠﻲ أآﺒﺮ ﺳﺨﺎن‬ ‫اﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ‬
‫‪ ٪25+‬ﻣﻦ اﻟﺤﻤﻞ اﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻟﺒﺎﻗﻲ اﻟﺴﺨﺎﻧﺎت‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻘﻄﻌﺔ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫اﻟﺴﺨﺎﻧﺎت‬
‫اﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ‬
‫‪ ٪100‬ﻣﻦ اﻟﺤﻤﻞ اﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ اﻟﺤﺎﻻت‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮة‬
‫اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪- 141 -‬‬

‫‪st‬‬
‫‪1 Edition‬‬ ‫‪Best Wishes‬‬
‫)‪167‬‬ ‫‪Can you estimate the demand load of a building using its type & its gross area according to Egyptian‬‬
‫?‪Code‬‬
‫‪Answer:‬‬
‫ﻃﺒﻘ ًﺎ ﻟﻠﻜﻮد اﻟﻤﺼﺮى‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎذج ﻧﻤﻄﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻄﻠﺐ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺤﻤﻞ ﺑﻮﺣﺪات اﻟﻤﺒﺎﻧﻲ اﻟﺴﻜﻨﻴﺔ اﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺰﻳﺪ ارﺗﻔﺎﻋﻬﺎ ﻋﻦ ‪ 15‬ﻃﺎﺑﻘ ًﺎ‬
‫ﻃﻠﺐ اﻟﺤﻤﻞ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﺎﺋﺔ ﻣﺘﺮ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ )ك‪.‬ف‪.‬أ(‬
‫إدارى‬ ‫ﺳﻜﻨﻰ‬
‫‪12‬‬ ‫‪10 – 8‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎذج ﻧﻤﻄﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻄﻠﺐ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺤﻤﻞ ﺑﻮﺣﺪات اﻟﻤﺒﺎﻧﻲ اﻟﺴﻜﻨﻴﺔ اﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻘﻞ ارﺗﻔﺎﻋﻬﺎ ﻋﻦ ‪ 15‬ﻃﺎﺑﻘ ًﺎ‬
‫ﻃﻠﺐ اﻟﺤﻤﻞ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﺎﺋﺔ ﻣﺘﺮ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ )ك‪.‬ف‪.‬أ(‬
‫إدارى‬ ‫ﺳﻜﻨﻰ‬
‫‪2 – 1.5‬‬ ‫إﺳﻜﺎن ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ اﻟﺘﻜﺎﻟﻴﻒ‬
‫‪12 - 6‬‬ ‫‪4 – 2.5‬‬ ‫إﺳﻜﺎن ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ‬
‫‪10 - 6‬‬ ‫إﺳﻜﺎن ﻓﺎﺧﺮ‬
‫اﻟﺴﻌﺎت اﻟﻨﻤﻄﻴﺔ ﻟﻮﺣﺪات اﻟﻤﺒﺎﻧﻰ اﻟﺘﻰ ﻳﺰﻳﺪ ارﺗﻔﺎﻋﻬﺎ ﻋﻦ ‪ 15‬دورًا‬

‫اﻟﺴﻌﺔ ك‪.‬ف‪.‬أ‪ 100/.‬ﻣﺘﺮ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ‬
‫اﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺤﻼت أو ﻣﻜﺎﺗﺐ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﻜﻦ‬
‫‪12‬‬ ‫‪10 - 8‬‬ ‫ﺟﻤﻴﻊ اﻟﻤﻮاﻗﻊ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺎهﺮة‬

‫اﻟﻜﺒﺮى‬
‫‪- 142 -‬‬

‫‪st‬‬
- 143 -
st
‫‪ (168‬ﻣﺒﻨﻰ ﻳﺤﺘﻮى ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺪة وﺣﺪات ﺳﻜﻨﻴﺔ ﻳﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻷﺣﻤﺎل اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬
‫‪ (1‬أﺣﻤﺎل إﻧﺎرة ‪ 75‬ك‪.‬و‪ .‬وﻣﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻗﺪرة = ‪. 1‬‬
‫‪ 30 (2‬داﺋﺮة ﻟﻠﻤﺂﺧﺬ اﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺗﺤﺘﻮى آﻞ داﺋﺮة ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺖ ﻣﺂﺧﺬ آﻞ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﺑﺴﻌﺔ ‪2‬أﻣﺒﻴﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 10 (3‬ﺳﺨﺎﻧﺎت آﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﻣﺘﻘﻄﻌﺔ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ واﻟﺤﻤﻞ اﻹﺳﻤﻰ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ‪ 1.5‬ك‪.‬و‪ .‬وﻣﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻗﺪرة = ‪. 1‬‬
‫اﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮب ﻃﺒﻘًﺎ ﻟﻠﻜﻮد اﻟﻤﺼﺮى‪:‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ اﻟﺤﻤﻞ اﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻬﺬا اﻟﻤﺒﻨﻰ ﻣﻊ اﻟﺴﻤﺎح ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪام ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻼت اﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﻓﻰ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ‪:‬‬
‫)أ( إذا آﺎن اﻟﻤﺒﻨﻰ ﻋﻤﺎرة ﺳﻜﻨﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫)ب( إذا آﺎن اﻟﻤﺒﻨﻰ ﺳﻮق ﺗﺠﺎرى‪.‬‬
‫اﻟﺤﻞ‪:‬‬
‫)أ( ﻓﻰ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ اﺳﺘﺨﺪام اﻟﻤﺒﻨﻰ آﻌﻤﺎرة ﺳﻜﻨﻴﺔ ﻣﻜﻮﻧﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪة وﺣﺪات ﺳﻜﻨﻴﺔ ‪:‬‬
‫‪ 37.5 = 75 × ٪50‬ك‪.‬وات = ‪ 37.5‬ك‪.‬ف‪.‬أ‬ ‫=‬ ‫)‪ (1‬ﺣﻤﻞ اﻹﻧﺎرة‬
‫‪ 6 = 5 × 2 × 0.40 + 2‬أﻣﺒﻴﺮ‬ ‫=‬ ‫)‪ (2‬ﺣﻤﻞ داﺋﺮة اﻟﻤﺂﺧﺬ اﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻷﻣﺒﻴﺮ‬
‫)‪ 1.32 = 1000 / (220 × 6‬ك‪.‬ف‪.‬أ‬ ‫)‪ (a‬ﺣﻤﻞ اﻟﺪاﺋﺮة اﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻴﻠﻮ ﻓﻮﻟﺖ أﻣﺒﻴﺮ =‬
‫‪ 30‬داﺋﺮة × ‪ 39.6 = 1.32‬ك‪.‬ف‪.‬أ‬ ‫=‬ ‫)‪ (b‬اﻟﺤﻤﻞ اﻟﻜﻠﻰ ﻟﻠﻤﺄﺧﺬ‬
‫‪6 =(1.5×8)٪25+1.5+1.5‬ك‪.‬وات)‪ 6‬ك‪.‬ف‪.‬أ(‬ ‫=‬ ‫)‪ (3‬ﺣﻤﻞ اﻟﺴﺨﺎﻧﺎت اﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ‬
‫‪ 83.1 = 6 + 39.6 + 37.5‬ك‪.‬ف‪.‬أ‬ ‫=‬ ‫)‪ (4‬اﻟﺤﻤﻞ اﻟﻜﻠﻰ‬
‫)ب( ﻓﻰ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ اﺳﺘﺨﺪام اﻟﻤﺒﻨﻰ آﺴﻮق ﺗﺠﺎرى‪:‬‬

‫‪ 67.5 = 75 × ٪90‬ك‪.‬وات = ‪ 67.5‬ك‪.‬ف‪.‬أ‬ ‫=‬ ‫)‪ (1‬ﺣﻤﻞ اﻹﻧﺎرة‬
‫‪ 9.58 = 5 × 2 × 0.75 + 2‬أﻣﺒﻴﺮ‬ ‫=‬ ‫)‪ (2‬ﺣﻤﻞ داﺋﺮة اﻟﻤﺂﺧﺬ اﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻷﻣﺒﻴﺮ‬
‫)‪ 2.108 = 1000 / (220 × 9.58‬ك‪.‬ف‪.‬أ‬ ‫=‬ ‫)‪ (a‬ﺣﻤﻞ اﻟﺪاﺋﺮة اﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻴﻠﻮ ﻓﻮﻟﺖ أﻣﺒﻴﺮ‬
‫‪ 30‬داﺋﺮة × ‪ 63.23 = 2.108‬ك‪.‬ف‪.‬أ‬ ‫=‬ ‫)‪ (b‬اﻟﺤﻤﻞ اﻟﻜﻠﻰ ﻟﻠﻤﺄﺧﺬ‬
‫‪ 15 = 1.5 × 10‬ك‪.‬وات = ‪ 15‬ك‪.‬ف‪.‬أ‬ ‫=‬ ‫)‪ (3‬ﺣﻤﻞ اﻟﺴﺨﺎﻧﺎت اﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ‬
‫‪ 145.73 = 15 + 63.23 + 67.5‬ك‪.‬ف‪.‬أ‬ ‫=‬ ‫)‪ (4‬اﻟﺤﻤﻞ اﻟﻜﻠﻰ‬
‫‪- 144 -‬‬

‫‪st‬‬
‫‪ (169‬ﻓﻴﻼ )وﺣﺪة ﺳﻜﻨﻴﺔ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ( ﻣﻄﻠﻮب ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ اﻟﺤﻤﻞ اﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻰ ﻟﻬﺎ ﻃﺒﻘًﺎ ﻟﻠﻜﻮد اﻟﻤﺼﺮى ‪ ،‬وهﻰ ﺗﺤﺘﻮى ﻋﻠﻰ اﻵﺗﻰ‪:‬‬
‫• ﻋﺪد ﻣﻦ ﻣﺨﺎرج اﻹﻧﺎرة ﺑﺈﺟﻤﺎﻟﻰ ‪ 15000‬وات‬
‫• ﻣﺂﺧﺬ آﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪ :‬ﺳﻌﺔ ‪ 2‬أﻣﺒﻴﺮ ﺑﻌﺪد ‪ 30/‬داﺋﺮة )آﻞ داﺋﺮة ﺗﺤﺘﻮى ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺪد ﺳﺖ ﻣﺂﺧﺬ(‪.‬‬
‫• أﺟﻬﺰة آﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪:‬‬
‫♦ ﺑﺎب ﺟﺮاج ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﻤﻮﺗﻮر ‪ 1.2‬ﺣﺼﺎن‬
‫♦ ﺟﻬﺎز أﻟﻌﺎب رﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ ﺑﻘﺪرة ‪ 1400‬وات‬
‫♦ ﻋﺪد ‪ 7 /‬أﺟﻬﺰة ﺗﻜﻴﻴﻒ‪:‬‬
‫♦ ﻋﺪد ‪ 2 /‬ﺑﻘﺪرة ‪ 3.5‬ﺣﺼﺎن )‪ 2.6‬ك‪.‬وات(‬
‫♦ ﻋﺪد ‪ 3 /‬ﺑﻘﺪرة ‪ 2.5‬ﺣﺼﺎن )‪ 1.9‬ك‪.‬وات(‬
‫♦ ﻋﺪد ‪ 2 /‬ﺑﻘﺪرة ‪ 2‬ﺣﺼﺎن )‪ 1.5‬ك‪.‬وات(‬
‫• أﺟﻬﺰة اﻟﻄﻬﻰ‪:‬‬
‫♦ ﺟﻬﺎز ﻃﻬﻰ رﺋﻴﺴﻰ آﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻰ ﺑﻘﺪرة ‪ 6000‬وات‬
‫♦ ﻋﺪد ‪ 2 /‬ﺟﻬﺎز ﻃﻬﻰ آﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻰ ﻓﺮﻋﻰ ﻗﺪرة ‪ 2000‬وات‬
‫♦ ﻋﺪد ‪ 1 /‬ﺟﻬﺎز ﺗﺴﺨﻴﻦ آﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻰ ﻗﺪرة ‪ 1200‬وات‬
‫ﻃﻠﻤﺒﺎت ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﻤﻮﺗﻮر آﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻰ‪:‬‬ ‫•‬
‫♦ ﻃﻠﻤﺒﺔ ﺿﺦ ﻣﻴﺎﻩ ﺑﻘﺪرة ‪ 1.6‬ك‪.‬وات‬
‫♦ ﻃﻠﻤﺒﺔ رى ﺣﺪاﺋﻖ ﺑﻘﺪرة ‪ 2.8‬ك‪.‬وات‬
‫♦ ﻃﻠﻤﺒﺔ آﺴﺢ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﺪروم ﺑﻘﺪرة ‪ 0.6‬ك‪.‬وات‬
‫اﻟﺴﺨﺎﻧﺎت وﻣﺎ ﻳﻤﺎﺛﻠﻬﺎ‪:‬‬ ‫•‬
‫♦ ﻋﺪد ‪ 2 /‬ﺳﺨﺎن ﻣﻦ اﻟﻨﻮع اﻟﺬى ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮًا ﺑﺴﻌﺔ ‪ 3‬ك‪.‬وات‬
‫♦ ﻋﺪد ‪ 1 /‬ﺳﺨﺎن ﻣﻦ اﻟﻨﻮع اﻟﺬى ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮًا ﺑﺴﻌﺔ ‪ 2‬ك‪.‬وات‬
‫♦ ﻋﺪد ‪ 1 /‬ﺳﺨﺎن ﻟﺤﻈﻰ ﺑﺴﻌﺔ ‪ 6‬ك‪.‬وات‬
‫♦ ﺟﻬﺎز ﺳﺨﺎن ﻟﻠﺘﺴﺨﻴﻦ ﻟﺠﻬﺎز اﻟﺠﺎآﻮزى ﺑﺴﻌﺔ ‪ 5‬ك‪.‬وات‬
‫♦ ﺟﻬﺎز ﺳﺨﺎن ﻟﻠﺘﺴﺨﻴﻦ ﺑﻐﺮﻓﺔ اﻟﺴﺎوﻧﺎ ﺑﺴﻌﺔ ‪ 4‬ك‪.‬وات‬
‫‪ 9‬ﻣﻦ ﺟﺪول ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻼت اﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ اﻟﻌﻤﻮد اﻟﺨﺎص ﺑﻮﺣﺪة ﺳﻜﻨﻴﺔ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ‪:‬‬
‫)‪ (1‬اﻹﻧﺎرة‪:‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺴﺐ ‪ ٪66‬ﻣﻦ أﺣﻤﺎل اﻹﻧﺎرة‬
‫‪ 9.9 = 15000 × ٪66‬ك‪.‬وات‬
‫)‪ (2‬اﻟﻤﺂﺧﺬ‪:‬‬
‫ﺣﻤﻞ داﺋﺮة اﻟﻤﺄﺧﺬ اﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻷﻣﺒﻴﺮ‪:‬‬
‫‪40‬‬
‫× ‪ 6 = 5 × 2‬أﻣﺒﻴﺮ‬ ‫‪+2‬‬
‫‪100‬‬
‫ﺣﻤﻞ اﻟﺪاﺋﺮة اﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻴﻠﻮوات = ‪ 1.122 = 0.85 × 220 × 6‬ك‪.‬وات ﺑﺎﻋﺘﺒﺎر ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻗﺪرة ‪0.85‬‬
‫اﻟﺤﻤﻞ اﻟﻜﻠﻰ ﻟﻠﻤﺄﺧﺬ = ‪ 33.66 = 30 × 1.122‬ك‪.‬وات‬
‫)‪ (3‬اﻷﺟﻬﺰة اﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪:‬‬

‫‪ ٪100‬ﻣــﻦ إﺟﻤﺎﻟﻰ اﻟﺤﻤــﻞ اﻟﻜﺎﻣــﻞ ﻟﻤﺠﻤــﻮع اﻷﺟﻬـﺰة ﺣﺘﻰ ﺳﻌﺔ ‪ 10‬أﻣﺒﻴﺮ ])‪ 1.87‬ك‪.‬وات( ﻋﻠﻰ أﺳﺎس ‪ 0.85‬ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻗﺪرة[‬
‫‪ ٪50 +‬ﻣﻦ اﻟﺤﻤﻞ ﻟﻸﺟﻬﺰة اﻟﺘﻰ ﺣﻤﻠﻬﺎ ﻳﺰﻳﺪ ﻋﻦ ‪ 10‬أﻣﺒﻴﺮ‬
‫)‪[1.9 × 3 + 2.6 × 2 ] ٪ 50 + (1.5 × 2 + 1.4 + 0.746 × 1.2‬‬
‫‪50‬‬
‫]‪10.75=5.4+5.3=[5.7+5.2‬ك‪.‬و‬ ‫= )‪+ (3 + 1.4 + 0.9‬‬
‫‪100‬‬
‫‪- 145 -‬‬

‫‪st‬‬
‫)‪ (4‬أﺟﻬﺰة اﻟﻄﻬﻰ‪:‬‬

‫‪ ٪100‬ﻣﻦ اﻟﺤﻤﻞ اﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻟﻸﺟﻬﺰة ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ 10‬أﻣﺒﻴﺮ ‪ ٪30 +‬ﻣﻦ اﻟﺤﻤﻞ اﻟﻤﻘﻨﻦ اﻟﺰاﺋﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ 10‬أﻣﺒﻴﺮ )‪ 2.2‬ك‪.‬وات ﻋﻠﻰ أﺳﺎس‬
‫ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻗﺪرة واﺣﺪ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ(‪.‬‬
‫= )‪ 7.00 = (6) ٪30 + (1.2 + 2.00 × 2‬ك‪.‬وات‬
‫)‪ (5‬اﻟﻤﺤﺮآﺎت اﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪:‬‬

‫‪ ٪100‬ﻣﻦ اﻟﺤﻤــﻞ اﻟﻜﺎﻣــﻞ ﻷآﺒــﺮ ﻣﺤــﺮك ‪ ٪50 +‬ﻣﻦ اﻟﺤﻤــﻞ ﻟﺒﺎﻗـﻰ اﻟﻤﺤﺮآﺎت = ‪= [0.6 + 1.6 ] ٪50 + [2.8] ٪100‬‬
‫‪ 3.9‬ك‪.‬وات‬
‫)‪ (6‬اﻟﺴﺨﺎﻧﺎت وﻣﺎ ﻣﺎﺛﻠﻬﺎ‪:‬‬
‫)‪ (a‬اﻟﺴﺨﺎﻧﺎت اﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻣﺘﻘﻄﻌﺔ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪:‬‬

‫‪ ٪100‬ﻣﻦ اﻟﺤﻤﻞ اﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻷآﺒﺮ ﺳﺨﺎن ‪ ٪100 +‬ﻣﻦ اﻟﺤﻤﻞ اﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻟﻠﺴﺨﺎن اﻟﺬى ﻳﻠﻰ أآﺒﺮ ﺳﺨﺎن ‪ ٪ 25 +‬ﻣﻦ اﻟﺤﻤﻞ اﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‬
‫ﻟﺒﺎﻗﻰ اﻟﺴﺎﺧﺎﻧﺎت‬
‫= ‪ 12 = (4) ٪25 + 5 + 6‬ك‪.‬وات‬
‫)‪ (b‬اﻟﺴﺨﺎﻧﺎت اﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮة اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪:‬‬

‫‪ ٪100‬ﻣﻦ اﻟﺤﻤﻞ اﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻓﻰ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ اﻟﺤﺎﻻت‬
‫= ‪ 8 = 2 + 3 × 2‬ك‪.‬وات‬
‫‪ 9‬اﻹﺟﻤﺎﻟﻴﺎت‪:‬‬
‫)‪6‬ب(‬ ‫)‪6‬أ(‬ ‫)‪(5‬‬ ‫)‪(4‬‬ ‫)‪(3‬‬ ‫)‪(2‬‬ ‫)‪(1‬‬

‫= ‪ 85.21‬ك‪.‬وات‬
‫‪8‬‬ ‫‪+12‬‬ ‫‪+3.9‬‬ ‫‪+7‬‬ ‫‪+10.75‬‬ ‫‪+33.66‬‬ ‫‪+ 9.9‬‬
‫‪ 9‬ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪:‬‬
‫إذا ﺗﻢ ﺟﻤﻊ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ اﻷﺣﻤﺎل ﺟﻤﻌ ًﺎ ﺟﺒﺮﻳ ًﺎ ﻧﺠﺪهﺎ ‪ 137.722‬ك‪.‬وات ﻓﻴﻜﻮن‪:‬‬
‫‪85.21‬‬
‫= ‪٪61.87‬‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻞ اﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ اﻹﺟﻤﺎﻟﻰ )‪= (diversity factor‬‬
‫‪137.722‬‬
‫‪ (170‬ﻣﺒﻨﻰ ﺳﻜﻨﻰ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺘﻪ ‪ 350‬ﻣﺘﺮ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﻓﻰ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻄﺔ اﻗﺘﺼﺎدﻳﺔ وﻳﺘﻜﻮن ﻣﻦ ﺳﺘﺔ ﻃﻮاﺑﻖ؟‬
‫اﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮب‪:‬‬
‫ﺣﺴﺎب اﻟﺤﻤﻞ اﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻬﺬا اﻟﻤﺒﻨﻰ ﻃﺒﻘًﺎ ﻟﻠﻜﻮد اﻟﻤﺼﺮى‬
‫‪ 9‬ﻣﻦ ﺟﺪول اﻟﻄﻠﺐ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺤﻤﻞ ﺑﻮﺣﺪات اﻟﻤﺒﺎﻧﻲ اﻟﺴﻜﻨﻴﺔ اﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻘﻞ ارﺗﻔﺎﻋﻬﺎ ﻋﻦ ‪ 15‬ﻃﺎﺑﻘ ًﺎ‬
‫‪ o‬اﻟﺤﻤﻞ اﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻋﻠﻰ أﺳﺎس إﺳﻜﺎن ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ = ‪ 4‬ك‪.‬ف‪.‬أ ‪ 100 /‬ﻣﺘﺮ‬
‫‪350‬‬
‫× ‪ 6‬دور × ‪ 84 = 4‬ك‪.‬ف‪.‬أ‬ ‫اﻟﺤﻤﻞ اﻷﻗﺼﻰ =‬
‫‪100‬‬
‫‪- 146 -‬‬

‫‪st‬‬
‫‪ (171‬ﻣﺒﻨﻰ ﺳﻜﻨﻰ ﺗﺠﺎرى ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ‪ 600‬م‪ 2‬ﻋﺒﺎرة ﻋﻦ‪:‬‬

‫• دور ﺑﺪروم ﺟﺮاج وﺧﺪﻣﺎت‬
‫• ﻋﺪد ‪ 2 /‬دور )أرﺿﻰ ‪ +‬ﻣﻴﺰاﻧﻴﻦ( ﺗﺠﺎرى‬
‫• ﻋﺪد ‪ 16 /‬دور ﻣﺘﻜﺮر ﺑﻜﻞ دور ﻋﺪد‪ 5/‬ﺷﻘﺔ‬
‫• ﻋﺪد ‪ 3 /‬ﻣﺼﻌﺪ آﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻰ آﻞ ﻣﻨﻬﻢ ‪ 15‬ك‪.‬وات‬
‫• ﻣﺤﻄــﺔ ﻃﻠﻤﺒــﺎت ﻣﻴﺎﻩ ﻟﺮﻓــﻊ اﻟﻤﻴﺎﻩ إﻟﻰ اﻟﺨﺰان اﻟﻌﻠﻮى ﺑﻬﺎ ﻋﺪد‪ 3/‬ﻃﻠﻤﺒﺔ رﻓﻊ ﻣﻴﺎﻩ ﻗﺪرة ‪ 17.5‬ﺣﺼﺎن وآﻔﺎءة ‪ ٪88‬أﺣﺪهﻤﺎ‬
‫اﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻣﺤﻄﺔ ﻃﻠﻤﺒﺔ آﺴﺢ ﻣﻴﺎﻩ ﻣﻦ اﻟﺒﺪروم ﺑﻬﺎ ﻋﺪد‪ 2 /‬ﻃﻠﻤﺒﺔ ﻗﺪرة ‪ 6.5‬ﺣﺼﺎن وآﻔﺎءة ‪ ٪87‬أﺣﺪهﻤﺎ اﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻴﺔ‬
‫اﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮب‪:‬‬
‫ﺣﺴﺎب ﺳﻌﺔ اﻟﻤﺤﻮل )اﻟﻤﺤﻮﻻت( اﻟﻼزﻣﺔ ﻟﺘﻐﺬﻳﺔ اﻟﻤﺒﻨﻰ ﻃﺒﻘًﺎ ﻟﻠﻜﻮد اﻟﻤﺼﺮى‬
‫ﻳﺮﺟﻊ ﺟﺪول اﻟﻄﻠﺐ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺤﻤﻞ ﺑﻮﺣﺪات اﻟﻤﺒﺎﻧﻲ اﻟﺴﻜﻨﻴﺔ اﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺰﻳﺪ ارﺗﻔﺎﻋﻬﺎ ﻋﻦ ‪ 15‬ﻃﺎﺑﻘ ًﺎ‬ ‫‪9‬‬
‫‪ o‬ﻃﻠﺐ اﻟﺤﻤﻞ ﻟﻜﻞ ‪100‬م‪ 2‬ﺳﻜﻨﻰ ‪ 10 – 8‬ك‪.‬ف‪.‬أ‬
‫‪ o‬ﻃﻠﺐ اﻟﺤﻤﻞ ﻟﻜﻞ ‪100‬م‪ 2‬ﺗﺠﺎرى ‪ 12‬ك‪.‬ف‪.‬أ‬
‫= ‪ 12‬ك‪.‬ف‪.‬أ‬ ‫‪ 2) × 600‬ك‪.‬ف‪.‬أ ‪ 100 /‬م‪(2‬‬ ‫‪-----‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬
‫)‪ (1‬اﻟﺒﺪروم ﺑﻤﺴﺎﺣﺔ ‪ 600‬م‬
‫= ‪ 144‬ك‪.‬ف‪.‬أ‬ ‫‪ 12) × 1200‬ك‪.‬ف‪.‬أ ‪ 100 /‬م‪(2‬‬ ‫‪-----‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬
‫)‪ (2‬اﻟﺘﺠﺎرى ﻋﺪد‪ 2/‬دور × ‪ 600‬م‪ 1200 = 2‬م‬
‫= ‪ 960‬ك‪.‬ف‪.‬أ‬ ‫‪ 10) × 9600‬ك‪.‬ف‪.‬أ ‪ 100 /‬م‪(2‬‬ ‫‪-----‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬
‫)‪ (3‬اﻟﺴﻜﻨﻰ ﻋﺪد‪ 16/‬دور × ‪ 600‬م‪ 9600 = 2‬م‬
‫= ‪ 12‬ك‪.‬ف‪.‬أ‬ ‫)‪ (4‬اﻟﻤﺪاﺧﻞ ‪ +‬اﻟﺴﻼﻟﻢ ‪ +‬ﻏﺮف اﻟﺴﻄﺢ )ﻳﻤﻜﻦ أﺧﺬهﺎ ﺟﻤﻴﻌًﺎ ﻣﺜﻞ اﻟﺒﺪروم(‬
‫وﺑﺬﻟﻚ ﻳﻜﻮن إﺟﻤﺎﻟﻰ أﺣﻤﺎل اﻹﻧﺎرة و اﻟﺒﺮاﻳﺰ و اﻟﺘﻜﻴﻔﺎت و اﻟﺴﺨﺎﻧﺎت و اﻷﺟﻬﺰة ‪:‬‬
‫= ‪ 1128‬ك‪.‬ف‪.‬أ‬ ‫‪12 + 960 + 12 + 144‬‬ ‫‪-----‬‬
‫)‪ (5‬أﺣﻤﺎل اﻟﻘﻮى اﻷﺧﺮى‪:‬‬
‫= ‪ 53‬ك‪.‬ف‪.‬أ‬ ‫‪ 15 × 3‬ك‪.‬وات ‪) 0.85 /‬ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻞ اﻟﻘﺪرة(‬ ‫‪-----‬‬ ‫)‪ 3 (a‬ﻣﺼﻌﺪ‬
‫= ‪ 53‬ك‪.‬ف‪.‬أ‬ ‫‪) 0.85 / 0.746 × 17.5 × 2‬ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻞ اﻟﻘﺪرة( × ‪) 0.88‬اﻟﻜﻔﺎءة(‬ ‫‪-----‬‬ ‫)‪ 2 (b‬ﻃﻠﻤﺒﺔ ﻣﻴﺎﻩ‬
‫= ‪ 6.6‬ك‪.‬ف‪.‬أ‬ ‫‪ 6.5‬ﺣﺼﺎن × ‪)0.85 / 0.746‬ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻞ اﻟﻘﺪرة( × ‪)0.87‬اﻟﻜﻔﺎءة(‬ ‫‪-----‬‬ ‫)‪ 1 (c‬ﻃﻠﻤﺒﺔ آﺴﺢ ﻣﻴﺎﻩ‬
‫وﺑﺬﻟﻚ ﻳﻜﻮن إﺟﻤﺎﻟﻰ أﺣﻤﺎل اﻟﻘﻮى اﻷﺧﺮى‪:‬‬
‫≅ ‪ 95‬ك‪.‬ف‪.‬أ‬ ‫‪6.6 + 35 + 53‬‬ ‫‪-----‬‬
‫‪ 9‬ﻓﺈذا ﻣﺎ أﺿﻴﻔﺖ أﺣﻤﺎل اﻹﻧﺎرة اﻹﻧﺎرة و اﻟﺒﺮاﻳﺰ و اﻟﺘﻜﻴﻔﺎت و اﻟﺴﺨﺎﻧﺎت و اﻷﺟﻬﺰة آﺎﻣﻠﺔ دون ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻼت ﺗﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ إﻟﻰ أﺣﻤﺎل اﻟﻘﻮى‬
‫ﺗﺼﺒﺢ اﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ اﻹﺟﻤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻄﻠﺐ‬
‫= ‪ 1223 = 95 + 1128‬ك‪.‬ف‪.‬أ‬
‫‪ 9‬ﺳﻌﺔ اﻟﻤﺤﻮل ﻋﻠﻰ أﺳﺎس أن اﻟﺘﺤﻤﻴﻞ ‪ ٪80‬ﻣﻦ اﻟﺴﻌﺔ‬

‫= ‪ 1528.75 = 0.8 / 1223‬ك‪.‬ف‪.‬أ‬
‫= ‪ 2000‬ك‪.‬ف‪.‬أ‬ ‫‪ 9‬وﺗﻜﻮن ﺳﻌﺔ اﻟﻤﺤﻮل اﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ هﻰ‬
‫‪- 147 -‬‬

‫‪st‬‬
‫‪ 9‬أﻣﺎ إذا ﺳﻤﺤﺖ ﻇﺮوف اﻟﻤﻜﺎن وﺷﺮآﺔ ﺗﻮزﻳﻊ اﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎء وﻧﺴﺒﺔ اﻹﺷﻐﺎل ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺒﻨﻰ ﺑﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﺗﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﻓﺈن ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﻪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ أﺣﻤﺎل اﻹﻧﺎرة‬
‫أﻣﺎ أﺣﻤﺎل اﻟﻘﻮى ﻓﻼ ﻳﻄﺒﻖ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻼت ﺗﺒﺎﻳﻦ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 9‬ﻓﺈذا ﻣﺎ اﻓﺘﺮض ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﺗﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﻗﻴﻤﺘﻪ ‪ ٪68‬ﻳﻜﻮن اﻟﺤﻤﻞ اﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮب‬

‫= ‪ 862 = 95 + ٪68 × 1128‬ك‪.‬ف‪.‬أ‬
‫‪ 9‬ﺳﻌﺔ اﻟﻤﺤﻮل ﻋﻠﻰ أﺳﺎس أن اﻟﺘﺤﻤﻴﻞ ‪ ٪80‬ﻣﻦ اﻟﺴﻌﺔ‬

‫= ‪ 1077 = 0.8 / 862‬ك‪.‬ف‪.‬أ‬
‫= ‪ 1500‬ك‪.‬ف‪.‬أ‬ ‫‪ 9‬وﺗﻜﻮن ﺳﻌﺔ اﻟﻤﺤﻮل اﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ هﻰ‬
‫‪ (172‬ﻣﺤﻮل ﺳﻌﺘﻪ اﻻﺳﻤﻴﺔ ‪ 1250‬ك‪.‬ف‪.‬أ‪ ،‬و اﻟﺤﻤﻞ اﻟﻤﻌﺘﺎد ﻟﻬﺬا اﻟﻤﺤﻮل هﻮ ‪750‬ك‪.‬ف‪.‬أ‪ ،‬ﻓﻤﺎ هــﻮ أﻗﺼﻰ ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ زاﺋﺪ ﻣﺴﻤــﻮح ﺑﻪ ﻟﻤﺪة أرﺑﻌﺔ‬
‫ﺳﺎﻋﺎت‪ ،‬و ذﻟﻚ ﻓﻲ درﺟــﺔ ﺣــﺮارة ‪ °30‬ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ؟‬
‫‪ 9‬ﻣﻦ اﻟﺸﻜﻞ )‪ (1-4‬ﻓﻰ اﻟﻜﻮد اﻟﻤﺼﺮى‪ :‬ﻣﻨﺤﻨﻴﺎت اﻟﺘﺤﻤﻴﻞ اﻟﺰاﺋﺪ ﻟﻤﺤﻮﻻت‬

‫اﻟﺘﻮزﻳﻊ ﻓﻲ درﺟﺔ ﺣﺮارة ‪ 30‬درﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ‬
‫‪750‬‬
‫= ‪k1‬‬ ‫‪= 0.6 ; t =4 h‬‬
‫‪1250‬‬
‫‪∴k2 =1.19‬‬
‫وﺑﺬﻟﻚ ﻳﻜﻮن أﻗﺼﻲ ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ زاﺋﺪ ﻣﺴﻤﻮح ﺑﻪ ﻟﻤﺪة أرﺑﻌﺔ ﺳﺎﻋﺎت هﻮ‪:‬‬ ‫‪9‬‬
‫‪S2 = k2. SN = 1.19 * 1250 = 1487.5 kVA‬‬
‫‪ (173‬اﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮب ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺳﻌﺔ ﻣﺤﻮل ﺗﻮزﻳﻊ ﺑﻨﻈﺎم ﺗﺒﺮﻳﺪ ‪ ONAN‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻠﻪ ﺑﺤﻤﻞ ﻗﻴﻤﺘﻪ ‪ 450‬ك‪.‬ف‪.‬أ ﻟﻤﺪة أرﺑﻊ ﺳﺎﻋﺎت‪ ،‬وﺣﻤﻞ ﻗﻴﻤﺘﻪ ‪ 250‬ك‪.‬ف‪.‬أ‬
‫ﻟﻤﺪة اﻟﻌﺸﺮﻳﻦ ﺳﺎﻋﺔ اﻟﺒﺎﻗﻴﺔ‬
‫‪S1= 250 kVA , t1 = 20h‬‬ ‫‪S2= 450 kVA , t2 = 4h‬‬ ‫‪S2/ S1 = 450 / 250 = 1.8 = k2 / k1‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ اﻟﺸﻜــﻞ )‪ (1-4‬ﺑﺮﺳﻢ اﻟﺨﻂ ‪ 1.8 = k2 / k1‬وﻳﻤﺮ ﺑﻨﻘﻄﺔ اﻷﺻﻞ ; وﺗﻘﺎﻃﻌﻪ ﻣﻊ اﻟﻤﻨﺤﻨﻰ ‪ ، t = 4h‬ﻓﺈن اﻟﺴﻌﺎت اﻷﺳﻤﻴﺔ ‪ k2 ، k1‬ﺗﻜﻮن‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﻨﺤﻮ اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻰ‪k1 = 0.633 , k2 = 1.14:‬‬
‫وﺣﻴﺚ أن‪ S 2 = k 2 .S N :‬أو ‪ S1 = k1 . S N‬ﺗﻜﻮن‪:‬‬
‫‪S‬‬ ‫‪S‬‬
‫‪SN = 1 = 2‬‬
‫‪K1 K 2‬‬
‫‪450‬‬ ‫‪250‬‬
‫= ‪SN‬‬ ‫=‬ ‫‪= 394.9 KVA‬‬
‫‪1.14 0.633‬‬
‫وﻟﺬا ﻓﺈن اﻟﻤﺤﻮل اﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﺐ هﻮ ﻣﺤﻮل ﺳﻌﺘﻪ ‪400‬ك‪.‬ف‪.‬أ‪.‬‬
‫‪- 148 -‬‬

‫‪st‬‬
‫‪ (174‬ﻣﺎ هﻰ اﻷﺣﻤﺎل اﻟﺘﻘﺪﻳﺮﻳﺔ ﻟﻸﺟﻬﺰة اﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ اﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻴﺔ ﺷﺎﺋﻌﺔ اﻻﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎل ﻣﺜﻞ‬

‫• ﻣﺤﻤﺮ اﻟﺨﺒﺰ‬
‫• اﻟﻤﻜﻮاة‬
‫• اﻟﻔﺮن اﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ‬
‫• ﻣﺠﻔﻒ اﻟﺸﻌﺮ‬
‫• اﻟﺜﻼﺟﺔ‬
‫• ﺟﻬﺎز اﻟﺮادﻳﻮ‬
‫• ﺟﻬﺎز اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮن‬
‫• ﻣﻜﻨﺴﺔ اﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎء‬
‫• دﻓﺎﻳﺔ اﻟﺤﺠﺮة‬
‫• ﻏﺴﺎﻟﺔ آﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ‬
‫• ﻏﺴﺎﻟﺔ آﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺴﺨﺎن‬
‫• ﻣﺠﻔﻒ اﻟﻐﺴﻴﻞ‬
‫• ﻏﻼﻳﺔ ﻣﻴﺎﻩ‬
‫• ‪Projector‬‬
‫• ﻃﺎﺑﻌﺔ ‪Printer -‬‬
‫• ﺣﺎﺳﺐ أﻟﻰ‪Computer -‬‬
‫• ﺳﺨﺎﻧﺎت اﻟﺤﻤﺎم‬
‫اﻟﻘﺪرة )وات(‬ ‫اﻟﺠﻬﺎز‬ ‫اﻟﻘﺪرة )وات(‬ ‫اﻟﺠﻬﺎز‬

‫‪100‬‬ ‫ﻏﺴﺎﻟﺔ آﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪500‬‬ ‫ﻣﺤﻤﺮ اﻟﺨﺒﺰ‬
‫‪1500-700‬‬ ‫ﻣﺠﻔﻒ اﻟﻐﺴﻴﻞ‬ ‫‪1000-500‬‬ ‫اﻟﻤﻜﻮاة‬
‫‪100‬‬ ‫ﻏﻼﻳﺔ ﻣﻴﺎﻩ‬ ‫‪3000-1500‬‬ ‫اﻟﻔﺮن اﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ‬
‫‪50-75‬‬ ‫‪Projector‬‬ ‫‪500‬‬ ‫ﻣﺠﻔﻒ اﻟﺸﻌﺮ‬
‫‪400‬‬ ‫ﻃﺎﺑﻌﺔ ‪Printer-‬‬ ‫‪300-200‬‬ ‫ﺟﻬﺎز اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮن‬
‫‪2000‬‬ ‫ﺣﺎﺳﺐ أﻟﻰ‪Computer -‬‬ ‫‪2500-150‬‬ ‫ﻣﻜﻨﺴﺔ اﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎء‬
‫ﺳﺨﺎﻧﺎت اﻟﺤﻤﺎم‬ ‫‪300‬‬ ‫دﻓﺎﻳﺔ اﻟﺤﺠﺮة‬
‫‪3000-2000‬‬ ‫‪ 15‬ﻟﺘﺮ‬ ‫‪6300‬‬ ‫ﻏﺴﺎﻟﺔ آﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺴﺨﺎن‬
‫‪6000-4000‬‬ ‫‪ 60‬ﻟﺘﺮ‬ ‫‪300-100‬‬ ‫اﻟﺜﻼﺟﺔ‬
‫‪6000-4000‬‬ ‫‪ 80‬ﻟﺘﺮ‬ ‫‪100-30‬‬ ‫ﺟﻬﺎز اﻟﺮادﻳﻮ‬
‫‪- 149 -‬‬

‫‪st‬‬
‫‪ (175‬إﻟﻰ آﻢ ﺗﻨﻘﺴﻢ ﻣﺼﺎﻋﺪ اﻟﺮآﺎب؟‬
‫وﺗﻨﻘﺴﻢ ﻣﺼﺎﻋﺪ اﻟﺮآﺎب إﻟﻰ أرﺑﻌﺔ أﻗﺴﺎم رﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫‪9‬‬

‫)‪ (1‬ﻣﺼﺎﻋﺪ ﻟﻸﻏﺮاض اﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ ﻓﻰ اﻟﻤﺒﺎﻧﻰ اﻟﺘﺠﺎرﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫)‪ (2‬ﻣﺼﺎﻋﺪ اﻟﻤﺒﺎﻧﻰ اﻟﺴﻜﻨﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫)‪ (3‬ﻣﺼﺎﻋﺪ ﻓﻰ اﻟﻤﺒﺎﻧﻰ اﻟﻤﺆﺳﺴﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫)‪ (4‬ﻣﺼﺎﻋﺪ ﻓﻰ اﻟﻤﺨﺎزن‪.‬‬
‫‪ (176‬ﻣﻤﺎ ﺗﺘﻜﻮن ﻣﺼﺎﻋﺪ اﻟﺮآﺎب؟‬
‫‪ 9‬ﺗﻜﻮن ﻣﺼﺎﻋﺪ اﻟﺮآﺎب إﻣﺎ ﻣﺠﺮورة أو ﺗﻌﻤﻞ هﻴﺪروﻟﻴﻜﻴﺎ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻜﻮن اﻟﻤﺼﻌﺪ اﻟﺬي ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﻤﺤﺮك آﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﻦ‪ :‬ﺷﻜﻞ رﻗﻢ )‪(2-1‬‬ ‫‪o‬‬
‫)‪ (1‬اﻟﻜﺎﺑﻴﻨﺔ‪.‬‬
‫)‪ (2‬آﺎﺑﻼت اﻟﺠﺮ‪.‬‬
‫)‪ (3‬ﻣﺎآﻴﻨﺎت اﻟﻤﺼﻌﺪ‪.‬‬
‫)‪ (4‬ﻣﻌﺪات اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‪.‬‬
‫)‪ (5‬ﺛﻘﻞ اﻟﻤﻮازﻧﺔ‪.‬‬
‫)‪(6‬‬
‫)‪ (7‬دﻻﺋﻞ اﻟﺤﺮآﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻜﻮن اﻟﻤﺼﻌﺪ اﻟﺬي ﻳﻌﻤﻞ هﻴﺪروﻟﻴﻜﻴ ًﺎ ﻣﻦ‪ :‬ﺷﻜﻞ رﻗﻢ )‪(7-1‬‬ ‫‪o‬‬
‫)‪ (1‬ﻣﻀﺨﺔ ﻟﺪﻓﻊ‪.‬‬

‫)‪ (2‬ﺧﺰان اﻟﺰﻳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫اﻟﻤﻜﺒﺲ اﻟﻬﻴﺪروﻟﻴﻜﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫) ‪(3‬‬
‫‪- 150 -‬‬

‫‪st‬‬
‫‪ (177‬ﻣﺎ هﻰ اﻧﻮاع اﻟﺠﺮ اﻟﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻓﻰ اﻟﻤﺼﺎﻋﺪ اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﻤﺤﺮك آﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻲ ؟‬

‫‪ 9‬أوﻻ‪ :‬ﻓﻰ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻣﺎآﻴﻨﺔ اﻟﻤﺼﻌﺪ ﻣﺮآﺒﺔ أﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﻤﺒﻨﻰ‬

‫)"ﺷﻜﻞ )‪) (1-1‬أ(‬ ‫)‪(Single-wrap traction machine‬‬ ‫اﻟﻨﻮع اﻷول‪ :‬ﻧﻈﺎم ﻣﺰود ﺑﻤﺎآﻴﻨﺔ ﺟﺮ أﺣﺎدﻳﺔ اﻟﻠﻔﺔ‬
‫• ﻋﻨــﺪ ﻣــﺮور اﻟﺤﺒــﺎل ﻓــﻮق اﻟﻄﺎرة اﻟﺘﻰ ﺗﺤﺘﻮى ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺠﺎرى ﻟﻬﺬﻩ اﻟﺤﺒﺎل‪ ،‬ﻓــﺈن ﻗــﺪرة اﻟﺮﻓــﻊ ﺗﺘــﻢ ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ اﻟﻄﺎرة ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼل اﻟﺤﺒﺎل‬
‫ﻓﻰ ﻣﺠﺎرﻳﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺣﻴــﺚ ﺗﺴﻤﻰ اﻟﺒﻜـﺮة )‪" (S‬ﺑﻜـﺮة اﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ" )‪ (Deflector sheave‬واﻟﺒﻜـﺮة )‪" (T‬ﺑﺒﻜﺮة اﻟﺠﺮ" )‪.(Traction sheave‬‬
‫اﻟﻨﻮع اﻟﺜﺎﻧﻰ‪ :‬ﻧﻈﺎم ﻣﺰود ﺑﻤﺎآﻴﻨﺔ ﺟﺮ ﺛﻨﺎﺋﻴﺔ اﻟﻠﻔﺔ ﺑﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ ‪") (Double-wrap traction machine) 1:1‬ﺷﻜﻞ )‪) (1-1‬ب(‬
‫• اﻟﺤﺒﺎل ﻣﻠﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻜﺮة اﻟﺠﺮ ﻗﺎدﻣﺔ ﻣﻦ اﻟﻜﺎﺑﻴﻨﺔ ﺛﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺒﻜﺮة اﻟﺜﺎﻧﻮﻳﺔ )‪ (S‬وهﻰ ﺑﻜﺮة ﻧﻘﻞ ﺣﺮآﺔ )‪ (Idle sheave‬ﺛﻢ ﻣﺮة أﺧﺮى ﺣﻮل‬
‫ﺑﻜﺮة اﻟﺠﺮ )‪ (T‬ﺛﻢ إﻟﻰ اﻟﺒﻜﺮة )‪ (S‬ﺛﻢ إﻟﻰ ﺛﻘﻞ اﻟﻤﻮازﻧﺔ‪ ،‬وﻳﻄﻠﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ اﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻖ اﻟﻤﺒﻴﻨﺔ ﺑﺄﻧﻬﺎ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺑﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ ‪ ،1:1‬وﻳﺤﻘﻖ ﻧﻈﺎم‬
‫اﻟﻤﺎآﻴﻨﺔ ﺛﻨﺎﺋﻴﺔ اﻟﻠﻔﺔ )‪ (Double-wrap‬ﻗﻮة ﺷﺪ أآﺒﺮ ﻣﻦ اﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ أﺣﺎدﻳﺔ اﻟﻠﻔﺔ‪ ،‬وﻟﺬا ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪم هﺬﻩ اﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻓﻰ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ اﻟﺘﺮآﻴﺒﺎت ذات‬
‫اﻟﺴﺮﻋﺎت اﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫اﻟﻨﻮع اﻟﺜﺎﻟﺚ‪ :‬ﻧﻈﺎم ﻣﺰود ﺑﻤﺎآﻴﻨﺔ ﺟﺮ ﺛﻨﺎﺋﻴﺔ اﻟﻠﻔﺔ ﺑﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ ‪") (Double-wrap traction machine) 2:1‬ﺷﻜﻞ )‪) (1-1‬ﺟ(‬
‫• ﻧﻈﺎم اﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻖ ﺑﻨﺴﺒﺔ ‪ 1 : 2‬اﻟﺬى ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪم ﻓﻰ اﻟﺴﺮﻋﺎت اﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ )ﻣﻦ ‪ 2.5‬إﻟﻰ ‪ 3.5‬م‪/‬ث( وذى اﻟﻘﺪرة اﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ وﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪم ﻓﻴﻪ‬
‫ﻣﺎآﻴﻨﺎت ﺑﺪون ﺗﺮوس آﻤﺎ ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪم أﻳﻀًﺎ ﻓﻰ اﻟﻤﺼﺎﻋﺪ ذات اﻟﺤﻤﻮﻟﺔ اﻟﺜﻘﻴﻠﺔ واﻟﺴﺮﻋﺎت اﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 9‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺎ‪ :‬ﻓﻰ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻣﺎآﻴﻨﺔ اﻟﻤﺼﻌﺪ ﻣﺮآﺒﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﺪروم‬

‫اﻟﻨﻮع اﻷول‪ :‬ﻧﻈﺎم ﻣﺰود ﺑﻤﺎآﻴﻨﺔ ﺟﺮ ﺛﻨﺎﺋﻴﺔ اﻟﻠﻔﺔ ﺑﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ ‪") (Double-wrap traction machine) 1:1‬ﺷﻜﻞ )‪) (1-1‬د(‬
‫• ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ اﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻖ ﺑﻨﺴﺒﺔ ‪ 1:1‬وﻟﻜﻦ ﻣﺎآﻴﻨﺔ وﺑﻜﺮة اﻟﺠﺮ ﻣﺮآﺒــﺘﺎن ﻓﻰ ﻏﺮﻓــﺔ ﻣﺎآﻴﻨــﺎت ﺑـﺒـﺪروم اﻟﻤﺒﻨﻰ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﻌﻜﺲ ﻣﻦ اﻟﻨﻈﺎم اﻟﻤﺒﻴﻦ ﻓﻰ )أ‬
‫‪ ،‬ب ‪ ،‬ج( ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﻜﻮﻧﺎ ﻓﻰ ﻏﺮﻓﺔ اﻟﺴﻄﺢ‪.‬‬
‫اﻟﻨﻮع اﻟﺜﺎﻧﻰ‪ :‬ﻧﻈﺎم ﻣﺰود ﺑﻤﺎآﻴﻨﺔ ﺟﺮ ﺛﻨﺎﺋﻴﺔ اﻟﻠﻔﺔ ﺑﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ ‪") (Double-wrap traction machine) 2:1‬ﺷﻜﻞ )‪) (1-1‬ه(‬
‫• ﺗﻜﻮن ﻣﺎآﻴﻨﺔ وﺑﻜﺮة اﻟﺠﺮ ﻣﺮآﺒﺘﺎن ﺑﻐﺮﻓﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﺪروم وﺗﻜﻮن ﻓﻴﻪ اﻟﺤﺒﺎل ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ ﻧﺴﺒﻴًﺎ وﻳﻤﻜﻦ اﺳﺘﺨﺪام هﺬا اﻟﻨﻈﺎم ﻓﻰ اﻟﻤﺒﺎﻧﻰ اﻟﺴﻜﻨﻴﺔ‬
‫واﻹدارﻳﺔ ذات ‪ 10‬ﻃﻮاﺑﻖ ﻓﺄآﺜﺮ وﺳﺮﻋﺎت ﺣﺘﻰ ‪2‬م‪/‬ث وﻟﺤﻤﻮﻟﺔ آﺒﺎﺋﻦ ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ 2000‬آﺠﻢ‪.‬‬
‫)‪(m/c room less‬‬ ‫‪ 9‬ﺛﺎﻟﺜﺎ‪ :‬ﻓﻰ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻣﺎآﻴﻨﺔ اﻟﻤﺼﻌﺪ ﻣﺮآﺒﺔ ﻓﻮق اﻟﺼﺎﻋﺪة ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮة‬
‫• ﻳﻮﺟــﺪ ﻧﻈﺎم ﺣﺪﻳﺚ ﻳﺴﻤﻰ ﻋﺪﻳﻢ ﻏﺮف ﻣﺎآﻴﻨﺎت )‪ (m/c room less‬وﻻ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻏﺮﻓﺔ ﻣﺎآﻴﻨﺎت وإﻧﻤﺎ ﺗﺮآﺐ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ اﻟﻤﻬﻤﺎت ﻓﻮق‬
‫اﻟﺼﺎﻋﺪة ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮة‪.‬‬
‫‪- 151 -‬‬

‫‪st‬‬
‫‪ (178‬آﻴﻒ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ اﻟﻤﺼﻌﺪ اﻟﺬي ﻳﻌﻤﻞ هﻴﺪروﻟﻴﻜﻴﺎ ؟‬
‫• ﻳﻌﻤﻞ هﺬا اﻟﻤﺼﻌﺪ ﺑﻤﻜﺒﺲ ﻳﺘﺤﺮك هﻴﺪروﻟﻴﻜﻴًﺎ ﻳﻜﻮن ﻣﺜﺒﺘًﺎ ﺑﺄﺳﻔﻞ اﻟﻜﺎﺑﻴﻨﺔ ﻳﺮﻓﻌﻬﺎ أو ﻳﺨﻔﻀﻬﺎ وﺑﺬﻟﻚ ﻻ ﻳﻜﻮن هﻨﺎك اﺣﺘﻴﺎج ﻟﺤﺒﺎل أو‬
‫ﻃﻨﺎﺑﻴﺮ أو ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ اﻟﻤﺤﺮك‪/‬ﻣﻮﻟﺪ آﻤﺎ هﻮ اﻟﺤﺎل ﻓﻰ ﻣﺼﺎﻋﺪ اﻟﺮآﺎب اﻟﻌﺎدﻳﺔ وﺗﻜﻮن وﺳﺎﺋﻞ اﻷﻣﺎن واﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺴﻴﻄﺔ وﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻌﻘﺪة ﻣﻤﺎ‬
‫ﻳﺠﻌﻞ هﺬا اﻟﻨﻮع ﻣﻦ اﻟﻤﺼﺎﻋﺪ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺒًﺎ ﺟﺪًا واﻗﺘﺼﺎدﻳًﺎ ﻓﻰ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ اﻟﻜﺎﺑﻴﻨﺔ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺎت ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ )ﺣﺘﻰ ‪1‬م‪/‬ث( ﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺎت ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻌﺔ‬
‫)ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ 25‬ﻣﺘﺮًا( وﺧﺎﺻﺔ إذا آﺎﻧﺖ ﺣﻔﺮة اﻻﺳﻄﻮاﻧﺎت اﻟﻬﻴﺪروﻟﻴﻜﻴﺔ أﺳﻔﻞ اﻟﻜﺎﺑﻴﻨﺔ ﻻ ﺗﻤﺜﻞ ﻣﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﻣﻌﻤﺎرﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻣﻦ اﻟﻌﻴﻮب اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺼﻌﺪ اﻟﻬﻴﺪروﻟﻴﻜﻰ ﺗﻜﻠﻔﺔ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻟﻤﺮﺗﻔﻌﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺒﺴﺒﺐ ﻏﻴﺎب ﺛﻘﻞ اﻟﻤﻮازﻧﺔ ﻳﺤﺘﺎج هﺬا اﻟﻤﺼﻌﺪ إﻟﻰ ﻣﺤﺮك ﺑﻘﺪرة‬
‫آﺒﻴﺮة ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻀﺨﺔ اﻟﺰﻳﺖ وﺗﻜﻮن آﻞ اﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ اﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻣﻔﻘﻮدة ﺣﺮارﻳًﺎ‪) .‬ﻣﻠﺤﻮﻇﺔ‪ :‬اﻟﻤﺤﺮك ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻓﻰ اﺗﺠﺎﻩ اﻟﺮﻓﻊ(‬
‫• ﺑﻤﻘﺎرﻧﺔ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ اﻟﺘﻜﻠﻔﺔ اﻟﺸﻬﺮﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺼﻌﺪ اﻟﻬﻴﺪروﻟﻴﻜﻰ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻜﻠﻔﺔ اﻟﺸﻬﺮﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺼﻌﺪ اﻟﻌﺎدى اﻟﺬي ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﻤﺤﺮك آﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻲ ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻀﺢ ارﺗﻔﺎع ﺗﻜﻠﻔﺔ‬
‫اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻓﻰ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ اﻟﻤﺼﻌﺪ اﻟﻬﻴﺪروﻟﻴﻜﻰ وﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ وﺟﻮد ﺛﻘﻞ اﻟﻤﻮازﻧﺔ ﻓﻰ اﻟﻤﺼﻌﺪ اﻟﻌﺎدي‪.‬‬
‫‪- 152 -‬‬

‫‪st‬‬
‫‪ (179‬آﻴﻒ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ اﻟﻤﺼﻌﺪ اﻟﺬي ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﻤﺤﺮك آﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻲ ؟‬
‫• ﺗﻘــﻮم اﻟﻤﺎآﻴﻨـﺎت ﺑﺠـﺮ اﻟﻜﺎﺑﻴﻨـﺔ ﻋــﻦ ﻃﺮﻳـﻖ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋـﺔ ﻣﺘﻮازﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ اﻟﺤﺒﺎل )ﻣﻦ ‪ 4‬إﻟﻰ ‪ 8‬اﻋﺘﻤﺎدًا ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ اﻟﻜﺎﺑﻴﻨﺔ وﺣﻤﻮﻟﺘﻬﺎ‪،‬‬
‫وﻳﺘﻮزع وزن اﻟﻜﺎﺑﻴﻨﺔ ﺑﺤﻤﻮﻟﺘﻬﺎ ﺑﻴﻦ هﺬﻩ اﻟﺤﺒﺎل ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺴﺎوى(‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﻤﺮ اﻟﺤﺒﺎل اﻟﻤﺜﺒﺘﺔ ﺑﺄﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﻜﺎﺑﻴﻨﺔ ﻓﻮق ﻃﺎرة ذات ﻣﺠﺎرى ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺪوﻳﺮهﺎ ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ ﻣﺎآﻴﻨﺔ اﻟﺠﺮ اﻟﺘﻰ ﻳﺪﻳﺮهﺎ ﻣﺤﺮك ﺛﻢ ﺗﻤﺮ إﻟﻰ أﺳﻔﻞ ﺣﻴﺚ‬
‫ﺛﻘﻞ اﻟﻤﻮازﻧﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺘﻠﻘﻰ ﻣﺤﺮك اﻟﻤﺼﻌﺪ ﻓﻰ ﻣﻌﻈﻢ اﻟﺘﺮآﻴﺒﺎت اﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﺪﻳﺔ اﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ واﻟﺘﻰ ﻣﺎزاﻟﺖ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪم ﻓﻰ ﻣﺒﺎﻧﻰ ﺷﻬﻴﺮة ﻓﻰ اﻟﻌﺎﻟﻢ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺗﺘﻜﻮن ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﻣﺤﺮك وﻣﻮﻟﺪ )‪.(Motor generator‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ اﻻﺳﺘﻌﺎﺿﺔ ﺣﺪﻳﺜًﺎ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺎت ﻣﺤﺮك‪/‬ﻣﻮﻟﺪ ﻟﺘﻮﻟﻴﺪ ﺗﻴﺎر ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ اﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ وﻣﻌﻜﻮس اﻹﺷﺎرة ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪام ﻣﻐﻴﺮات إﺳﺘﺎﺗﻴﻜﻴﺔ‬
‫)‪.(Static converters‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻓﻰ ﻣﺎآﻴﻨﺎت اﻟﺠﺮ ذات اﻟﺘﺮوس )‪ (Geared machines‬أن ﻳﻜﻮن اﻟﻤﺤﺮك ذو ﻗﺪرة ﺻﻐﻴﺮة وذو ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻣﺎ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ 500‬و ‪1500‬‬
‫ﻟﻔﺔ‪/‬د اﻋﺘﻤﺎدًا ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ اﻟﻤﺼﻌﺪ وﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ اﻟﺘﺮوس وﻳﻤﻜﻦ أن ﻳﻌﻤﻞ اﻟﻤﺤﺮك ﺑﺘﻴﺎر ﻣﺘﺮدد أو ﺑﺘﻴﺎر ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ )ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪم ﻓﻰ ﻣﺼﺮ‬
‫اﻟﺘﻴﺎر اﻟﻤﺘﺮدد(‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪم اﻟﻤﺤﺮآﺎت ذات اﻟﺘﻴﺎر اﻟﻤﺘﺮدد ﻓﻰ اﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎت ذات اﻟﺴﺮﻋﺎت اﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ )ﻣﺎ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ 0.75 ، 0.125‬م‪/‬ث( وﺗﻜﻮن ذات ﺳﺮﻋﺔ واﺣﺪة‬
‫أو ﺳﺮﻋﺘﻴﻦ‪ ،‬آﻤﺎ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ اﺳﺘﺨﺪام ﻣﺤﺮآﺎت ﺗﻴﺎر ﻣﺘﺮدد ذات ﺳﺮﻋﺎت ﺻﻐﻴﺮة )‪ (Variable speed‬أو ذات ﺟﻬﺪ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ ) ‪Variable‬‬
‫‪ (voltage‬أو ذات ﺟﻬﺪ وذﺑﺬﺑﺔ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮﺗﻴﻦ )‪ (Variable voltage, variable frequency) (VVVF‬وﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪم هﺬا اﻟﻨﻮع ﻓﻰ‬
‫ﻣﺼﺎﻋﺪ اﻟﺮآﺎب وﻣﻌﻈﻢ ﻣﺼﺎﻋﺪ اﻟﺒﻀﺎﻋﺔ وﺑﻤﺤﺮآﺎت ﺗﺘﺮاوح ﻗﺪرﺗﻬﺎ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪2.2‬ك‪.‬و‪ 75 ، .‬ك‪.‬و‪ .‬وﻳﺒﻴﻦ ﺟﺪول )‪ (1-1‬ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎت ﻋﻦ‬
‫اﻟﻤﺼﺎﻋﺪ ﺑﻤﺎآﻴﻨﺎت ذات ﺗﺮوس وﺑﺪون ﺗﺮوس‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻓﻰ اﻟﺘﺮآﻴﺒﺎت اﻟﺤﺪﻳﺜﺔ ﻣﻌﺪات اﻟﻜﺘﺮوﻧﻴﺔ ﻳﺴﻬﻞ ﻣﻌﻬﺎ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻰ ﻣﺤﺮك اﻟﻤﺼﻌﺪ واﻟﺤﺼﻮل ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺮآﻴﺒﺎت ذات أﻣﺎن زاﺋﺪ وراﺣﺔ‬
‫واﺿﺤﺔ ﻓﻰ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻟﻤﺼﻌﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ اﺳﺘﺨﺪام ﻣﺎآﻴﻨﺎت ﺟﺮ ﺑﺪون ﺗﺮوس ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻴﺎر اﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺳﺮﻋﺎت اﻟﺠﺮ ﻓﻰ اﻟﻤﺒﺎﻧﻰ ذات اﻻرﺗﻔﺎﻋﺎت أآﺒﺮ ﻣﻦ ‪ 50‬ﻣﺘﺮًا‬
‫وﻟﻠﺤﻤﻮﻟﺔ اﻟﻜﺒﻴﺮة ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ 5000‬آﺠﻢ وﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻻ ﺗﻘﻞ ﻋﻦ ‪ 2‬م‪/‬ث‪ ،‬وﺗﻜﻮن ﻗﺪرة اﻟﻤﺤﺮك ﻣﻦ ‪15‬ك‪.‬وات إﻟﻰ ‪ 260‬ك‪.‬وات‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺒﻴﻦ ﺷﻜﻞ )‪ (3-1‬ﻧﻤﻮذج ﻟﻤﺎآﻴﻨﺔ ﺟﺮ ذات ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﺪﻳﻤﺔ اﻟﺘﺮوس وﺷﻜﻞ )‪ (4-1‬ﻧﻤﻮذج ﻟﻤﺎآﻴﻨﺔ ﺟﺮ ﻣﺼﻌﺪ ذات ﺗﺮوس‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪم اﻟﻤﺤﺮآﺎت اﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮﻳﺔ ﺛﻼﺛﻴﺔ اﻷﻃﻮار ذات اﻟﺴﺮﻋﺘﻴﻦ ‪1500/375‬ﻟﻔﺔ‪/‬اﻟﺪﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻧﻈﺎم اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ذي اﻟﻤﺘﻤﻤﺎت أو اﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮوﺑﺮوﺳﻴﺴﻮر‬
‫ﻣﻊ ﺛﺒﺎت اﻟﺘﺮدد‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪم اﻟﻤﺤﺮآﺎت اﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮﻳﺔ ﺛﻼﺛﻴﺔ اﻷﻃﻮار ذات ﺳﺮﻋﺔ واﺣﺪة ‪ 1500‬ﻟﻔﺔ‪/‬اﻟﺪﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻧﻈﺎم ﻣﻐﻴﺮ اﻟﺘﺮدد واﻟﺠﻬﺪ وﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪم ﻧﻈﺎم اﻟﺘﺮوس‬
‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ اﻟﻤﺼﻌﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪- 153 -‬‬

‫‪st‬‬
‫‪ (180‬آﻴﻒ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ اﻟﻘﺪرة اﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺼﺎﻋﺪ؟‬
‫ﺗﺘﺤﺪد اﻟﻘﺪرة اﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺼﺎﻋﺪ اﻟﺮأﺳﻴﺔ ﺑﻨﺎ ًء ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺪرة ﻣﺎآﻴﻨﺎت اﻟﻤﺼﻌﺪ )ﺑﺨﻼف اﻟﻘﺪرة اﻟﻼزﻣﺔ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻷﺑﻮاب وﺗﻬﻮﻳﺔ وإﺿﺎءة اﻟﻜﺎﺑﻴﻨﺔ‬ ‫•‬
‫وﻟﻤﺒﺎت ﺑﻴﺎن اﻷدوار(‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺮف اﻟﻘﺪرة اﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺼﻌﺪ ﺑﺄﻧﻬﺎ ﺗﻠﻚ اﻟﺘﻰ ﺗﺤﻘﻖ اﻟﺠﺮ اﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮب وآﺬﻟﻚ اﻟﺘﻐﻠﺐ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻻﺣﺘﻜﺎك وﺗﺘﻨﺎﺳﺐ هﺬﻩ اﻟﻘﺪرة اﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﻣﻊ اﻟﻤﻌﺪل‬ ‫•‬
‫اﻟﺬى ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﻨﺪﻩ اﻟﺸﻐﻞ اﻟﻤﺒﺬول‪:‬‬
‫اﻟﺸﻐﻞ اﻟﻤﺒﺬول )آﺠﻢ‪.‬ﻣﺘﺮ(‬
‫ﻗﺪرة اﻟﻤﺤﺮك اﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮب = ك ×‬
‫اﻟﺰﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﺘﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻗﺪرة اﻟﻤﺤﺮك اﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮب ﻃﺮدﻳًﺎ ﻣﻊ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ اﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ وﻳﻜﻮن )ك( هﻮ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻞ اﻷﻣﺎن واﻟﻔﻘﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪o‬‬
‫ﻼ ‪ 900‬آﺠ ﻢ ووزن اﻟﻜﺎﺑﻴﻨ ﺔ ﺑﻤ ﺸﺘﻤﻼﺗﻬﺎ ‪ 600‬آﺠ ﻢ ﻓﻴﻜ ﻮن ﺛﻘ ﻞ‬ ‫ﻼ اﻟﺼﺎﻋﺪة اﻟﺘﻰ ﺗﺰن ‪ 1500‬آﺠﻢ ﺷﺎﻣﻠﺔ اﻟﺤﻤﻮﻟﺔ اﻟﻜﺎﻣﻠﺔ وآﺎﻧ ﺖ اﻟﺤﻤﻮﻟ ﺔ ﻣ ﺜ ً‬
‫ﻓﻤﺜ ً‬ ‫‪o‬‬
‫اﻟﻤﻮازﻧﺔ ﻓﻰ ﻧﻈﺎم اﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻖ ‪ 1 : 1‬ﻣﺴﺎوﻳًﺎ ﻟﻨﺼﻒ وزن اﻟﺼﺎﻋﺪة وﻧﺼﻒ ﺣﻤﻮﻟﺘﻬ ﺎ )‪ 1200‬آﺠ ﻢ(‪ ،‬وﻓ ﻰ ه ﺬﻩ اﻟﺤﺎﻟ ﺔ ﻳﻜ ﻮن اﻟﻤﺤ ﺮك ﻣ ﺼﻤﻤًﺎ ﻋﻠ ﻰ‬
‫ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ ‪ ٪50‬ﻓﻘﻂ ﻣﻦ اﻟﺤﻤﻮﻟﺔ اﻟﻜﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﺻﻌﻮدًا أو هﺒﻮﻃًﺎ ﻣﻀﺎﻓًﺎ إﻟﻰ ذﻟﻚ ‪ ٪10‬زﻳﺎدة ﺣﻤﻮﻟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺬﻟﻚ ﻓﺈن اﻟﻘﺪرة اﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﻟﺮﻓﻊ ﺻﺎﻋﺪة ﺗﺰن ‪ 1500‬آﺠﻢ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ 3.6‬م‪/‬ث ﺗﻜﻮن أآﺒﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻠﻚ اﻟﻘﺪرة اﻟﻼزﻣﺔ ﻟﺮﻓﻌﻬﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪1‬م‪/‬ث‪.‬‬ ‫‪o‬‬
‫ﻳﺒﻴﻦ ﺷﻜﻞ )‪ (5-1‬رﺳﻢ ﺗﺨﻄﻴﻄﻲ ﻟﺒﻴﺎن اﻟﻔﻘﺪ اﻟﺘﻔﺼﻴﻠﻲ ﻟﻜﻞ ك‪ .‬وات ﻓﻲ ﻧﻈﺎم اﻟﻤﺼﺎﻋﺪ اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪم ﻣﺤﺮآﺎت ﺑﺘﺮوس أو ﺑﺪون ﺗﺮوس‪.‬‬ ‫‪o‬‬
‫ﻣﻠﺤﻮﻇﺔ‪:‬‬
‫‪ .1‬ﻳﻘﻮم اﻟﻤﺤﺮك ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻐﻠﺐ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻻﺣﺘﻜﺎك ﻓﻰ اﻟﻨﻈﺎم ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ إﻟﻰ اﻟﻘﺪرة اﻟﻼزﻣﺔ ﻟﻠﺠﺮ وﻳﺒﻴﻦ اﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﻗﺪرة اﻟﻤﺤﺮك اﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﻟﻜﻞ آﺎﺑﻴﻨﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .2‬ﻳﻼﺣﻆ أن ﻗﺪرة ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻮﻟﺪ ‪ /‬ﻣﺤﺮك اﻟﻼزﻣﺔ ﻟﺘﻐﺬﻳﺔ ﻣﺤﺮك اﻟﺠﺮ أﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﺤﻮاﻟﻰ ‪ ٪20‬ﻣﻦ ﻗﺪرﺗﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .3‬ﻧﻈﺮًا ﻷن اﻻﺣﺘﻜﺎك أآﺒﺮ ﻓﻰ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ اﻟﻤﺎآﻴﻨﺎت ذات اﻟﺘﺮوس ﻋﻨﻬﺎ ﻓﻰ اﻟﻤﺎآﻴﻨﺎت ﻋﺪﻳﻤﺔ اﻟﺘﺮوس‪ ،‬ﻓﺘﻜﻮن ﻗﺪرة اﻟﻤﺤﺮك ﻓﻰ هﺬﻩ اﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ أآﺒﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .4‬ﺗﻜﻮن اﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ اﻟﻤﺴﺘﻬﻠﻜﺔ ﻓﻰ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ اﻟﻤﺼﻌﺪ هﻰ اﻟﻼزﻣﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻐﻠﺐ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻻﺣﺘﻜﺎك ﻓ ﻰ اﻟﻨﻈ ﺎم ﺑﻤ ﺎ ﻓﻴ ﻪ اﻟﺤ ﺮارة اﻟﻤﺘﻮﻟ ﺪة ﻧﺘﻴﺠ ﺔ ﻟﻠﻔﺮاﻣ ﻞ ﻣ ﻀﺎﻓًﺎ‬
‫إﻟﻴﻬﺎ اﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ اﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ اﻟﻤﻔﻘﻮدة ﻓﻰ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﺤﺮك اﻟﺠﺮ وﻓﻰ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ اﻟﻤﺤﺮك ‪ /‬ﻣﻮﻟﺪ )إن وﺟﺪت(‪ .‬أﻣﺎ اﻟﻄﺎﻗ ﺔ اﻟﻤ ﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻟﺮﻓ ﻊ اﻟﻜﺎﺑﻴﻨ ﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺮآﺎﺑﻬﺎ ﻓﻬﻰ ﺑﺒﺴﺎﻃﺔ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ وﺿ ﻊ )‪ (Potential energy‬ﻳﺘ ـﻢ إﻋﺎدﺗﻬـ ـﺎ إﻟ ﻰ ﻧﻈـ ـﺎم اﻟﻘـ ـﻮى أﺛﻨ ﺎء هﺒ ﻮط اﻟﻜﺎﺑﻴﻨــ ـﺔ ﺑﺮآﺎﺑﻬــ ـﺎ ﻋ ـﻦ ﻃﺮﻳ ﻖ‬
‫ﻧﻈﺎم اﺳﺘﻌﺎدة اﻟﻘﺪرة اﻟﻔﺮﻣﻠﻴﺔ اﻟﻤﺘﻮﻟﺪة ) ‪ (System regenerative braking‬اﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪم ﻓﻰ ﻣﻌﻈﻢ ﻧﻈﻢ اﻟﻤﺼﺎﻋﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺟﺪول اﻟﻘﺪرة اﻟﻼزﻣﺔ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻟﻤﺼﺎﻋﺪ اﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻗﺪرة اﻟﻤﺤﺮك ﺑﺎﻟﺤﺼﺎن*‬ ‫اﻟﺤﻤﻮﻟﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻴﻠﻮﺟﺮام‬ ‫ﻋﺪد اﻷﻓﺮاد‬
‫‪4-3‬‬ ‫‪240‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬
‫‪5.5-4‬‬ ‫‪320‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬
‫‪6.5-5‬‬ ‫‪400‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬
‫‪8.5-5.5‬‬ ‫‪480‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬
‫‪11-8‬‬ ‫‪640‬‬ ‫‪8‬‬
‫‪13‬‬ ‫‪750‬‬ ‫‪10‬‬
‫‪16‬‬ ‫‪900‬‬ ‫‪12‬‬
‫* اﻟﺤﺼﺎن = ‪ 746‬وات‬
‫‪- 154 -‬‬

‫‪st‬‬
‫‪ (181‬آﻴﻒ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﺴﺎب ﻣﻌﺎﻣـﻞ اﻟﻄﻠـﺐ ﻟﻠﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋـﺔ إذا زاد ﻋﺪد اﻟﻜﺒﺎﺋـﻦ ﻓﻰ اﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋـﺔ داﺧـﻞ اﻟﻤﺒﻨـﻰ؟‬
‫‪ o‬ﻣﻦ اﻟﻤﻌﺮوف أن اﻟﻤﺼﻌﺪ اﻟﻮاﺣﺪ ﻳﻜﻮن ﻓﻰ ﺣﺮآﺔ ﺣﻮاﻟﻰ ‪ ٪50‬ﻓﻘﻂ ﻣﻦ اﻟﺰﻣﻦ وﻳﻜﻮن ﺑﺎﻗﻰ اﻟﻮﻗﺖ واﻗﻔًﺎ ﻋﻨ ﺪ اﻷدوار اﻟﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔ ﺔ‪،‬‬
‫وﻟﺬا ﻓﺈﻧﻪ إذا زاد ﻋﺪد اﻟﻜﺒﺎﺋـﻦ ﻓ ﻰ اﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋ ـﺔ داﺧ ـﻞ اﻟﻤﺒﻨ ـﻰ‪ ،‬ﻓ ـﺈن اﺣﺘﻤ ـﺎل ﻋﻤﻠﻬ ـﺎ آﻠﻬ ـﺎ ﺁﻧﻴ ـًﺎ ﻳ ﺼﺒـﺢ ﻗﻠﻴـ ـﻼً‪ ،‬آﻤـ ـﺎ ﻳﺘ ﻀــﺢ‬
‫ﻣــﻦ ﻗﻴﻤـﺔ ﻣﻌﺎﻣـﻞ اﻟﻄﻠـﺐ ﻟﻠﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋـﺔ )‪ (Group demand factor‬اﻟﻤﺒﻴﻦ ﻗﻰ ﺷﻜﻞ )‪.(6-1‬‬
‫‪ o‬آﻤﺎ ﻳﺒﻴﻦ ﺷﻜﻞ )‪ (6-1‬اﻟﻌﻼﻗﺔ ﺑﻴﻦ اﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ واﻟﻘﺪرة اﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ أوزان ﺻﺎﻋﺪات ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎل‪:‬‬
‫ﻓﻰ ﺷﻜﻞ )‪ (6-1‬إذا آﺎن ﻋﺪد اﻟﻜﺒ ﺎﺋﻦ ﺧﻤ ﺴﺔ ﺑﺤﻤﻮﻟ ﺔ ‪ 1750‬آﺠ ﻢ وﺗﺘﺤ ﺮك ﺑ ﺴﺮﻋﺔ ‪3‬م‪/‬ث‪ ،‬ﻓ ﺈن آ ﻞ آﺎﺑﻴﻨ ﺔ ﺗﺤﺘ ﺎج إﻟ ﻰ‬ ‫‪o‬‬
‫ﻣﺤﺮك ﺟﺮ ﻗﺪرة ‪ 36‬ك‪.‬و‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ اﻟﺠﺪول ﻓﺈن ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻞ اﻟﻄﻠﺐ ﻟﻠﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ هﻮ ‪ 0.67‬وﺑﺬﻟﻚ ﺗﻜﻮن ﻗﺪرة اﻟﺠﺮ اﻟﻠﺤﻈﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺤﺮآﺎت ﻓﻰ اﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ هﻰ‪:‬‬ ‫‪o‬‬
‫= ‪ 120 = 0.67 × 36 × 5‬ك‪.‬و‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺈذا آﺎﻧﺖ اﻟﻜﻔﺎءة ﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﺤﺮك ‪ /‬ﻣﻮﻟﺪ هﻰ ‪ ٪80‬ﻓﺈن ﻣﺎ ﻳﺤﺘﺎﺟﻪ ﻧﻈﺎم اﻟﻤﺼﺎﻋﺪ ﻓﻰ اﻟﻤﺒﻨﻰ هﻮ =‬ ‫‪o‬‬
‫= ‪120‬‬
‫= ‪ 150‬ك‪.‬و‪.‬‬
‫‪0.8‬‬
‫ﻳﺠﺐ ﺗﻮاﻓﺮ هﺬﻩ اﻟﻘﺪرة ﻓﻰ ﻧﻈﺎم ﺗﻐﺬﻳﺔ اﻟﻤﺒﻨﻰ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺪرة اﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪o‬‬
‫‪- 155 -‬‬

‫‪st‬‬
‫‪ (182‬ﻓﻰ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﺼﺎﻋﺪ ﻣﻨﻔﺬة ﺑﺄﺳﻠﻮب اﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻖ ﺑﻨﺴﺒﺔ ‪ 1 : 1‬ﻣﻜﻮﻧﺔ ﻣﻦ )‪ (5‬آﺒﺎﺋﻦ ﺣﻤﻮﻟﺔ آﻞ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ‪ 1750‬آﺠﻢ وﺗﺘﺤﺮك ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ‪ 3‬م‪/‬ث‪ ،‬اﺣﺴﺐ اﻵﺗﻰ‪:‬‬
‫• اﻟﺤﺮارة اﻟﻤﺘﻮﻟﺪة ﻓﻰ ﻏﺮﻓﺔ اﻟﻤﺎآﻴﻨﺎت أﺛﻨﺎء ﻓﺘﺮات اﻟﺬروة‪.‬‬
‫• اﻟﺘﻜﻠﻔﺔ اﻟﺘﻘﺮﻳﺒﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻄﺎﻗﺔ اﻟﻤﺴﺘﻬﻠﻜﺔ ﺷﻬﺮﻳًﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪام ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻔﺔ ﻣﺰدوﺟﺔ ﺑﻤﻘﺪار ‪ 0.21‬ﺟﻨﻴﻬًﺎ ‪ /‬ك‪.‬و‪ .‬ﺳﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ o‬أﺛﻨﺎء أوﻗﺎت اﻟﺬروة ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ اﻟﻤﺤﺮك ‪ /‬ﻣﻮﻟﺪ ﺑﺎﺳ ﺘﻤﺮار وﺗﻜ ﻮن ﻓ ﻰ ﺣﺎﻟ ﺔ اﻟﻼﺣﻤ ﻞ ﺣ ﻮاﻟﻰ ‪ ٪50‬ﻣ ﻦ اﻟ ﺰﻣﻦ وﻓ ﻰ ﺣﺎﻟ ﺔ اﻟﺤﻤ ﻞ ﻓ ﻰ ‪٪50‬‬
‫اﻟﺒﺎﻗﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ اﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪ ،‬وﻋﻠﻰ ذﻟﻚ ﻓﺈن اﺳﺘﺨﺪام رﻗﻢ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﻲ ﻟﻠﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﻨﺪ اﻟﺤﻤﻞ اﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﺑﻤﻘﺪار ‪ ٪70‬ﻣﻦ اﻟﻔﺘﺮات اﻟﺰﻣﻨﻴﺔ هﻮ اﺧﺘﻴﺎر أﻗﺮب إﻟﻰ اﻟﺪﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ o‬ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻣﺤﺮك اﻟﺠ ﺮ ‪ ٪50‬ﻣ ﻦ اﻟﻮﻗ ﺖ ﻋﻠ ﻰ اﻟﺤﻤ ﻞ وﻻ ﻳﻌﻤ ﻞ ‪ ٪ 50‬ﻣ ﻦ اﻟﻮﻗ ﺖ‪ ،‬وﺑﺎﻋﺘﺒ ﺎر أن آ ﻼ اﻟﻤﺤ ﺮآﻴﻦ ﻳ ﺴﺤﺒﺎن ‪ ٪90‬ﻣ ﻦ اﻟﻘﻴﻤ ﺔ اﻟﻜﺎﻣﻠ ﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺤﻤﻞ‪ ،‬وﻋﻠﻰ ذﻟﻚ ﻓﺈﻧﻪ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﺑﻴﻨﺔ اﻟﻮاﺣﺪة‪:‬‬
‫= ‪ 36‬ك‪.‬وات )ﻣﻦ ﺷﻜﻞ )‪ .(6-1‬اﻟﻤﺜﺎل اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ( وﺑﺎﻋﺘﺒﺎر آﻔﺎءة اﻟﻤﺤﺮك ‪٪80‬‬ ‫ﻗﺪرة ﻣﺤﺮك اﻟﺠﺮ‬
‫‪ 36‬ك‪.‬و‪.‬‬
‫= ‪ 45‬ك‪.‬و‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﺪرة ﻣﺤﺮك ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ اﻟﻤﺤﺮك ‪ /‬ﻣﻮﻟﺪ =‬
‫‪0.8‬‬
‫= ‪ 45‬ك‪.‬و‪ ٪90 × .‬ﻣﻦ اﻟﺤﻤﻞ × ‪ ٪70‬ﻓﺘﺮة اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ × ‪ ٪20‬ﻓﻘﺪ = ‪ 5.67‬ك‪.‬و‪.‬‬ ‫اﻟﻔﻘﺪ ﻓﻰ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ اﻟﻤﺤﺮك ‪ /‬ﻣﻮﻟﺪ‬
‫= ‪ 5.67‬ك‪.‬و‪.‬ﺳﺎﻋﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻜﺎﻓﺊ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫= ‪ 36‬ك‪.‬و‪ ٪90 × .‬ﻣﻦ اﻟﺤﻤﻞ × ‪ ٪50‬ﻓﺘﺮة اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ × ‪ ٪20‬ﻓﻘﺪ = ‪ 3.24‬ك‪.‬و‪.‬‬ ‫اﻟﻔﻘﺪ ﻓﻰ ﻣﺤﺮك اﻟﺠﺮ‬
‫= ‪ 3.24‬ك‪.‬و‪ .‬ﺳﺎﻋﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻜﺎﻓﺊ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫= ‪ 8.91 = 3.54 + 5.67‬ك‪.‬وات‪ /‬ﺻﺎﻋﺪة‬ ‫ﻣﺠﻤﻮع اﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﺑﻴﻨﺔ‬
‫= ‪ 44.55 =8.91×5‬ك‪.‬و‪ .‬ﺳﺎﻋﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﺠﻤﻮع اﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻟﻌﺪد ‪ 5‬ﺻﺎﻋﺪات‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ اﻧﺒﻌﺎﺛﻬﺎ ﺣﺮارﻳًﺎ ﻓﻰ داﺧﻞ ﻏﺮﻓﺔ اﻟﻤﺎآﻴﻨﺎت وهﻰ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﻓﻘﺪ ﻣﻜﺎﻓﺌﺔ ﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻓﺮن ﻣﻨﺰﻟﻰ آﺒﻴﺮ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﺴﺘﺪﻋﻰ ﺗﻬﻮﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻏﺮﻓﺔ اﻟﻤﺎآﻴﻨﺎت ﺟﻴﺪًا ﻟﻄﺮد اﻟﺤﺮارة ﺧﺎرج اﻟﻐﺮﻓﺔ وﻓﻰ ﺑﻌﺾ اﻷﺣﻴﺎن ﻗﺪ ﻳﺴﺘﺪﻋﻰ اﻷﻣﺮ ﺗﻜﻴﻴﻒ هﻮاء هﺬﻩ اﻟﻐﺮﻓﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ o‬ﻻ ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪم ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﺗﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﺑﻴﻦ اﻟﻤﺎآﻴﻨﺎت هﻨﺎ‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﺚ أﻧﻬﺎ ﺟﻤﻴﻌﻬﺎ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ وأن اﻟﺤﺮارة ﺗﺮاآﻤﻴﺔ وﻻ ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪم ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻞ اﻟﺘﺒ ﺎﻳﻦ إﻻ‬
‫ﻟﺤﺴﺎب اﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ اﻟﻠﺤﻈﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺤﻤﻞ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫‪ o‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺣﺴﺎب ﺗﻜﻠﻔﺔ اﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺷﻬﺮﻳًﺎ ﻟﻠﻤﺼﺎﻋﺪ ﻓﻤﻦ اﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮب ﺗﻘﺪﻳﺮ اﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪام اﻟﻜﻠﻰ ﻟﻠﻨﻈﺎم‪ ،‬ﻓﻌﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ اﻟﻤﺜﺎل إذا آﺎن اﻟﻨﻈﺎم‬
‫ﻓﻰ ﻣﺒﻨﻰ ﻣﻜﺎﺗﺐ ﻓﺈن ﺗﻔﺼﻴﻠﺔ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺪار اﻟﻴﻮم ﻏﺎﻟﺒًﺎ ﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮن آﺎﻟﺘﺎﻟﻰ‪:‬‬
‫• أﻗﺼﻰ اﺳﺘﺨﺪام ﻟﻠﻤﺼﺎﻋﺪ ﻟﻤﺪة ‪ 2‬ﺳﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫• ‪ ٪70‬ﻣﻦ أﻗﺼﻰ اﺳﺘﺨﺪام ﻟﻤﺪة ‪ 2‬ﺳﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫‪ o‬هﺬا اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻳﻌﻄﻰ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻄﺔ ‪ ٪32.5‬ﻣﻦ أﻗﺼﻰ ﺣﻤﻮﻟﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ‪.‬وﺗﻜﻮن اﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ اﻟﻤﺴﺘﻬﻠﻜﺔ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﺎآﻴﻨﺔ ﻳﻮﻣﻴًﺎ‬
‫= ‪ × ٪32.5‬اﻟﻔﻘﺪ اﻟﻜﻠﻰ × ‪ 24‬ﺳﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫= ‪ (3.24+5.67) × 0.325‬ك‪.‬و‪ 24×.‬ﺳﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫= ‪ 69.5‬ك‪.‬و ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ‪ /‬ﻳﻮم ‪ /‬آﺎﺑﻴﻨﺔ‬
‫وﺑﺬﻟﻚ ﺗﻜﻮن اﻟﺘﻜﻠﻔﺔ اﻟﺸﻬﺮﻳﺔ‬
‫‪ 0.21‬ﺟﻨﻴﻬًﺎ‬ ‫‪ 69.5‬ك‪.‬و ﺳﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫× ‪ 25‬ﻳﻮم ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ×‬ ‫=‬
‫ك‪.‬و‪ .‬ﺳﺎﻋﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﻮم‬
‫= ‪ 364.86‬ﺟﻨﻴﻬًﺎ ‪ /‬ﺷﻬﺮ ‪ /‬آﺎﺑﻴﻨﺔ‬
‫= ‪ 1824.323‬ﺟﻨﻴﻬًﺎ ‪ /‬ﺷﻬﺮ ﻟﻠﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ‬
‫ﻻ ﻣ ﻦ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋ ﺔ اﻟﻤﺤ ﺮك ‪ /‬ﻣﻮﻟ ﺪ‪ ،‬ﻳ ﺘﻢ ﺗﺨﻔ ﻴﺾ اﻟﻘ ﺪرة‬ ‫‪ o‬ﻋﻨ ﺪ اﺳ ﺘﺨﺪام ﺗﺤﻜ ﻢ اﻟﻜﺘﺮوﻧ ﻰ ﻟﻤﺤ ﺮك اﻟﺠ ﺮ )ﺛﺎﻳﺮﻳ ﺴﺘﻮرات( ﺑ ﺪ ً‬
‫اﻟﻤﻔﻘﻮدة ﻓﻰ اﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ وآﺬﻟﻚ ﻳﻘﻞ اﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎج إﻟﻰ اﻟﺘﻬﻮﻳﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻠﺤﻮظ وﻋﻠﻰ ذﻟﻚ ﻓ ﺈن ﺗﻜﻠﻔ ﺔ اﻟﻄﺎﻗ ﺔ اﻟﻤ ﺴﺘﻬﻠﻜﺔ ﺗ ﻨﺨﻔﺾ‬
‫ﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٪10‬إﻟﻰ ‪ ٪25‬ﻋﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ اﺳﺘﺨﺪام ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ اﻟﻤﺤﺮك‪/‬ﻣﻮﻟﺪ وﻳﺘﻢ اﻟﺤﺼﻮل ﻋﻠﻰ وﻓﺮ ﺳﻨﻮى ﻣﻘﺪارﻩ‬
‫‪ 12‬ﺷﻬﺮًا‬ ‫‪1824.323‬‬
‫= ‪ 4378.374‬ﺟﻨﻴﻬًﺎ‬ ‫× ‪٪ 20‬‬ ‫=‬
‫ﺳﻨﺔ‬ ‫ﺷﻬﺮ‬
‫‪- 156 -‬‬

‫‪st‬‬
‫‪ (183‬آﻴﻒ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ اﻟﺴﻼﻟﻢ اﻟﻤﺘﺤﺮآﺔ؟‬

‫‪ o‬ﺗﺼﻤﻢ هﺬﻩ اﻟﺴﻼﻟﻢ ﻋﺎدة ﻟﻠﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺘﻴﻦ ﻟﻠﺤﺮآﺔ ‪ 0.45‬م‪/‬ث و ‪ 0.6‬م‪/‬ث وﺗﻜﻮن اﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ اﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ أﺛﻨﺎء ﻓﺘﺮات اﻟﺬروة واﻟ ﺴﺮﻋﺔ اﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔ ﻀﺔ ﻓ ﻰ‬
‫ﺧﻼف ذﻟﻚ وهﻰ اﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ ﻋﻤﻮﻣًﺎ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﻤﺜﻞ اﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ اﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﺸﺎآﻞ ﻟﺒﻌﺾ اﻟﺮآﺎب‪.‬‬
‫‪ o‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ اﻟﺴﻠﻢ ﻓﻰ ﺣﺎﻻت اﻻرﺗﻔﺎﻋﺎت ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ 20‬ﻣﺘﺮًا ﻋﻨﺪ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ واﺣﺪة وذﻟ ﻚ ﺑﺎﺳ ﺘﺨﺪام ﻣﺤ ﺮك واﺣ ﺪ ﻳﻘ ﻮم ﺑﺘ ﺪوﻳﺮ آﺎﺗﻴﻨ ﺔ اﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳ ﻚ اﻟﺮﺋﻴ ﺴﻴﺔ‬
‫اﻟﺘﻰ ﺗﺘﻮﻟﻰ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ آﺎﺗﻴﻨﺔ اﻟﺪرج وﺗﺴﺤﺒﻬﺎ ﺟﻤﻴﻌﻬﺎ ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﺆدى إﻟﻰ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ اﻟﺘﺠﻤﻴﻌﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ وآﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻀﺢ ﻣﻦ ﺷﻜﻞ )‪.(8-1‬‬
‫‪ o‬ﻓﻰ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ زﻳﺎدة ارﺗﻔﺎع اﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ اﻟﺘﻰ ﻳﻨﻘﻞ ﺑﻴﻨﻬﺎ اﻟﺴﻠﻢ‪ ،‬ﻓﺘﻜﻮن هﻨﺎك ﻣﺤﺮآﺎت ﻣﻨﺘﺸﺮة ﻋﻠﻰ ﻃﻮل اﻟﻮﺣﺪة ‪ ،‬وﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﺷﻜﻞ )‪ (9-1‬رﺳﻤًﺎ ﺗﺨﻄﻴﻄﻴ ًﺎ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻮﺣﺪات اﻟﻤﺘﻜﺮرة وﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻮزﻳﻊ وﺣﺪات اﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻃﻮل اﻟﺴﻠﻢ ﺑﺎﻷﻋﺪاد اﻟﻤﺘﻜﺮرة اﻟﻀﺮورﻳﺔ ﻟﻼرﺗﻔﺎع اﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮب‪ .‬وﻳﺒ ﻴﻦ ﺷ ﻜﻞ )‪(10-1‬‬
‫ﻧﻈﺎم ﻣﻴﻜﻨﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻟﺴﻠﻢ ذو اﻟﻮﺣﺪات اﻟﻤﺘﻜﺮرة‪ ،‬وﺗﺼﻨﻴﻒ اﻟﻤﺤﺮآﺎت اﻟﻤﻮزﻋﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻃﻮل اﻟﺴﻠﻢ ﻗﻮة ﻣﺤﺮآﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻃﻮل آﺎﺗﻴﻨﺔ اﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ‪.‬‬
‫‪- 157 -‬‬

‫‪st‬‬
‫‪ (184‬آﻴﻒ ﻳﺎم ﺣﺴﺎب اﻟﺤﻤﻞ اﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻰ ﻟﻠﺴﻼﻟﻢ اﻟﻤﺘﺤﺮآﺔ؟‬
‫‪ o‬وﻳﺒﻴﻦ ﺟﺪول )‪ (2-1‬ﻓﻰ اﻟﻜﻮد اﻟﻤﺼﺮى ﻗﺪرات اﻟﻤﺤﺮآﺎت اﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﻟﻼرﺗﻔﺎﻋﺎت اﻟﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ وﻃﺒﻘًﺎ ﻟﻌﺮض اﻟﺴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺟﺪول رﻗﻢ )‪ :(2-1‬ﻣﺤﺮآﺎت اﻟﺴﻼﻟﻢ اﻟﻤﺘﺤﺮآﺔ‬

‫‪1210‬‬ ‫‪810‬‬ ‫ﻋﺮض اﻟﺴﻠﻢ )ﻣﻢ(‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ 0.45‬إﻟﻰ ‪0.6‬‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ‪ 0.45‬إﻟﻰ ‪0.6‬‬ ‫اﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ )م‪/‬ث(‬
‫‪7.5‬‬ ‫‪7.5‬‬ ‫ﻗﺪرة اﻟﻤﺤﺮك اﻟﻮاﺣﺪ )ك‪.‬و(‬
‫‪6.5‬‬ ‫‪10‬‬ ‫ﻣﺤﺮك واﺣﺪ‬ ‫أﻗﺼﻰ ارﺗﻔﺎع‬
‫‪13.5‬‬ ‫‪20‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﻣﺤﺮك‬ ‫ﻳﺨﺪﻣﻪ اﻟﺴﻠﻢ‬
‫‪20‬‬ ‫‪30‬‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﻣﺤﺮآﺎت‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ اﺳﺘﺨﺪام‬
‫‪ o‬ﻳﺘـــﻢ إدارة اﻟﺴﻼﻟﻢ ﺑﻤﺤــﺮآﺎت آﻬــﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺣﺜﻴﺔ ﺛﻼﺛﻴــﺔ اﻷﻃﻮار ﻋﻨﺪ ‪ 50‬أو ‪ 60‬هﺮﺗﺰ‪ .‬وﻳﺒﻴﻦ ﺟﺪول )‪ (3-1‬ﻗﺪرات اﻟﻤﺤﺮآﺎت اﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻓ ﻰ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ اﻟﺴﻠﻢ إﻟﻰ ارﺗﻔﺎﻋﺎت ﻻ ﺗﺰﻳﺪ ﻋﻦ ‪ 6.5‬ﻣﺘﺮًا‪.‬‬
‫ﺟﺪول رﻗﻢ )‪ :(3-1‬اﻟﻘﺪرة اﻟﻨﻤﻮذﺟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺤﺮآﺎت اﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻣﻊ اﻟﺴﻼﻟﻢ اﻟﻤﺘﺤﺮآﺔ‬

‫ﻗﺪرة اﻟﻤﺤﺮك )ك‪.‬و(‬ ‫اﻻرﺗﻔﺎع )م(‬ ‫اﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ )م‪/‬ث(‬ ‫ﻋﺮض اﻟﺴﻠﻢ )ﻣﻢ(‬
‫‪3.75‬‬ ‫‪4.25‬‬ ‫‪ -‬ﻣﻦ ‪ 0.45‬إﻟﻰ ‪0.6‬‬ ‫‪810‬‬
‫‪5.00‬‬ ‫‪5.2‬‬ ‫‪ -‬ﻣﻦ ‪ 0.45‬إﻟﻰ ‪0.6‬‬
‫‪5.00‬‬ ‫‪5.20‬‬ ‫‪0.45 -‬‬
‫‪7.5‬‬ ‫‪6.40‬‬ ‫‪0.45 -‬‬ ‫‪1210‬‬
‫‪11.2‬‬ ‫‪7.60‬‬ ‫‪ -‬ﻣﻦ ‪ 0.45‬إﻟﻰ ‪0.6‬‬
‫‪ (185‬ﻣﺎ هﻰ اﻷﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎت اﻟﻮاﺟﺐ ﻣﺮاﻋﺘﻬﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ اﻟﺘﺼﻤﻴﻢ ﻟﺘﻐﺬﻳﺔ ﻋﺪة ﺳﻼﻟﻢ ﻣﺘﺤﺮآﺔ داﺧﻞ ﻣﺒﻨﻰ واﺣﺪ؟‬
‫ﻣﻦ اﻟﻤﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﻪ ﻋﺪم ﺗﻐﺬﻳﺔ أآﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ‪ 4‬ﺳﻼﻟﻢ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻐﺬى آﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻰ واﺣﺪ )‪.(Single electric feeder‬‬ ‫‪o‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻨﺼﺢ أﻳﻀًﺎ ﺑﺘﻐﺬﻳﺔ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ اﻟﺴﻼﻟﻢ ﻟﻤﺒﻨﻰ ﻣﻬﻤﺎ آﺎن ﻋﺪدهﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻔﺲ اﻟﻤﻐﺬى‪.‬‬ ‫‪o‬‬
‫ﻧﻈﺮًا ﻷن راآﺒﻰ اﻟﺴﻼﻟﻢ اﻟﻤﺘﺤﺮآﺔ ﻟﻦ ﺗﻌﺎق ﺣﺮآﺘﻬﻢ إذا اﻧﻘﻄﻌﺖ اﻟﺘﻐﺬﻳﺔ اﻟﻌﻤﻮﻣﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻼ ﻳﺘﻄﻠﺐ اﻷﻣ ﺮ ﺗﻐﺬﻳ ﺔ اﻟ ﺴﻼﻟﻢ ﻣ ﻦ اﻟﻤ ﺼﺎدر اﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻴ ﺔ‬ ‫‪o‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﻘﻮى‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺠﺐ ﺗﻬﻮﻳﺔ ﻏﺮﻓﺔ اﻟﻤﺤﺮك وﻣﺮاﻋﺎة أن ﺣ ﻮاﻟﻰ ‪ ٪ 40‬ﻣ ﻦ اﻟﻘ ﺪرة ﺗﻔﻘ ﺪ ﺣﺮارﻳ ﺎً‪ ،‬ﻓﻌﻠ ﻰ ﺳ ﺒﻴﻞ اﻟﻤﺜ ﺎل إذا آ ﺎن اﻟﻤﺤ ﺮك ﺑﻘ ﺪرة ‪ 7.5‬ك‪.‬و‪ .‬ﻓﺘﻜ ﻮن‬ ‫‪o‬‬
‫اﻟﺤﺮارة اﻟﻤﻔﻘﻮدة ﻣﻨﻪ ﻓﻰ اﻟﻤﻜﺎن‪:‬‬
‫)‪ 7.5×0.4‬ك‪.‬و‪ 10250 ≈ (3415.2 × .‬و‪.‬ح‪.‬ب‪/‬ﺳﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫‪- 158 -‬‬

‫‪st‬‬
‫‪ (186‬آﻴﻒ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ اﻟﺤﺼﺎﺋﺮ واﻟﻤﻨﺤﺪرات اﻟﻤﺘﺤﺮآﺔ )‪(Moving walks and ramps‬؟ و آﻴﻒ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ اﻟﻘﺪرة اﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻬﺎ؟‬
‫‪ o‬ﻳﺘﻮﻟﻰ هﺬا اﻟﻨﻮع ﻣﻦ اﻟﻤﺼﺎﻋﺪ اﻟﻨﻘﻞ إﻣﺎ أﻓﻘﻴًﺎ ﻓﻘﻂ أو أﻓﻘﻴًﺎ ورأﺳ ﻴًﺎ ﻓ ﻰ ﺷ ﻜﻞ ﺗﺠﻤﻴﻌ ﻰ )ﻧ ﺴﺒﺔ اﻟﻤﻴ ﻞ ﻻ ﺗﺰﻳ ﺪ ﻋ ﻦ ‪ 5‬درﺟ ﺎت ﻓ ﻰ ﺣﺎﻟ ﺔ اﻟﺤ ﺼﺎﺋﺮ‬
‫و‪ 15‬درﺟﺔ ﻓﻰ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ اﻟﻤﻨﺤﺪرات اﻟﻤﺘﺤﺮآﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫‪ o‬ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪم هﺬا اﻟﻨ ﻮع ﻓ ﻰ اﻟﻤﻄ ﺎرات ﻟﻨﻘ ﻞ اﻷﻓ ﺮاد وﻋﺮﺑ ﺎت اﻷﻣﺘﻌ ﺔ رأﺳ ﻴًﺎ أو ﻧﻘ ﻞ اﻷﻓ ﺮاد اﻟ ﺬﻳﻦ ﻗ ﺪ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜ ﻨﻬﻢ اﺳ ﺘﺨﺪام اﻟ ﺴﻼﻟﻢ اﻟﻤﺘﺤﺮآ ﺔ‪ ،‬آﻤ ﺎ‬
‫ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪم أﻳﻀًﺎ ﻓﻰ ﻧﻘﻞ اﻷﺷ ﻴﺎء آﺒﻴ ﺮة اﻟﺤﺠ ﻢ وﺗ ﺴﺘﺨﺪم أﻳ ﻀًﺎ ﻓ ﻰ ﺗﺠﻤﻌ ﺎت اﻟﺘ ﺴﻮق ﻣﺘﻌ ﺪدة اﻟﻄﻮاﺑ ﻖ ﺣﻴ ﺚ ﻻ ﺗﻨﺎﺳ ﺐ اﻟ ﺴﻼﻟﻢ اﻟﻤﺘﺤﺮآ ﺔ اﻧﺘﻘ ﺎل‬
‫اﻷﻓﺮاد ﺑﻌﺮﺑﺎت اﻟﻤﺸﺘﺮﻳﺎت ﺑﻴﻦ اﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎت اﻟﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ أو اﻧﺘﻘﺎﻟﻬﻢ إﻟﻰ أﻣﺎآﻦ اﻧﺘﻈﺎر اﻟﺴﻴﺎرات اﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮدة ﺑﺴﻄﺢ اﻟﻤﺒﻨﻰ‪.‬‬
‫‪ o‬ﻳﺒﻴﻦ ﺷﻜﻞ )‪ (11-1‬ﺣﺼﺎﺋﺮ ﻣﺘﺤﺮآﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺸﺎﻩ ﺛﻨﺎﺋﻴﺔ اﻟﻤﻤﺮات ﻓﻰ أﺣﺪ اﻟﻤﻄﺎرات ﺑﻌ ﺮض ‪1‬م ﻟﻜ ﻞ ﻣﻤ ﺸﻰ وﺑﻄ ﻮل ‪55‬م وﺗ ﺪار آ ﻞ ﻣﻨﻬ ﺎ ﺑﻤﺤ ﺮك‬
‫واﺣﺪ وﺗﺘﺤﺮك ﻓﻰ اﺗﺠﺎهﻴﻦ ﻣﺘﻀﺎدﻳﻦ‪ .‬و ﻳﺒﻴﻦ ﺷﻜﻞ )‪ (12-1‬ﻣﻨﺤﺪر ﻣﺘﺤﺮك ﻳﻨﻘﻞ ﻣﺎ ﺑﻴﻦ دورﻳ ﻦ ﻓ ﻰ ﻣﺠﻤ ﻊ ﺗﺠ ﺎرى وﻳﻤﻜ ﻦ أن ﻳﻜ ﻮن ﺑﻌ ﺮض‬
‫‪ 660‬ﻣﻢ ﻟﺮاآﺐ واﺣﺪ أو ﺑﻌﺮض ‪1000‬ﻣﻢ ﻟﺮاآﺒﻴﻦ وﻳﻜﻮن ﻋﺎدة ﺑﺰواﻳﺎ اﻧﺤﺪار وﺳﺮﻋﺎت ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ o‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ هﻨﺎ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎت ﻋﻦ ﻗﺪرات اﻟﻤﺤﺮآﺎت اﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ هﺬا اﻟﻨﻮع ﻣﻦ وﺳﺎﺋﻞ اﻟﻨﻘﻞ‪ ،‬وﻳﺠﺐ اﻟﺮﺟﻮع إﻟﻰ اﻟﻤ ﺼﻨﻊ ﻓ ﻰ ﻃﻠ ﺐ ﻣﻌﺮﻓ ﺔ‬
‫اﻟﻘﺪرة اﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪- 159 -‬‬

‫‪st‬‬
‫‪ (187‬ﻣﺎ هﻰ ﻗﺪرات اﻟﺴﺨﺎﻧﺎت اﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻓﻰ وﺣﺪات ﺗﺪﻓﺌﺔ اﻟﻤﻨﺎزل ﻣﻦ اﻟﻨﻮع اﻟﺤﺎﺋﻄﻰ؟‬
‫‪ o‬ﻳﺒﻴﻦ ﺟﺪول )‪ (4-1‬ﺛﻰ اﻟﻜﻮد اﻟﻤﺼﺮى ﻗﺪرات اﻟﺴﺨﺎﻧﺎت اﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻓ ﻰ وﺣ ﺪات ﺗﺪﻓﺌ ﺔ اﻟﻤﻨ ﺎزل ﻣ ﻦ اﻟﻨ ﻮع اﻟﺤ ﺎﺋﻄﻰ‪ ،‬وﻳﻤﻜ ﻦ ﺑﻨ ﺎء ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋ ﺎت‬
‫ﻣﻨﻬﺎ داﺧﻞ وﺣﺪة اﻟﺴﺨﺎﻧﺎت اﻟﻮاﺣﺪة أو ﺗﻜﺮار اﻟﻮﺣﺪات داﺧﻞ اﻟﻤﻜﺎن اﻟﻮاﺣﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺟﺪول رﻗﻢ )‪ :(4-1‬ﻗﺪرات وﺣﺪات اﻟﺴﺨﺎﻧﺎت اﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻓﻰ وﺣﺪات اﻟﺘﺪﻓﺌﺔ اﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ‬

‫ﻃﻮل اﻟﻮﺣﺪة اﻟﻤﺴﺎﺣﺔ اﻟﻤﺨﺪوﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﺮض اﻟﻮﺣﺪة‬ ‫اﻟﺴﻌﺔ اﻟﺤﺮارﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻗﺪرة اﻟﺴﺨﺎﻧﺎت‬
‫)م‪(2‬‬ ‫)ﻣﻢ(‬ ‫)ﻣﻢ(‬ ‫)و‪.‬ح‪.‬ب‪/‬ﺳﺎﻋﺔ(‬ ‫)وات(‬
‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪355‬‬ ‫‪200‬‬ ‫‪1194‬‬ ‫‪350‬‬
‫‪6–4‬‬ ‫‪750‬‬ ‫‪200‬‬ ‫‪2559‬‬ ‫‪750‬‬
‫‪16 - 12‬‬ ‫‪1500‬‬ ‫‪200‬‬ ‫‪6824‬‬ ‫‪2000‬‬
‫‪ (188‬ﻣﺎ هﻰ أﻧﻮاع و أﻧﻈﻤﺔ اﻟﺘﻜﻴﻒ اﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ؟ و ﻣﺎ هﻰ اﻟﻘﺪرات اﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ‬
‫‪ .1‬اﻟﺸﺒﺎك )‪(Window type AC‬‬

‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺒﺮﻳﺪ اﻟﻤﻨﺎزل اﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮة ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺑﺴﻴﻄﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪام وﺣﺪة ﺗﺘﻜﻮن ﻣﻦ ﺿﺎﻏﻂ )آﺒﺎس( وﻣﻜﺜﻒ وﻣﺒﺨﺮ وداﺋ ﺮة وﺳ ﻂ اﻟﺘﺒﺮﻳ ﺪ وﺑﺎﺳ ﺘﺨﺪام ﺗﺒﺮﻳ ﺪ‬ ‫‪o‬‬
‫اﻟﻬﻮاء ﺑﺎﻟﻬﻮاء آﻤﺎ هﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﻓﻰ ﺷﻜﻞ )‪(13-1‬‬
‫ﺗﻜﻴﻴ ﻒ اﻟﻬ ﻮاء ﻣ ﻦ ﻧ ﻮع اﻟ ﺸﺒﺎك )‪ ،(Window type AC‬ﺑ ﻪ ﻋ ﺎدة ﺛﻼﺛ ﺔ ﻣﺤﺮآ ﺎت واﺣ ﺪ ﻟﻤﺮوﺣ ﺔ اﻟﻤﺒﺨ ﺮ واﻟﺜ ﺎﻧﻰ ﻟﻤﺮوﺣ ﺔ ﺗﺒﺮﻳ ﺪ اﻟﻤﻜﺜ ﻒ‬ ‫‪o‬‬
‫واﻟﺜﺎﻟﺚ ﻟﻀﺎﻏﻂ وﺳﻂ اﻟﺘﺒﺮﻳﺪ )اﻟﻔﺮﻳﻮن(‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜــﻦ ﻋﻜــﺲ دورة وﺳﻂ اﻟﺘﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﻟﺘﺴﺨﻴﻦ اﻟﻬﻮاء ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻜﺎن اﻟﻤﺮاد ﺗﻜﻴﻴﻔﻪ ﺷﺘﺎء ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪام ﻧﻔﺲ اﻟﻀﺎﻏﻂ وﻳﺴﻤﻰ اﻟﺠﻬﺎز ﻓﻰ ه ﺬﻩ اﻟﺤﺎﻟ ﺔ "ﻣ ﻀﺨﺔ‬ ‫‪o‬‬
‫ﺣﺮارﻳ ﺔ" )‪ ،(Heat pump‬آﻤ ﺎ ﻳﻤﻜ ﻦ اﺳ ﺘﺨﺪام ﺳ ﺨﺎن آﻬﺮﺑ ﺎﺋﻲ أﻣ ﺎم ﻣﺮوﺣ ﺔ اﻟﻤﺒﺨ ﺮ ﻣ ﻊ ﻓ ﺼﻞ اﻟ ﻀﺎﻏﻂ وﻣﺮوﺣ ﺔ اﻟﻤﻜﺜ ﻒ ﺷ ﺘﺎء ﻓ ﻰ ه ﺬﻩ‬
‫اﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻜﻮن وﺣﺪات اﻟﺸﺒﺎك ذات اﻟﺴﺨﺎﻧﺎت اﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻋﺎدة ﺑﺎﻟﺴﻌﺎت واﻟﻘﺪرات اﻟﻤﺒﻴﻨﺔ ﻓﻰ ﺟﺪول )‪ (5-1‬وذﻟﻚ ﻟﻠﻮﺣﺪات اﻟﻤﺰودة ﺑ ﺴﺨﺎﻧﺎت آﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴ ﺔ‬ ‫‪o‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺪﻓﺌﺔ‬
‫‪- 160 -‬‬

‫‪st‬‬
‫‪ .2‬اﻟﻮﺣﺪة اﻟﻤﻨﻔﺼﻠﺔ )‪(Split Unit‬‬
‫‪ o‬ﻳﺘﻢ وﺿﻊ اﻟﻤﻜﺜﻒ ذى اﻟﻀﻮﺿﺎء اﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻧﻮﻋًﺎ ﻣﺎ ﻓﻰ ﻣﻜﺎن ﺑﻌﻴﺪ ﻋﻦ اﻟﻤﺒﺨﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﺪاﺋﺮة اﻟﺘﻜﻴﻴﻒ و ذاﻟﻚ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮل ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻜﻴ ﻒ أآﺜ ﺮ ﻣﻼﺋﻤ ﺔ‬
‫وراﺣﺔ آﻤﺎ هﻮ ﻣﺒﻴﻦ ﻓﻰ ﺷﻜﻞ )‪.(14-1‬‬
‫‪ o‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﻜﺲ دورة وﺳﻂ اﻟﺘﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﻟﻴﺴﺨﻦ اﻟﻬﻮاء ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻜﺎن اﻟﻤﺮاد ﺗﻜﻴﻴﻔ ﻪ آﻤ ﺎ ﻳﻤﻜ ﻦ أﻳ ﻀًﺎ اﺳ ﺘﺨﺪام ﺳ ﺨﺎن آﻬﺮﺑ ﺎﺋﻰ أﻣ ﺎم ﻣﺮوﺣ ﺔ اﻟﻤﺒﺨ ﺮ‪ .‬و ﻳﺒ ﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺷﻜﻞ )‪ (15-1‬ﺑﻌﺾ ﻃﺮق ﺗﺮآﻴﺐ اﻟﻮﺣﺪة اﻟﺪاﺧﻠﻴﺔ واﻟﻮﺣﺪة اﻟﺨﺎرﺟﻴﺔ ﻟﻮﺣﺪات اﻟﺘﻜﻴﻴﻒ اﻟﻤﻨﻔﺼﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ o‬اﻟﻮﺣ ﺪات اﻟﻤﻨﻔ ﺼﻠﺔ ﻳﻤﻜ ﻦ أن ﺗﻜ ﻮن وﺣـ ـﺪات ﺣﺎﺋﻄﻴـ ـﺔ أو ﺳﻘﻔﻴـ ـﺔ )‪ (Exposed floor or ceiling unit‬أو ﺳ ﻘﻔﻴﺔ ﻏﺎﻃ ﺴﺔ ﻓ ﻮق اﻟ ﺴﻘﻒ‬
‫اﻟﻤﺴﺘﻌﺎر )‪ (Concealed unit‬آﻤﺎ هﻮ ﻣﺒﻴﻦ ﻓﻰ ﺷﻜﻞ )‪.(15-1‬‬
‫‪ o‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺑﻨﺎء وﺣﺪات ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻠﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺳ ﻌﺔ ‪ 15‬ﻃ ﻦ ﺗﺒﺮﻳ ﺪ ﻣ ﺰودة ﺑﻌ ﺪد ‪ 2‬آﺒ ﺎس ﻗ ﺪرة ‪ 7‬ك‪.‬و‪ .‬ﺑﻤﺮوﺣ ﺔ ﻣﻜﺜ ﻒ ﻗ ﺪرة ‪ 0.44‬ك‪.‬و‪ .‬وﻣﺮوﺣ ﺔ ﻣﺒﺨ ﺮ‬
‫ﺗﻜﻮن ﻗﺪرﺗﻬﺎ ﻓﻰ ﺣﺪود ‪ 2.25‬ك‪.‬و‪.‬‬
‫‪ o‬ﻳﺒﻴﻦ ﺟﺪول )‪ (6-1‬ﺳﻌﺎت وﻗﺪرات اﻟﻮﺣﺪات اﻟﻤﻨﻔﺼﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﻤﻞ اﻟﺴﺨﺎﻧﺎت اﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻓﺈن اﻟﻀﺎﻏﻂ ﻻ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ‪ .‬و ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺎﻟﻰ ﻳﺘﻢ اﺧﺬ اﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ اﻷآﺒﺮ اﻣﺎ ﻟﻠﻀﺎﻏﻂ او ﻟﻠ ﺴﺨﺎن‪ .‬و داﺋﻤ ﺎ ﺗﻜ ﻮن ﻗﻴﻤ ﺔ ﻗ ﺪرة‬
‫اﻟﺴﺨﺎن هﻰ اﻷآﺒﺮ‪ .‬اذن ﻳﺘﻢ اﺧﺬ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻗﺪرة ﺣﻤﻞ اﻟﺴﺨﺎن ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫‪- 161 -‬‬

‫‪st‬‬
‫‪ .3‬اﻟﻮﺣﺪات اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﺬاﺗﻬﺎ )‪(Package units‬‬
‫‪ o‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺑﻨﺎء وﺣﺪات ﺗﻜﻴﻴﻒ هﻮاء ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﺬاﺗﻬﺎ ﻟﻠﺘﺪﻓﺌﺔ واﻟﺘﺒﺮﻳﺪ وﺗﻜﻮن اﻟﻮﺣﺪة إﻣﺎ رأﺳﻴﺔ أو أﻓﻘﻴﺔ آﻤﺎ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ وﺿﻌﻬﺎ إﻣﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺴﻄﺢ أو ﺑﺎﻟﺒﺪروم‪.‬‬
‫‪ o‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺎدة ﻧﻘﻞ اﻟﻬﻮاء اﻟﻤﻜﻴﻒ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪام ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﻣﺠﺎرى هﻮاء ﻣﻌﺰوﻟﺔ ﻟﻬـﻮاء اﻟﺘﻐﺬﻳــﺔ وهـﻮاء اﻟﺮاﺟ ﻊ وآﻤ ﺎ ه ﻮ واﺿ ﺢ ﻓ ﻰ اﻷﺷ ﻜﺎل اﻟﻤﺒﻴﻨ ﺔ‬
‫ﻓﻰ ﺷﻜﻞ )‪.(16-1‬‬
‫‪- 162 -‬‬

‫‪st‬‬
‫‪ .4‬اﻟﺘﻜﻴﻴﻒ اﻟﻤﺮآﺰي ) ‪(Central Station Air Conditioning‬‬
‫‪ o‬ﻳﺆدى هﺬا اﻟﻨﻮع ﻣﻦ اﻟﺘﺼﻤﻴﻢ إﻟﻰ اﻟﺘﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﻓﻰ اﺳﺘﺨﺪام اﻟﻤﻌﺪات واﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎد ﻓ ﻰ اﻟﻄﺎﻗ ﺔ إﻟ ﻰ أﻗ ﺼﻰ درﺟ ﺔ‪ ،‬وﻳ ﺘﻢ اﺳ ﺘﺨﺪاﻣﻪ ﻓ ﻰ اﻟﻤﺒ ﺎﻧﻰ اﻟﻜﺒﻴ ﺮة‬
‫ذات اﻹﺷﻐﺎل اﻟﻌﺎﻟﻰ ﻣﺜﻞ اﻟﻔﻨﺎدق و اﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻔﻴﺎت واﻟﻤﺴﺎرح اﻟﻜﺒﻴﺮة‪ .‬و ﻳﻨﻘﺴﻢ اﻟﻰ ﻧﻮﻋﻴﻦ ﻣﻦ اﻷﻧﻀﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .a‬ﻧﻈﺎم ﻣﻮﻟﺪات اﻟﻤﺎء اﻟﻤﺜﻠﺞ )‪(Water Chillers System‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﻰ هﺬا اﻟﻨﻈـﺎم اﺳﺘﺨﺪام ﻣﻮﻟﺪات اﻟﻤﺎء اﻟﻤ ﺜﻠﺞ )‪ (Water chillers‬اﻟﺘ ﻰ ﺗﻜ ﻮن إﻣ ﺎ ذات آﺒﺎﺳ ﺎت ﺗﺮددﻳ ﺔ )‪(Reciprocating‬‬ ‫‪o‬‬
‫أو ﺣﻠﺰوﻧﻴ ﺔ )‪ (Screw‬أو ﻃـ ـﺎردة ﻣﺮآـﺰﻳ ـﺔ )‪ (Centrifugal‬ﻣ ـﻊ وﺣ ـﺪات ﻣﻨﺎوﻟ ـﺔ اﻟﻬ ـﻮاء )‪ (Air handling units‬واﻟﺘ ﻰ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺘﻮى ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﻄﺎﻋﺎت ﻟﻤﺮاوح ﺗﻐﺬﻳﺔ اﻟﻬ ﻮاء وراﺟ ﻊ اﻟﻬ ﻮاء )‪ (Supply and return air fans‬وﻗﻄ ﺎع ﻣﻠ ﻒ اﻟﺘﺒﺮﻳ ﺪ )اﻟ ﺬى ﻳ ﺘﻢ‬
‫ﺗﻐﺬﻳﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺎء اﻟﻤﺜﻠﺞ( وﻗﻄﺎع ﻣﻠﻒ اﻟﺘﺴﺨﻴﻦ )ﻗﺪ ﻳﻜﻮن اﻟﺘﺴﺨﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪام ﻣﻠﻒ ﻳﻐﺬى ﻣﻦ ﻣ ﺎء ﺳ ﺎﺧﻦ ﻣ ﻦ ﻏﻼﻳ ﺔ أو ﻳﻜ ﻮن اﻟﺘ ﺴﺨﻴﻦ‬
‫آﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪام ﻣﻘﺎوﻣﺎت( وﻗﻄﺎع ﺗﺮﺷﻴﺢ اﻟﻬﻮاء وﻗﻄﺎع ﺿﺒﻂ درﺟﺔ اﻟﺮﻃﻮﺑﺔ اﻟﻨﺴﺒﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻬﻮاء اﻟﻤﻜﻴﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺒﻨﻰ هﺬﻩ اﻟﻮﺣﺪات إذا آﺎن ﻣﻜﺜﻔﻬﺎ ﻳﺒﺮد ﺑﺎﻟﻬﻮاء ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ 350‬ﻃﻦ ﺗﺒﺮﻳﺪ وأآﺒﺮ ﻣ ﻦ ذﻟ ﻚ إذا آ ﺎن ﻳﺒ ﺮد ﺑﺎﻟﻤ ﺎء ﺑﺎﺳ ﺘﺨﺪام أﺑ ﺮاج ﺗﺒﺮﻳ ﺪ‬ ‫‪o‬‬
‫)‪.(Cooling Towers‬‬
‫وﺣـﺪة ﺗﺜﻠﻴـﺞ اﻟﻤﻴـﺎﻩ ﻳﺒـﺮد ﻣﻜﺜﻔﻬـﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻬ ـﻮاء وﺗﺤﺘ ـﺎج إﻟ ـﻰ ﻗـ ـﺪرة آﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴـ ـﺔ ﻟﻠ ﻀﻮاﻏــﻂ وﻟﻤ ﺮاوح ﺗﺒﺮﻳ ﺪ اﻟﻤﻜﺜ ﻒ آﻤ ﺎ ﺗﺤﺘ ﺎج إﻟ ﻰ‬ ‫‪o‬‬
‫ﻗـــ ـﺪرة ﻟﻠﻤﻌـــ ـﺪات اﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘـــ ـﺔ ﺑﻬــ ـﺎ ﻣﺜ ﻞ وﺣ ﺪة أو وﺣ ﺪات ﻣﻨﺎوﻟ ﺔ اﻟﻬ ﻮاء )‪ (Air handling units‬وآ ﺬﻟﻚ ﻃﻠﻤﺒ ﺔ أو ﻃﻠﻤﺒ ﺎت‬
‫اﻟﻤﻴﺎﻩ اﻟﻤﺜﻠﺠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ رﻓﻊ اﻟﻤﻴﺎﻩ إﻟﻰ اﻟﺒﺮج اﻟﺘﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪام ﻃﻠﻤﺒﺎت‪.‬‬ ‫‪o‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ أن ﺗﺼﻞ ﺳﻌﺎت وﺣﺪات ﺗﺜﻠﻴﺞ اﻟﻤﻴﺎﻩ ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ 850‬ﻃﻦ ﺗﺒﺮﻳ ﺪ وﻗ ﺪ ﺗﻌﻤ ﻞ ﺑﺠﻬ ﺪ ﺗ ﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ 380‬ﻓﻮﻟ ﺖ‪ 50/‬هﺮﺗ ﺰ‪/‬ﺛﻼﺛ ﻲ اﻷﻃ ﻮار‬ ‫‪o‬‬
‫وﻳ ﺘﻢ ﺗﻘ ﻮﻳﻢ ﻣﺤ ﺮك اﻟ ﻀﺎﻏﻂ ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘ ﺔ ﺳ ﺘﺎر‪/‬دﻟﺘ ﺎ أو اﻟﺘﻘ ﻮﻳﻢ اﻟﻠ ﻴﻦ )‪ (Soft starters‬وﺗﻮﺟ ﺪ وﺣ ﺪات ﺗﻌﻤ ﻞ ﺑﺠﻬ ﻮد ﺗ ﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪3300‬‬
‫ﻓﻮﻟﺖ ‪ 6600 ،‬ﻓﻮﻟﺖ‪ ،‬وﻗﺪ ﺗﺼﻞ ﻗﺪرة اﻟﻤﺤﺮك ﻓﻰ اﻟﻮﺣﺪات اﻟﻜﺒﻴﺮة إﻟﻰ ‪ 750‬ك‪.‬‬
‫‪- 163 -‬‬

‫‪st‬‬
‫‪ .b‬ﻧﻈﺎم اﻟﺘﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺑﺎﻻﻣﺘﺼﺎص )‪(Absorption Chillers System‬‬
‫‪ o‬ﻳﺼﻞ ﺳﻌﺎﺗﻬﺎ ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ 1000‬ﻃﻦ ﺗﺒﺮﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﺘﻢ إﻧﺘﺎج ﻣﺎء ﻣﺜﻠﺞ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪام ﺑﺨﺎر أو ﺣﺘﻰ إﺷﻌﺎل ﻧﺎر ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮة)‪ (Direct fire‬ﻟﺘﺴﺨﻴﻦ‬
‫ﻣﺤﻠﻮل ﻣﻠﺤﻰ )‪ (Lithium bromide‬ﻓﻰ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ إﻋﺎدة ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪ اﻟﻤﻠﺢ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻧﺰع ﺑﺨﺎر اﻟﻤﺎء ﻣﻦ اﻟﻤﺤﻠﻮل واﻟﺤﺼﻮل ﻋﻠﻰ وﺳ ﻂ ﻣ ﺎﺋﻰ‬
‫ذو درﺟﺔ ﺣﺮارة ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ ﻳﻘﻮم ﺑﺘﺒﺮﻳﺪ اﻟﻤﺎء وﺗﺜﻠﻴﺠﻪ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪاﻣﻪ ﻓﻰ ﺗﻜﻴﻴﻒ هﻮاء اﻟﻤﺒﻨﻰ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ o‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﻣﻜﺜﻔﺎت هﺬﻩ اﻟﻮﺣﺪات ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺎء وﻳ ﺴﺘﺨﺪم ﻟﻬ ﺬا اﻟﻐ ﺮض أﺑ ﺮاج ﺗﺒﺮﻳ ﺪ ذات ﻣ ﺮاوح ﺿ ﺨﻤﺔ وﻣ ﺰودة ﺑﻄﻠﻤﺒ ﺎت ﻣﻴ ﺎﻩ ﺿ ﺨﻤﺔ‬
‫أﻳﻀًﺎ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺳﻌﺔ اﻟﻮﺣﺪة‪.‬‬
‫‪ o‬ﺗﺤﺘ ﺎج وﺣ ﺪات اﻟﺘﺒﺮﻳ ﺪ ﺑﺎﻻﻣﺘ ﺼﺎص ﻟﻤ ﺼﺪر ﻗ ﺪرة آﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴ ﺔ اﺻ ﻐﺮ ﺑ ﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻠﺤ ﻮظ ﻟﻼﺳ ﺘﻐﻨﺎء ﻋ ﻦ اﻟﻘ ﺪرة اﻟ ﻀﺨﻤﺔ اﻟﻼزﻣ ﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻀﻮاﻏﻂ ﻣﻘﺎرﻧﺔ ﺑﺤﺎﻟﺔ اﻟﻮﺣﺪات اﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ وﺗﺤﺘﺎج هﺬﻩ اﻟﻮﺣﺪة ﻓﻘﻂ إﻟﻰ ﻗﺪرة آﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻟﺘﻐﺬﻳﺔ اﻟﻄﻠﻤﺒﺎت وه ﻰ ﻃﻠﻤﺒ ﺎت ﻣﻴ ﺎﻩ‬
‫اﻟﻤﺒﺨﺮ وﻃﻠﻤﺒﺘﻰ اﻟﻤﺤﻠﻮل وﻃﻠﻤﺒﺎت أﺑﺮاج اﻟﺘﺒﺮﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﻓﻤﺜﻼ وﺣﺪة ﺗﺜﻠﻴﺞ اﻟﻤﻴﺎﻩ ﺑﺎﻻﻣﺘﺼﺎص ﺳﻌﺔ ‪ 330‬ﻃﻦ ﺗﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺤﺘ ﺎج إﻟ ﻰ ﻗ ﺪرة‬
‫آﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ أآﺒﺮ ﻣﻦ ‪ 40‬ك‪.‬و‪.‬‬
‫‪- 164 -‬‬

‫‪st‬‬
‫‪ (189‬ﻣﺎ هﻰ اﻟﻘﺪرة اﻟﻼزﻣﺔ ﻷﺟﻬﺰة اﻟﺘﻜﻴﻴﻒ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﻦ هﺬﻩ اﻷﻣﺎآﻦ‬

‫• اﻟﻤﻜﺎﺗﺐ اﻟﻜﺒﻴﺮة‬
‫• اﻟﻤﻜﺎﺗﺐ اﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮة‬
‫• ﻏﺮف ﺗﺪرﻳﺲ‬
‫• ﻣﺨﺎزن ﺗﺠﺎرﻳﺔ‬
‫• ﻏﺮف ﻣﺮﺿﻰ ﻓﻲ اﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻔﻴﺎت‬
‫• ﻏﺮف اﻟﻔﻨﺎدق‬
‫• اﻟﺒﻨﻮك‬
‫• اﻟﻮرش واﻟﻤﺼﺎﻧﻊ‬
‫• اﻟﻤﺴﺎﺟﺪ‬
‫• اﻟﻤﺤﻼت اﻟﺘﺠﺎرﻳﺔ‬
‫• ﺳﻮﺑﺮ ﻣﺎرآﺖ‬
‫• ﻏﺮف آﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫• ﻣﻄﺎﻋﻢ‬
‫وات ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﺮ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ‬ ‫ﻃﻦ ﺗﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﺮ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ‬ ‫ﻧﻮع اﻟﻤﺒﻨﻰ‬
‫‪75‬‬ ‫‪0.5‬‬ ‫اﻟﻤﻜﺎﺗﺐ اﻟﻜﺒﻴﺮة‬
‫‪55‬‬ ‫‪0.033‬‬ ‫اﻟﻤﻜﺎﺗﺐ اﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮة‬
‫‪75‬‬ ‫‪0.05‬‬ ‫ﻏﺮف ﺗﺪرﻳﺲ‬
‫‪81‬‬ ‫‪0.054‬‬ ‫ﻣﺨﺎزن ﺗﺠﺎرﻳﺔ‬
‫‪65‬‬ ‫‪0.043‬‬ ‫ﻏﺮف ﻣﺮﺿﻰ ﻓﻲ اﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻔﻴﺎت‬
‫‪65‬‬ ‫‪0.043‬‬ ‫ﻏﺮف اﻟﻔﻨﺎدق‬
‫‪81‬‬ ‫‪0.054‬‬ ‫اﻟﺒﻨﻮك‬
‫‪65‬‬ ‫‪0.043‬‬ ‫اﻟﻮرش واﻟﻤﺼﺎﻧﻊ‬
‫‪90‬‬ ‫‪0.06‬‬ ‫اﻟﻤﺴﺎﺟﺪ‬
‫‪90‬‬ ‫‪0.06‬‬ ‫اﻟﻤﺤﻼت اﻟﺘﺠﺎرﻳﺔ‬
‫‪65‬‬ ‫‪0.043‬‬ ‫ﺳﻮﺑﺮ ﻣﺎرآﺖ‬
‫‪108‬‬ ‫‪0.072‬‬ ‫ﻏﺮف آﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫‪165‬‬ ‫‪0.11‬‬ ‫ﻣﻄﺎﻋﻢ‬
‫‪- 165 -‬‬

‫‪st‬‬
‫‪ (190‬آﻴﻒ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻃﻠﻤﺒﺎت رﻓﻊ اﻟﻤﻴﺎﻩ ﻓﻰ اﻟﻤﺒﺎﻧﻰ ؟‬

‫ﺗﻜﻮن ﺗﻐﺬﻳﺔ اﻟﻤﻴﺎﻩ ﻟﻠﻤﺒﺎﻧﻰ اﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ )ذات اﻟﻄﺎﺑﻘﻴﻦ أو اﻟﺜﻼﺛﺔ ﻃﻮاﺑﻖ( ﻣ ﻦ ﻣ ﺼـﺪر ﻣ ـﺮﻓﻖ ﻣﻴ ﺎﻩ اﻟ ﺸﺮب ﻣﺒﺎﺷ ﺮة اﻋﺘﻤ ﺎدًا ﻋﻠ ﻰ ﺿ ﻐﻂ اﻟ ﺸﺒﻜﺔ‬ ‫‪o‬‬
‫)‪ 3.5‬ﺑﺎر إﻟﻰ ‪ 4.8‬ﺑﺎر( وه ﻮ ﺿ ﻐﻂ آ ﺎف ﻟ ﺪﻓﻊ اﻟﻤ ﺎء ﻣ ﻦ اﻟ ﺼﻨﺎﺑﻴﺮ ﻋﻨ ﺪ ﺿ ﻐﻂ ﻳﺘ ﺮاوح ﻣ ﺎ ﺑ ﻴﻦ )‪ 0.35‬ﺑ ﺎر و ‪ 1.35‬ﺑ ﺎر( ﺑﻌ ﺪ اﻟﺘﻐﻠ ﺐ ﻋﻠ ﻰ‬
‫اﻻﺣﺘﻜﺎك ﻓﻰ اﻟﻤﻮاﺳﻴﺮ واﻟﺼﻨﺎﺑﻴﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﻰ اﻟﻤﺒﺎﻧﻰ ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻄﺔ اﻻرﺗﻔﺎع ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ 30‬ﻣﺘﺮًا )ﺣﻮاﻟﻰ ‪ 10‬ﻃﻮاﺑﻖ( ﺿﺦ اﻟﻤﺎء ﻣﻦ اﻟﻤﺼﺪر اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮة )أو ﻣﻦ ﺧﺰان أرﺿﻰ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﺪروم‬ ‫‪o‬‬
‫ﻳﻤ ﻸ ﻣ ﻦ اﻟ ﺸﺒﻜﺔ اﻟﻌﻤﻮﻣﻴ ﺔ ﺗﺜﺎﻗﻠﻴ ًﺎ( إﻟ ﻰ ﺧ ﺰان ﻋﻠ ﻮى ﻓ ﻮق ﺳ ﻄﺢ اﻟﻤﺒﻨ ﻰ )أو ﻓ ﻮق ﺷﺨ ﺸﻴﺨﺔ اﻟ ﺴﻠﻢ(‪ ،‬وﻳﻼﺣ ﻆ أن اﻟ ﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻨ ﺪ اﻷدوار أﺳ ﻔﻞ‬
‫اﻟﺨﺰان ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮة ﻳﻜﻮن ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺎً‪ ،‬وﻻ ﺑﺪ ﻣﻦ اﺳﺘﺨﺪام ﻣﻀﺨﺔ ﺻﻐﻴﺮة ﻟﺮﻓ ﻊ اﻟ ﻀﻐﻂ وﺗﺮآ ﺐ ﺑﺎﻟ ﺴﻄﺢ )ﻗ ﺪرة ﺣ ﻮاﻟﻰ ‪ 1.5‬ك‪.‬و‪ (.‬ﻣ ﺰودة ﺑﺨ ﺰان‬
‫ﺗﻤﺪد )‪ (Expansion tank‬ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ وذﻟﻚ ﻟﻀﻤﺎن ﺿﻐﻂ أﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻨﺪ هﺬﻩ اﻷدوار‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻮﻟﻰ رﻓﻊ اﻟﻤﻴﺎﻩ إﻟﻰ اﻟﺨﺰان اﻟﻌﻠﻮى ﻓﻮق ﺳﻄﺢ اﻟﻤﺒﻨﻰ ﻃﻠﻤﺒﺔ آﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴ ﺔ ﺗﻌﻤ ﻞ ﺑﻤﺤ ﺮك ﻓ ﻰ ﺣ ﺪود ‪ 7.5‬ك‪.‬و‪ .‬ﻟﻤﻠ ﺊ اﻟﺨ ﺰان وﺗﻌﻤ ﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴ ًﺎ ﻣ ﻦ‬ ‫‪o‬‬
‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎح ﻣﻨﺴﻮب )‪ .(Level switch‬وﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﻋﺎدة ﻃﻠﻤﺒﺘﺎن أﺣﺪهﻤﺎ ﺗﻌﻤ ﻞ واﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴ ﺔ اﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻴ ﺔ‪ .‬وﻳﻤﻜ ﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳ ﺪ ﻗ ﺪرات اﻟﻤﺤﺮآ ﺎت ﺣ ﺴﺐ اﻻرﺗﻔ ﺎع‬
‫وآﻤﻴﺔ اﻟﻤﻴﺎﻩ ﻣﻦ ﻗﻮاﻧﻴﻦ اﻟﻬﻴﺪروﻟﻴﻜﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺒﻴﻦ ﺷﻜﻞ )‪ (22-1‬رﺳﻤًﺎ ﺗﺨﻄﻴﻄﻴًﺎ ﻟﻨﻈﺎم ﺗﻐﺬﻳﺔ ﺧﺰان ﻋﻠﻮى ﻟﻤﺒﻨﻰ ﻣﻜﻮن ﻣﻦ ‪ 64‬ﻃﺎﺑﻘًﺎ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻤﻪ إﻟﻰ ﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﻣﻨ ﺎﻃﻖ ﺗﺘ ﻮﻟﻰ اﻟﺮﻓ ﻊ ﻟﻜ ﻞ ﻣﻨﻄﻘ ﺔ‬ ‫‪o‬‬
‫ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻃﻠﻤﺒﺘﻴﻦ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜـ ـﻦ ﻓ ﻰ اﻟﻤﺒﺎﻧـ ـﻰ ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻄـ ـﺔ اﻻرﺗﻔ ـﺎع اﺳ ﺘﺨﺪام ﺿ ﻐﻂ ﺛﺎﺑ ﺖ ﻋـ ـﻦ ﻃﺮﻳـ ـﻖ ﺧ ﺰان ﺗﻤـ ـﺪد )‪ (Expansion tank‬وﺣ ﺴﺎس ﻟﻠ ﻀﻐﻂ‬ ‫‪o‬‬
‫)‪ .(Pressure-stat‬ﻳﺒﻴﻦ ﺷﻜﻞ )‪ (23-1‬أ ‪ ،‬ب رﺳﻤًﺎ ﺗﺨﻄﻴﻄﻴًﺎ ﻟﻠﺘﻐﺬﻳﺔ إﻟﻰ أﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﻐﻂ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ‪ .‬وﻳﻤﻜﻦ أن ﺗﻜ ﻮن هﻨ ﺎك ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋ ﺔ ﻣ ﻦ ﺛﻼﺛ ﺔ‬
‫ﻃﻠﻤﺒﺎت ﺗﻌﻤﻞ واﺣﺪة ﻣﻨﻬﺎ أو اﺛﻨﺘﺎن أو ﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﺣﺴﺐ اﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎج‪ ،‬آﻤﺎ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ أن ﺗﻜﻮن ه ﺬﻩ اﻟﻤ ﻀﺨﺎت ﻣ ﺰودة ﺑﻤﺤﺮآ ﺎت ﻣﺘﻐﻴ ﺮة اﻟ ﺴﺮﻋﺔ وﺑﺎﻟﺘ ﺎﻟﻰ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ اﻟﺤﺼﻮل ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺪد آﺒﻴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻌﺪﻻت اﻟﻀﺦ ﻣﺎ ﺑﻴﻦ اﻟﺼﻔﺮ واﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ اﻟﻘﺼﻮى‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ هﺬﻩ اﻟﻤ ﻀﺨﺎت ﻃﺒﻘ ًﺎ ﻟﺘﺘ ﺎﺑﻊ ﻣﻌ ﻴﻦ ﺣﻴ ﺚ ﺗﻌﻤ ﻞ‬
‫أﺻﻐﺮ ﻣﻀﺨﺔ )‪ (Jokey pump‬ﻋﻨﺪ أﻗﻞ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺛﻢ ﻳﻘﻮم ﺣ ﺴﺎس اﻟ ﻀﻐﻂ وﻟﻮﺣ ﺔ اﻟﺘ ﺸﻐﻴﻞ واﻟ ﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺘﺘ ﺎﺑﻊ اﻟﺘ ﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑ ﻴﻦ اﻟﻄﻠﻤﺒﺘ ﻴﻦ اﻟﻜﺒﻴ ﺮﺗﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﺗﻌﻤﻼن ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺒﺎدل‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻈﺮًا ﻷن ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﻃﻠﻤﺒﺎت وﻗﺖ اﻟﺬروة ﻓﻰ اﻟﻤﺒﻨﻰ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺛﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﻤﻴﺎﻩ ﻓﻰ اﻟﻤﺎﺳﻮرة اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺎرع‪ ،‬ﻓﻘ ﺪ ﺗ ﻀﻄﺮ‬ ‫‪o‬‬
‫اﻟﺴﻠﻄﺎت إﻟﻰ إﺟﺒﺎر اﻟﻤﻼك ﺑﺒﻨﺎء ﺧﺰان أرﺿﻰ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﺪروم ﻟﻠﺴﺤﺐ ﻣﻨﻪ‪ ،‬وآﻤﺎ هﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﻓﻰ ﺷﻜﻞ )‪ (23-1‬ب‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺒﻴﻦ ﺷﻜﻞ )‪ (24-1‬اﻟﻄﻠﻤﺒﺎت اﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻟﺮﻓ ﻊ ﺿ ﻐﻂ اﻟﻤﻴ ﺎﻩ وﺗﻮﺻ ﻴﻠﻬﺎ إﻟ ﻰ اﻷدوار اﻟﻌﻠﻴ ﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﻤ ﺎرات اﻟ ﺴﻜﻨﻴﺔ ﻣﺘﻮﺳ ﻄﺔ اﻻرﺗﻔ ﺎع‪ .‬وﻗ ﺪ ﺗﻮﺟ ﺪ‬ ‫‪o‬‬
‫وﺣﺪات ﻣﺘﻌﺪدة ﻳﻤﻜﻦ أن ﻳﺼﻞ ﻋﺪدهﺎ إﻟﻰ ‪ 6‬ﻣﻀﺨﺎت وﻳﻤﻜﻦ اﺳﺘﺨﺪام ﻧﻔﺲ اﻷﺳﻠﻮب ﻓﻰ اﻟﻤﺒﺎﻧﻰ اﻟﺴﻜﻨﻴﺔ أو اﻟﺘﺠﺎرﻳﺔ أو ﻓﻰ اﻟﻤﺒ ﺎﻧﻰ اﻟﻌﺎﻣ ﺔ أو‬
‫اﻟﻔﻨ ﺎدق أو اﻟﻤﺴﺘ ﺸﻔﻴﺎت‪ .‬وﺗ ﺼـﻞ اﻟﻘـ ـﺪرة ﻓ ﻰ اﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋ ﺔ إﻟ ﻰ ‪ 2.98 × 6‬ك‪.‬و‪ .‬ﻋﻨ ﺪ ﺳ ﺮﻋﺔ ‪2900‬ﻟﻔ ﺔ‪/‬د وﺟﻬ ﺪ ‪ 3/50/380‬وﺗﻘ ﻮم ﺑﺮﻓ ﻊ‬
‫‪40‬م‪/3‬ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ‪ 5‬ﺑﺎر‪.‬‬
‫‪- 166 -‬‬

‫‪st‬‬
‫‪ (191‬آﻴﻒ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻃﻠﻤﺒﺎت اﻟﺼﺮف اﻟﺼﺤﻰ ﻓﻰ اﻟﻤﺒﺎﻧﻰ ؟‬

‫ﻳﺘﻢ رﻓﻊ ﻣﻴﺎﻩ اﻟﺼﺮف ﻣﻊ اﻟﻤﺨﻠﻔﺎت واﻟﻔﻀﻼت ﻣﻦ اﻟﻤﺒﺎﻧﻰ واﻟﺘ ﻰ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜ ﻦ ﺻ ﺮﻓﻬﺎ ﺗﺜﺎﻗﻠﻴ ًﺎ وﻳﻜ ﻮن ذﻟ ﻚ ﺑﻮاﺳ ﻄﺔ ﻣﺤﻄ ﺔ ﻃﻠﻤﺒ ﺎت ﺧﺎﺻ ﺔ ﺗﻘ ﻮم‬ ‫‪o‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﻓﻌﻬﺎ إﻟﻰ ﺧﻄﻮط ﺻﺮف اﻟﻤﺠﺎرى اﻟﻌﻤﻮﻣﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪم ﻟﻬﺬا اﻟﻐﺮض ﻃﻠﻤﺒﺎت ﻏﺎﻃﺴﺔ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ آﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪o‬‬
‫ﻳﺒﻴﻦ ﺷﻜﻞ )‪ (26-1‬ﻣﺤﻄﺔ ﻟﺮﻓﻊ ﻣﻴﺎﻩ ﺻﺮف )ﺑﺪون ﻓﻀﻼت( واﻟﺘ ﻰ ﻳﻄﻠ ﻖ ﻋﻠﻴﻬ ﺎ )‪ (Waste water‬وﺗﺘﻜ ﻮن ﻣ ﻦ ﻃﻠﻤﺒﺘ ﻴﻦ وﻋﻮاﻣ ﺎت اﻟ ﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫‪o‬‬
‫واﻹﻧﺬار ﻋﻨﺪ ارﺗﻔﺎع ﻣﻨﺴﻮب اﻟﻤﻴﺎﻩ ﻓﻰ اﻟﺒﻴﺎرة ﻋﻦ اﻟﺤﺪ اﻟﻤﺴﻤﻮح‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺒﻴﻦ ﺷﻜﻞ )‪ (27-1‬ﻧﻤﺎذج ﻃﻠﻤﺒﺎت ﺻﺮف ﺳﻮاﺋﻞ ﺑ ﺪون ﻣﺨﻠﻔ ﺎت ﺛﻘﻴﻠ ﺔ‪ ،‬وﺷ ﻜﻞ )‪ (28-1‬ﻧﻤ ﺎذج ﻟﻄﻠﻤﺒ ﺎت ﺻ ﺮف ﺳ ﻮاﺋﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺨﻠﻔ ﺎت‪ .‬و ﺗ ﺼﻞ‬ ‫‪o‬‬
‫ﻗﺪرة اﻟﻤﺤﺮآﺎت اﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻓﻰ اﻟﻨﻤﺎذج اﻟﻤﺒﻴﻨﺔ ﻓﻰ ﺷﻜﻞ )‪ (28-1‬إﻟﻰ ‪ 10‬ك‪.‬و‪ .‬وﻗﺪ ﺗﺼﻞ ﻓﻰ اﻟﻨﻤﺎذج اﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻓﻰ ﺻﺮف ﺳ ﻮاﺋﻞ ﺑﻬ ﺎ ﻣ ﻮاد‬
‫ﺻﻠﺒﺔ إﻟﻰ ‪ 15‬ك‪.‬و‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺟﻬﺪ ‪ 3/50/380‬وﺗﻜﻮن ﻋﺎدة ﻓﻰ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻃﻠﻤﺒﺘﻴﻦ أو ﺛﻼﺛﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺠﺐ أن ﺗﻌﻤﻞ اﻟﻄﻠﻤﺒﺎت اﻟﻤﻐﻤﻮرة ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺒﺎدل ﺗﻔﺎدﻳًﺎ ﻟﺘﻠﻒ ﺗﻠﻚ اﻟﺘﻰ ﺗﻈﻞ ﺑﺪاﺧﻠﻬﺎ ﻣﻴﺎﻩ اﻟ ﺼﺮف‪ ،‬إذا ﺑﻘﻴ ﺖ دوﻧﻤ ﺎ ﻋﻤ ﻞ ﻟﻔﺘ ﺮة ﻃﻮﻳﻠ ﺔ‪ .‬وﻳﻜ ﻮن ذﻟ ﻚ‬ ‫‪o‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪام داﺋﺮة اﻧﺘﻘﺎء ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺗﻘﻮم ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻟﻄﻠﻤﺒﺘﻴﻦ ﺗﺒﺎدﻟﻴًﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ آﻞ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ‪.‬‬
‫‪- 167 -‬‬

‫‪st‬‬
‫‪ (192‬آﻴﻒ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻃﻠﻤﺒﺎت اﻟﺤﺮﻳﻖ ﻓﻰ اﻟﻤﺒﺎﻧﻰ ؟‬
‫‪ o‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ أن ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪم ﻃﻠﻤﺒﺔ ﻣﻨﻔﺮدة ﻟﻀﺦ اﻟﻤﻴﺎﻩ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺣﺪوث ﺣﺮﻳﻖ‪ ،‬ﻓﻌﻠﻰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ اﻟﻤﺜﺎل ﻗﺪ ﻳﻜﻮن ﺗﺼﺮﻓﻬﺎ ﺣﻮاﻟﻰ ‪40‬م‪/3‬ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ رﻓﻊ ﺣ ﻮاﻟﻰ‬
‫‪ 10‬ﺑﺎر وﺗﻜﻮن ﻗﺪرة ﻣﺤﺮآﻬﺎ اﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻰ ‪ 22‬ك‪.‬و‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ 2900‬ﻟﻔﺔ‪/‬د وﺟﻬﺪ ‪.3/50/380‬‬
‫‪ o‬ﻳﺠﺐ أن ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻧﻈﻢ اﻹﻃﻔﺎء ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺎء ﻓﻰ اﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ اﻟﻜﺒﻴﺮة أو اﻟﻤﺒﺎﻧﻰ ﺷﺎهﻘﺔ اﻻرﺗﻔﺎع اﻟﺘﻮازن اﻟﻬﻴﺪروﻟﻴﻜﻰ ﺑﻴﻦ أﺑﻌﺪ وأﻗﺮب ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻟﻤﺤﻄﺔ اﻟﻀﺦ‪.‬‬
‫‪ o‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ أن ﻳﺘﻢ إدارة اﻟﻤﻀﺨﺔ ﻣﻦ اﻟﻤﺤﺮك اﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻰ إﻣﺎ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮة )ﺑﺪون اﺳﺘﺨﺪام آﻮﺑﻠﻨﺞ( أو ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪام آﻮﺑﻠﻨﺞ‪.‬‬
‫‪ (193‬هﻞ ﻳﺠﺐ اﺳﺘﺨﺪام ﻃﻠﻤﺒﺔ آﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ وأﺧﺮى ﺗﺪار ﺑﻤﺎآﻴﻨﺔ دﻳﺰل ﻓﻰ اﻟﻤﺒﺎﻧﻰ ؟‬
‫‪ o‬ﻓﻰ ﻣﻌﻈﻢ اﻟﻤﺒﺎﻧﻰ ﻳﻜﻮن ﻓﻰ ﻣﺤﻄﺔ اﻟﻀﺦ ﻃﻠﻤﺒﺔ ﺗﺪار ﺑﻤﺤ ﺮك آﻬﺮﺑ ﺎﺋﻰ وأﺧ ﺮى ﺗ ﺪار ﺑﻮاﺳ ﻄﺔ ﻣﺤ ﺮك دﻳ ﺰل ﻳﻘ ﻮم ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴ ًﺎ ﻋﻨ ﺪ ﺣ ﺪوث ﺣﺮﻳ ﻖ‬
‫وﺗﺘ ﻮﻟﻰ ﻃﻠﻤﺒ ﺔ ﺟ ﻮآﻰ )‪ (Jockey pump‬إﻳﺠ ﺎد ﺿ ﻐﻂ ﻋﻠ ﻰ ﻣﺠﻤ ﻊ اﻟﻤﻮاﺳ ﻴﺮ )‪ (Header‬اﻟﺮﺋﻴ ﺴﻲ ﻳ ﺆدى إﻟ ﻰ ﻋﻤ ﻞ اﻟﻄﻠﻤﺒ ﺎت ﺑﺎﺳ ﺘﺨﺪام‬
‫ﺣﺴﺎس ﺿﻐﻂ وﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪- 168 -‬‬

‫‪st‬‬
‫‪ (194‬آﻴﻒ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻗﺪرة ﻣﺤﺮك ﻃﻠﻤﺒﺔ رﻓﻊ اﻟﻤﻴﺎﻩ أو ﻃﻠﻤﺒﺔ اﻟﺼﺮف اﻟﺼﺤﻰ أو ﻃﻠﻤﺒﺔ اﻟﺤﺮﻳﻖ ﻓﻰ اﻟﻤﺒﺎﻧﻰ ؟‬
‫‪ o‬وﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺣﺴﺎب ﻗﺪرة ﻣﺤﺮك اﻟﻄﻠﻤﺒﺔ )‪ (P‬ﻣﻦ اﻟﻤﻌﺎدﻟﺔ اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬

‫‪ω.Q × H‬‬
‫=‪P‬‬ ‫‪× 0.746 KW‬‬
‫‪75 × η‬‬
‫ﺣﻴﺚ‪:‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﺪل اﻟﺘﺼﺮف )م‪/3‬ث(‬ ‫‪:‬‬ ‫‪Q‬‬
‫اﻟﺮاﻓﻊ اﻻﺳﺘﺎﺗﻴﻜﻰ )م(‬ ‫‪:‬‬ ‫‪H‬‬
‫اﻟﻜﻔﺎءة )ﺣﻮاﻟﻰ ‪(٪ 80 -75‬‬ ‫‪:‬‬ ‫‪η‬‬
‫اﻟﻜﺜﺎﻓﺔ = )ﻟﻠﻤﻴﺎﻩ ‪ 1000‬وﻟﻠﻔﻀﻼت ‪ 1200‬آﺠﻢ‪/‬م‪(3‬‬ ‫‪:‬‬ ‫‪ω‬‬
‫‪ o‬وﻳﻮﺿﺢ اﻟﺠﺪول اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻗﺪرة ﻃﻠﻤﺒﺎت اﻟﻤﻴﺎﻩ ﺣﺴﺐ ﻣﻌﺪل اﻟﺘﺼﺮف ﻋﻨﺪ رﻓﻊ )‪ (10‬ﺑﺎر وﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺟﻬﺪ ‪ 380‬ﻓﻮﻟﺖ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ اﻷﻃﻮار‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪرة اﻟﻄﻠﻤﺒﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺪل اﻟﺘﺼﺮف‬

‫)ك‪.‬وات(‬ ‫)م‪/3‬ﺳﺎﻋﺔ(‬
‫‪5.5‬‬ ‫‪18‬‬
‫‪7.5‬‬ ‫‪21.6‬‬
‫‪7.5‬‬ ‫‪22.4‬‬
‫‪ o‬وﻳﻮﺿﺢ اﻟﺠﺪول اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻗﺪرة ﻣﺤﺮك ﻃﻠﻤﺒﺎت اﻟﺤﺮﻳﻖ ﺣﺴﺐ اﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ رﻓﻊ ﻣﺎﻧﻮﻣﺘﺮى )‪ (10‬ﺑﺎر وﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺟﻬﺪ ‪.3/50/380‬‬
‫ﻗﺪرة اﻟﻤﺤﺮك‬ ‫اﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ‬

‫م‬
‫)ك‪.‬وات(‬ ‫)ﻟﻔﺔ‪/‬د(‬
‫‪15‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬
‫‪20‬‬ ‫‪1500‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬
‫‪35‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬
‫‪77‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬
‫‪102‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬
‫‪130‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬
‫‪2900‬‬
‫‪155‬‬ ‫‪7‬‬
‫‪175‬‬ ‫‪8‬‬
‫‪205‬‬ ‫‪9‬‬
‫‪ o‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ أن ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪم ﻃﻠﻤﺒﺔ ﻣﻨﻔﺮدة ﻟﻀﺦ اﻟﻤﻴﺎﻩ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺣﺪوث ﺣﺮﻳﻖ‪ ،‬ﻓﻌﻠﻰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ اﻟﻤﺜﺎل ﻗﺪ ﻳﻜﻮن ﺗﺼﺮﻓﻬﺎ ﺣﻮاﻟﻰ ‪40‬م‪/3‬ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ رﻓﻊ ﺣ ﻮاﻟﻰ‬
‫‪ 10‬ﺑﺎر وﺗﻜﻮن ﻗﺪرة ﻣﺤﺮآﻬﺎ اﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻰ ‪ 22‬ك‪.‬و‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ 2900‬ﻟﻔﺔ‪/‬د وﺟﻬﺪ ‪.3/50/380‬‬
‫‪- 169 -‬‬

‫‪st‬‬
‫‪ (195‬آﻴﻒ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺳﺨﺎﻧﺎت ﺣﻤﺎﻣﺎت اﻟﺴﺒﺎﺣﺔ ؟‬
‫‪ o‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺎدة اﺳﺘﺨﺪام ﺳﺨﺎﻧﺎت اﻟﺰﻳﺖ أو ﺳﺨﺎﻧﺎت اﻟﺒﺨﺎر ﻟﺘﺴﺨﻴﻦ اﻟﻤﺎء اﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪم ﻓﻰ ﺣﻤﺎﻣﺎت اﻟﺴﺒﺎﺣﺔ وﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ أﺣﻴﺎﻧًﺎ اﺳﺘﺨﺪام اﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑ ﺎء ﻓ ﻰ ﻋﻤﻠﻴ ﺔ‬
‫اﻟﺘﺴﺨﻴﻦ‪.‬‬
‫‪ o‬ﻳﺠﺐ أن ﺗﺰود ﺣﻤﺎﻣﺎت اﻟﺴﺒﺎﺣﺔ ﺑﻮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻟﻠﺤﺪ ﻣﻦ ارﺗﻔ ﺎع درﺟ ﺔ ﺣ ﺮارة اﻟﻤ ﺎء ﺣﺘ ﻰ ﻻ ﺗﺰﻳ ﺪ ﻋ ﻦ ‪ْ 26.5‬م )ﻳ ﺴﺘﺜﻨﻰ ﻣ ﻦ ذﻟ ﻚ اﻟﺤﻤﺎﻣ ﺎت‬
‫اﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻷﻏﺮاض اﻟﻌﻼج‪.‬‬
‫‪ o‬ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﺤﻤﺎﻣﺎت اﻟﻤﻜﺸﻮﻓﺔ ﻓﻰ اﻷﻧﺪﻳﺔ واﻟﻔﻨﺎدق واﻟﻘﺮى اﻟﺴﻴﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﻓﻴﺘﻢ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓ ﻰ درﺟ ﺔ ﺣ ﺮارة اﻟﻤ ﺎء ﺑﺤﻴ ﺚ ﻳﺘﻮﻗ ﻒ اﻟﺘ ﺴﺨﻴﻦ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴ ًﺎ إذا ﻗﻠ ﺖ‬
‫درﺟﺔ ﺣﺮارة اﻟﻬﻮاء اﻟﺨﺎرﺟﻰ ﻋﻦ ‪ْ 16‬م )ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮًا ﻟﻠﻄﺎﻗﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫‪ (196‬آﻴﻒ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﺴﺎب اﻟﺤﻤﻞ اﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻰ ﻟﻠﺴﺨﺎﻧﺎت اﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻓﻰ ﺗﺴﺨﻴﻦ اﻟﻤﻴﺎﻩ ﻓﻰ اﻟﻤﻨﺎزل اﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮة ؟‬
‫‪ o‬ﻳﺒﻴﻦ ﺟﺪول )‪ (10-1‬ﻗﺪرة اﻟﺪﺧﻮل ﻟﻠﺴﺨﺎﻧﺎت اﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻓﻰ اﻟﻤﻨﺎزل اﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮة )ﻋﺎﺋﻠﺔ أو ﻋ ﺎﺋﻠﺘﻴﻦ( ﺑﺎﺳ ﺘﺨﺪام اﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑ ﺎء وﺗﻜ ﻮن ه ﺬﻩ اﻟ ﺴﺨﺎﻧﺎت‬
‫ﻣﺮآﺰﻳﺔ وﺗﻮﺿﻊ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﺪروم وﻳﺘﻢ اﻟﺘﻮزﻳﻊ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪام ﺷ ﺒﻜﺔ ﻣﻴ ﺎﻩ ﺧﺎﺻ ﺔ وﻳ ﺘﻢ ﻓﻴﻬ ﺎ اﺳ ﺘﺨﺪام ﻃﻠﻤﺒ ﺔ ﺗﻘﻠﻴ ﺐ ﻟ ﻀﻤﺎن ﺑﻘ ﺎء اﻟﻤ ﺎء ﺳ ﺎﺧﻦ وآ ﺬﻟﻚ‬
‫ﻃﻠﻤﺒﺎت اﻟﺮﻓﻊ إن اﻗﺘﻀﺖ اﻟﻀﺮورة‪.‬‬
‫‪ o‬ﻓﻰ اﻟﻤﺒﺎﻧﻰ اﻟﺴﻜﻨﻴﺔ ذات اﻟﺸﻘﻖ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪم أﺣﻴﺎﻧًﺎ ﺳﺨﺎﻧﺎت آﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤ ﺔ ﺑﺬاﺗﻬـ ـﺎ )ﻏﻴ ﺮ ﻣﺮآﺰﻳ ﺔ( وﺗﻮﺿـ ـﻊ ﺑﺎﻟﻘ ـﺮب ﻣ ﻦ دورات اﻟﻤﻴ ﺎﻩ ﺑ ﺴﻌﺎت‬
‫ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ 100 ، 70 ، 50 ، 30‬ﻟﺘﺮا ﻗﺪ ﺗﺼﻞ ﻗﺪرة اﻟﺴﺨﺎﻧﺎت ﺑﻬﺎ ﻣﺎ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ 1.2‬ك‪.‬و‪ .‬وﺣﺘﻰ ‪ 4.5‬ك‪.‬و‪.‬‬
‫‪ o‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪم ﺳﺨﺎﻧﺎت آﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻓﻮرﻳﺔ )ﺑﺪون ﺧﺰاﻧﺎت( ﺗﺮآﺐ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺧﻂ اﻟﻤﻴﺎﻩ اﻟ ﺴﺎﺧﻦ اﻟﺮﺋﻴ ﺴﻰ وﻗ ﺪ ﺗ ﺼﻞ ﻗ ﺪرﺗﻬﺎ اﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴ ﺔ ﺣﺘ ﻰ ‪ 22‬ك‪.‬وات‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺟﻬﺪ ‪ 3/50/380‬وذﻟﻚ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺎزل واﻟﻔﻴﻼت ﻟﺘﺴﺨﻴﻦ ﻣﻴﺎﻩ ﺣﻤﺎﻣﺎت اﻟﺠﺎآﻮزى وآﺬﻟﻚ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻔﻴﺎت اﻟﺘﻰ ﺗﺤﺘﺎج إﻟﻰ ﻣﻴﺎﻩ ﺳﺎﺧﻨﺔ ﻓﻮرﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺟﺪول رﻗﻢ )‪ (10-1‬أﻗﻞ ﺳﻌﺔ ﺣﺮارﻳﺔ ﻟﺴﺨﺎﻧﺎت ﻣﻴﺎﻩ ﻣﺮآﺰﻳﺔ‬

‫ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻮﺣﺪات )ﺳﻜﻨﻴﺔ ﻋﺎﺋﻠﺔ وﻋﺎﺋﻠﺘﻴﻦ(‬
‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬
‫ﻋﺪد اﻟﺤﻤﺎﻣﺎت‬ ‫‪1 to 1‬‬ ‫‪2 to 2‬‬ ‫‪3 to 3‬‬
‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬
‫ﻋﺪد ﺣﺠﺮات اﻟﻨﻮم‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬
‫ﺳﻌﺔ ﺧﺰان اﻟﺴﺨﺎن ﺑﺎﻟﻠﺘﺮ‬ ‫‪75 115 150 150 190 190 250 140 250 250 300‬‬
‫اﻟﻘﺪرة ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻴﻠﻮوات‬ ‫‪2.5 3.5 4.5 4.5 5.5 5.5 5.5 5.5 5.5 5.5 5.5‬‬
‫آﻤﻴﺔ اﻟﺴﺤﺐ ﻣﻦ اﻟﺨﺰان ﻓﻰ‬
‫‪115 170 225 220 270 270 330 270 330 380 385‬‬
‫ﺳﺎﻋﺔ واﺣﺪة ﺑﺎﻟﻠﺘﺮ‬
‫ﻣﻴﺎﻩ اﻻﺳﺘﻌﻮاض )ﻟﺘﺮ‪/‬ﺳﺎﻋﺔ(‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪55‬‬ ‫‪68‬‬ ‫‪68‬‬ ‫‪84‬‬ ‫‪84‬‬ ‫‪84‬‬ ‫‪84‬‬ ‫‪84‬‬ ‫‪84‬‬ ‫‪84‬‬
‫‪- 170 -‬‬

‫‪st‬‬
197) Calculate the annual savings and payback for installing an occupancy sensors given that:
– No. of fixtures 20 x 2 Lamps
– Fixture wattage Draw 88 watt/Fix
– Time length needed 20 min/hr.
– Operating hours 4000 hrs./year
– Electricity cost 0.15 LE/kWh
– Sensors cost 200 LE
198) For replacing an existing Lighting system of Incandescent lamps by a new fluorescent lamps, calculate the
annual savings and payback given that:
– Existing lighting system 100 Lamps (200 watt/lamp)
– 200 watt lamp efficacy 17.5 Lm./ watt
– Fluorescent lamps 36 watt ( 44 watt incl. Ballast)
– Fl. lamps efficacy 70 lm./watt
– Fl. lamps cost LE. 15 ( incl. Fixture)
– Annual operating hours 4000 hrs./year
– Electricity cost 0.15 LE./kWh
199) A 23,000 square meter high bay facility is presently lit with 800 twin 400 watt mercury vapour fixtures
(455 watts per lamp including ballast.) What are the annual savings of replacing the existing lighting
system with 800 single 400 watt high pressure sodium fixtures, (465 watts per lamp including ballast)
Assume 8000 hours per year, an energy cost of $0.05 per kWh, and a demand cost of $6.00 per kW-month.
- 171 -
st
200) Chooses the correct answer:
i. The efficacy of a light source refers to the Color rendering index of the lamp.
A) True B) False
ii. Increasing the coefficient of utilization of the room cavity will in many instances increase the number of
lamps required.
A) True B) False
iii. Which HID lamp has the highest efficacy?

A) Mercury Vapour B) Metal Halide
C) High Pressure Sodium
iv. A sewing factory. Lights are on 9 hours per day. The ceiling height is about 4 meters. Suggest an
appropriate light source.
A) Incandescent B) Fluorescent
C) Metal halide D) High pressure sodium
E) Low pressure sodium
v. One disadvantage to metal halide lamps is a pronounced tendency to shift colours as the lamp ages.
A) True B) False
vi. A building presently has the following lighting system:

Present: 196 mercury vapour light fixtures
Size: 250 watt/lamp
285 watt/fixture, including ballast
You have chosen to replace the existing system with the following:
Proposed: 140 high pressure sodium fixtures
Size: 150 watt/lamp
185 watt/fixture
The facility operates 24 hours/day. Approximate the heating effect if the heating system efficiency is 80%,
fuel costs $4.25 per GJ, and there are 200 heating days per year.
A) $4,445/year
B) $2,754/year
C) $6,986/year
D) $5,289/year
E) $2,754/year
- 172 -
st

Top Electrical Design Questions & Answers: 1 Edition

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

You might also like

Top Electrical Design Questions & Answers: 1 Edition

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Top Electrical Design Questions & Answers: 1 Edition

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Top Electrical Design

Questions & Answers

Prepared by: Mahmoud Essam Hizzah

Date: January 2010

Country: Cairo - Egypt

Career Title: Electrical Design Engineer

‫اﻟﺤﻤﺪ ﷲ و اﻟﺼﻼة و اﻟﺴﻼم ﻋﻠﻰ رﺳﻮل اﷲ ﺻﻠﻰ اﷲ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ و ﺳﻠﻢ‬

‫اﺳﺄل اﷲ ﻋﺰ و ﺟﻞ ان ﺗﻨﻔﻌﻨﻰ و ﺗﻨﻔﻌﻜﻢ هﺬﻩ اﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت ﻓﻰ اﻟﺪﻧﻴﺎ و ﻓﻰ اﻷﺧﺮة‪.‬‬

‫و اﻟﺴﻼم ﻋﻠﻴﻜﻢ و رﺣﻤﺔ اﷲ و ﺑﺮآﺎﺗﻪ‪.‬‬

1) Have you previously done design for electrical work?

If yes, the following two items must be answer

a- What facilities or buildings you designed?

b- What Standards or Norm you used in your design?

4) What are the de-rating factors considered in cable installation?

- Ground Temperature de-rating factor

7) What is the national color code of a three phase circuit?

- Red for phase (A)

¾ Shop Drawing (Execution):

Type of Test Location & Time of Test Reports & Certificates

Used to protect people against indirect

Type of Trip Type of Protection

Stands for Function

Six Selection Criteria:

- Total Discrimination: if for all fault current values, from

- Partial Discrimination: if the above condition is not respected

- No Discrimination: in the event of fault, both circuit breakers D1 and D2 open.

- Reduce C.B cost.

Cascading = Reduction of the installation cost

15) Fill the table below for Demand Load Estimation.

Lighting Sockets A/C Equipments Others

Lighting Sockets A/C Equipments Others

Types of Earthing Systems According to IEC:

Neutral & exposed conductive part connections:

First letter – Relationship of the power system to earth:

¾ T: Direct connection of neutral to earth;

Second letter – Relationship of the exposed-conductive-parts of the installation to earth:

¾ T: Direct electrical connection of exposed-conductive-parts to earth.

Arrangement of N & PE conductors:

Subsequent letter(s) (if any) – Arrangement of neutral and protective conductors:

¾ S: Neutral and protective conductor separate (N & PE).

There are three types of TN systems: TN-C, TN-S and TN-C-S

Advantages and drawbacks

Earthing system Advantages Drawbacks

 The cheapest  No continuity of service

 The most efficient:  More complex

17) Compare between earthing systems from the point of:

- When an installation includes high-power

Conditioning Mode Independent Mode

– Satellite communication (Internet data centers (IDC))

Advantages of Dynamic UPS

• One system powering critical and non-critical loads.

Disadvantages Chemical Batteries

Static UPS Room Layout Dynamic UPS Room Layout

20) What dose you conclude from:

- IP54: Protected against dust limited ingress (no harmful deposit).

- IESNA = Illuminating Engineering Society of North America.

- Cable Tray hot deep galvanized before perforation

¾ Cable Ladder is less expensive than cable tray.

The cheapest No continuity of service

The most efficient: More complex